LG | LVN180HV4 | Engineering Manual | LG LAN090HSV5 Engineering Manual

MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
INDOOR UNIT
ENGINEERING MANUAL
Vertical-Horizontal
Air Handling Units
Art CoolTM Mirror
Wall-Mounted
Art CoolTM Gallery
Wall-Mounted
Four-Way Ceiling Cassette
Ceiling-Concealed Duct
Indoor Units for Multi-Zone Heat Pump Systems
7,000 to 36,000 Btu/h
PROPRIETARY DATA NOTICE
This document, as well as all reports, illustrations, data, information, and
other materials are the property of LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., and are
disclosed by LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., only in confidence.
This document is for design purposes only.
EM_MultiF_IDU_3_18
For continual product development, LG reserves the right to change specifications without notice.
©LG Electronics Inc.
TABLE OF SYMBOLS
DANGER
This symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
WARNING
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.
Note:
This symbol indicates situations that may result in equipment or property damage accidents only.
This symbol indicates an action that should not be performed.
This document, as well as all reports, illustrations, data, information, and other materials are the property of LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Convergence of Technology,
Innovation, Flexibility, & Style.....................................................4
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials / Installation������������������������� 103
Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 104
Unit Nomenclature........................................................................5
Four-Way Ceiling Cassette Indoor Units................................113
Functions, Controls and
Options Overview.........................................................................6
Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units......................................................10
Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 10
General Data / Specifications..............................................................11
Dimensions......................................................................................... 12
Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 14
Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 16
Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 17
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution........................................... 18
Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................... 19
Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 20
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 21
Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 22
Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units....................................................29
Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units.......................................49
Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 49
General Data / Specifications............................................................. 50
Dimensions......................................................................................... 51
Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 53
Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 56
Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 58
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution........................................... 60
Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................... 62
Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 63
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 65
Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 66
Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units..................................................73
Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 73
General Data / Specifications............................................................. 74
Dimensions......................................................................................... 75
Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 76
Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 78
External Static Pressure..................................................................... 79
Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 80
Refrigerant Flow Diagrams................................................................. 81
Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 83
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 84
Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 85
Two-Way VAHU Indoor Units...................................................137
Mechanical Specifications and Features.......................................... 137
General Data / Specifications........................................................... 138
Dimensions....................................................................................... 139
Cooling Capacity Table..................................................................... 140
Heating Capacity Table..................................................................... 141
External Static Pressure................................................................... 142
Acoustic Data................................................................................... 143
Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................. 144
Wiring Diagram................................................................................. 145
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials............................................... 147
Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 148
Four-Way VAHU Indoor Units..................................................157
Mechanical Specifications and Features.......................................... 157
General Data / Specifications........................................................... 158
Dimensions....................................................................................... 159
Cooling Capacity Table..................................................................... 160
Heating Capacity Table..................................................................... 162
External Static Pressure and Airflow Ranges................................... 164
Acoustic Data................................................................................... 167
Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................. 170
Wiring Diagram................................................................................. 171
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials............................................... 173
Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 174
Application Guidelines.............................................................183
Equipment Selection Procedure....................................................... 184
Placement Considerations................................................................ 191
Refrigerant Piping Design.......................................................198
Design Guideline Summary.............................................................. 198
Creating a Balanced System / Manual Layout Procedure
200
Condensate Drain Piping.................................................................. 201
Electrical Connections.............................................................204
General Information.......................................................................... 204
Power Wiring (208-230V) and Comm Cable Details����������������������� 207
Remote Controller Connections....................................................... 212
Indoor Unit Group Control................................................................ 213
Acronyms..................................................................................214
Duct (High Static) Indoor Units.................................................95
Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 95
General Data / Specifications............................................................. 96
Dimensions......................................................................................... 97
Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 98
Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 99
External Static Pressure / Acoustic Data.......................................... 100
Refrigerant Flow Diagrams............................................................... 101
Wiring Diagrams............................................................................... 102
INTRODUCTION
|
3
Introduction
Mechanical Specifications and Features............................................ 29
General Data / Specifications............................................................. 30
Dimensions......................................................................................... 31
Cooling Capacity Table....................................................................... 32
Heating Capacity Table....................................................................... 33
Acoustic Data..................................................................................... 34
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution........................................... 35
Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................... 36
Wiring Diagram................................................................................... 37
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials................................................. 38
Installation and Best Layout Practices................................................ 39
Mechanical Specifications and Features...........................................113
General Data / Specifications............................................................114
Dimensions........................................................................................115
Cooling Capacity Table......................................................................117
Heating Capacity Table..................................................................... 120
Acoustic Data................................................................................... 121
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution......................................... 123
Refrigerant Flow Diagram................................................................. 125
Wiring Diagram................................................................................. 126
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials............................................... 127
Installation and Best Layout Practices.............................................. 128
CONVERGENCE OF TECHNOLOGY,
INNOVATION, FLEXIBILITY, & STYLE
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
About LG Electronics, Inc.
LG Electronics is a global leader and technology innovator in consumer electronics, mobile communications, and home appliances.
LG Electronics comprises five business units—Home Entertainment,
Mobile Communications, Air Conditioning, Business Solutions, and
Home Appliance. LG is one of the world’s leading producers of flat
panel televisions, audio and video products, mobile handsets, air
conditioners, and washing machines. LG’s commercial air conditioning business unit was established in 1968 and has built its lineup of
residential and commercial products to include VRF, Multi F, ductfree split systems, packaged terminal air conditioners (PTACs), and
room air conditioners. In 2011, the air conditioning and energy solutions business unit grew to include LED lighting and solar products.
For more information, visit www.lg.com.
includes its own remote control, allowing the customer to set the
temperature individually. Indoor units are available in several different configurations: Art Cool™ Mirror wall-mounted, Art Cool Gallery
wall-mounted, standard wall-mounted, four-way ceiling cassettes,
ceiling-concealed duct (high and low static), and vertical-horizontal air
handling models. Multi F MAX systems can operate up to eight indoor
units through two-, three-, or four-port branch distribution units.
Adaptable and Flexible
Multi-Zone Systems
Multi F outdoor units can be adapted to a wide range of building applications and sizes such as schools, hotels, hospitals, offices, and
residences. The system components are lightweight and compact so
they can be placed in buildings without expensive cranes, they easily
fit into most service elevators, and they can be set in place with
minimal structural reinforcements requirements.
Multi F technology allows you to pipe farther by reaching areas of the
building that would require the installation of a second system when
using traditional direct-expansion cooling and heating equipment. Multi
F provides the designer with uncompromised pipe system engineering
flexibility—long pipe runs and large elevation differences. Whether your
building is a condominium, a hotel, a school, or an office complex, Multi
F is best suited to reach the farthest corners and elevations.
Multi F Systems
Smaller Chases and Plenums
LG HVAC systems offer a range of solutions that are cost efficient,
quiet and attractive. Multi-zone systems are “split” into indoor and
outdoor units, and provide a smart alternative to both central HVAC
and window-mounted air conditioners. These inverter heat pump systems are available in a variety of configurations to suit different cooling and heating situations. Installation by a trained HVAC contractor
is safe and easy – little to no duct work or sheet metal is required.
LG’s inverter heat pumps can support two, three, or four indoor
units that are typically installed in separate rooms. Each indoor unit
•
•
•
•
•
Benefits of Multi F Systems
Individual zone control
Long refrigerant piping lengths
High refrigerant piping elevation differences
Maximum flexibility
Operating ranges of 14°F to 118°F (DB) in cooling and -4°F to
75°F (DB) in heating if connected to standard Multi F Outdoor Units
or -13°F to 75°F (DB) in heating if connected to Multi F with LG
REDº Outdoor Units.
• Quiet and comfortable environment
• Reduced ductwork
LG Multi F systems use refrigerant piping to move heat, resulting in
smaller space requirements for piping as compared to chilled water
or roof top systems. This helps reduce the overall construction and
material cost of the building, and gives back leasable space. Flexible
and logical placement of system components, reduced back-andforth pipe lengths, and fewer joints lowers installation costs and
minimizes potential leaking.
Quality Commitment
LG is committed to the success of duct-free projects. We provide
technical support during installation and commissioning. LG offers
a variety of classes designed for installers and servicers on Multi F
installation. Classes are conducted at LG’s training centers
and in field locations at various
times throughout the year and on
special request.
MULTI F
4
|
INTRODUCTION
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
UNIT NOMENCLATURE
Multi-Zone Systems — Indoor Units and Outdoor Units
L
M
DN
12
6
HV
BD
36
2
0
L = LG
Type: M = Multi-Zone
Component:
AN: Art Cool™ Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit
N: Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit
CN: Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit
DN: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Unit
HN: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit
VN: Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit
U: Outdoor Unit
Nominal Capacity
(Nominal cooling capacity in Btu/h):
15 = 15,000
18 = 18,000
24 = 24,000
30 = 30,000
36 = 36,000
42 = 42,000
48 = 48,000
54 = 54,000
Introduction
07 = 7,000
09 = 9,000
12 = 12,000
Generation
Features:
H = Heat Pump
V = Inverter
T = High Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit
P = Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit
Branch Distribution Units
P
M
P = Part (Accessory)
Type: M = Multi-Zone
BD: Branch Distribution Unit
Family
Number of Port Connections
(Maximum Number of Connectable Indoor Units): 2, 3, 4
Generation: 0, 1
• Voltage for all equipment is 208-230V, 60 Hz, 1-phase.
• All indoor units are compatible with wired controllers.
• All outdoor units are LGAP control network compatible with PI-485 V-net Control Integration Board (PMNFP14A1, sold separately).
• Compatible single zone IDU nomenclature is listed in the Single Zone Wall-Mounted IDU Engineering Manual.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
INTRODUCTION
|
5
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FUNCTIONS, CONTROLS AND
OPTIONS OVERVIEW
Table 1: Indoor Units—Functions, Controls and Options.
Special
Function
Controllers
Operation
Filter
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Airflow
Indoor Unit Type
Air supply outlets
Airflow direction (left/right)
Airflow direction (up/down)
Auto swing (left/right)
Auto swing (up/down)
Airflow steps (fan/cool/heat)
Comfort Air (random fan speed)
Jet-cool/Jet Heat (power wind)
Swirl wind
Washable anti-fungal1
Plasma2
3M Micro Dust Filter2
Ventilation
Drain pump
E.S.P. control
Electric heater
High ceiling5
Hot Start
Self diagnostics
Soft Dry (dehumidification)
Auto operation
Auto clean (coil dry)
Auto restart
Child lock
Forced operation
Group control – Requires the use
of one Group control Cable Kit
(PZCWRCG3) for every
additional indoor unit
Sleep mode
Timer (on/off)
Weekly schedule
Two thermistor control
7-Day programmable controller
Simple wired remote controller
Wireless LCD remote control
Dry contact
Dry contact (temperature setting)
Central control (LGAP)
Connector for Water Sensor
Wi-Fi8
Ceiling
ART COOL™ ART COOL™ Standard Wall Concealed
Mirror Wall
Gallery
Mounted
(Low Static)
Mounted
Ducted
1
Auto
Auto
√
√
6/6/6
√
√
3
Auto
Auto
√
√
5/5/4
√
√
1
Auto
Auto
√
√
6/6/6
√
√
√
√
√
√
4
1
2
Auto
3/3/3
3/3/3
√
√
√
4/5/4
√
√
√
√
o3
3/3/3
√
√
√
√
√4
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
o
√
√
√
√
√
√
o
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
o
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
o
√
o
√
o
√
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o5
√
√
o
o
o
o
√
o
o
√
√
√
√
o
o
o
o
√
o
o
√
√
√
√
o
o
o
o
√
o
o
√
√
√
√
√
o
o
√
o6
o
o
√
√
√
√
o
o
√
o6
o
o
√
√
√
o
o
o
o
√
o
o
√
√
√
√
o
o
√
o6
√7
o
√
√
Primary washable filters.
Secondary filter
3
Branch location and static pressure requirements. Requires PTPKQ0
Plasma kit.
4
Requires ventilation kit PTVK430 (Temperature, humidity, and volume
limitations apply).
√
Group control may affect available features
Requires wired zone controller
7
For use with 3rd party thermostat
8
Embedded. Optional for LVNxxxHV4 4-way VAHU.
Not available for 2-way LMVNxxxHV VAHU.
5
6
INTRODUCTION
VerticalHorizontal Air
Handling Unit
√
√
√
√
√
√
o
√
2
|
Four-Way
Ceiling
Cassette
√
1
6
1
Ceiling
Concealed
(High Static)
Ducted
√
√
√
√
o
√ = Standard feature
o = Unit option
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FUNCTIONS, CONTROLS AND
OPTIONS OVERVIEW
Table 2: Indoor Unit Accessories Overview.
Model No.
Description
For Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units
PT-QCHW0
PT-UQC
PTVK430
PTDCQ
PTPKQ0
PRARH0
Wall-Mounted Indoor Units
PCRCUDT3
AG-9300-LG
PRARS1
For Vertical-Horizontal Air Handing Units
PNDFJ0
PNDFK0
ANEH033B1
ANEH053B1
ANEH083B2
ANEH103B2
Ceiling Grille
Ceiling Grille
Flange for All Capacities
Decorative Cover
Plasma Filter
Aux Heat Relay Kit
Wi-Fi Module (LSN/LMN models)
Condensate Sensor
Aux Heat Relay Kit
Downflow Conversion Kit (18/24MBH)
Downflow Conversiion Kit (36MBH)
3 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH)
5 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH)
8 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH)
10 kW Electric Heater (18-36MBH)
15 kW Electric Heater (36MBH)
ANEH203B2
20 kW Electric Heater (36MBH)
PRARH0
Aux Heat Relay Kit
PCRCUDT3
Wi-Fi Module
Introduction
ANEH153B2
For Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Units
ZFBXBG01A
High Efficiency Filter Box
ZFBXD201A
Dynamic V8 2VL Low Profile Air Cleaner
ZPLMV201A
Dynamic 2VL Air Cleaner Low Profile Return Air Plenum
ZFBXD402A
Dynamic V8 4VL Low Profile Air Cleaner
ZPLMV402A
Dynamic 4VL Air Cleaner Low Profile Return Air Plenum
ZFLT1301A
4-Pack Dynamic V8 VL Air Cleaner Replacement Filter Pads
ZFLT1302A
24-Pack Dynamic V8 VL Air Cleaner Replacement Filter Pads
ZGRLRA01A
Dynamic V8 Air Cleaner Louvered Return Air Grille (one per plenum )
ZGRLRA02A
Dynamic V8 Air Cleaner Egg Crate Return Air Grille (one per plenum)
PRARH0
Aux Heat Relay Kit
Controls Accessories
PQWRHQ0FDB
Wireless Handheld Remote (Duct/VAHU)
PREMTA000A
Premium Controller
PREMTB10U
Programmable Controller
PQRCVCL0Q(W)
Simple Controller (Wall/Cassette)
PREMTBVC0
MultiSITE CRC1 Base Controller
PREMTBVC1
MultiSITE CRC1 Plus Controller
ZVRCZ****
MultiSITE CRC1 Wireless Accessories
PDRYCB100
Dry Contact (Simple)
PDRYCB300
Dry Contact (3rd party controller)
PDRYCB400
Dry Contact (Setback)
ZRTBS01
Remote Temp Sensor (Cassette/Duct/VAHU)
PZCWRCG3
Group Control Cable Kit
PZCWRC1
Controller Extension Cable
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
INTRODUCTION
|
7
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
8
|
INTRODUCTION
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
INDOOR UNIT DATA
™
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 10
“General Data / Specifications” on page 11
“Dimensions” on page 12
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 14
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 16
“Acoustic Data” on page 17
“Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 18
“Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 19
“Wiring Diagram” on page 20
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 21
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 22
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Mechanical Specifications and Features
ART COOL Mirror Wall-Mounted
Indoor Units
Figure 1: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit.
General
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. ART COOL Mirror
Wall-Mounted indoor units have a sound rating no higher than 44
dB(A) as tested per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745.
Coil
Indoor unit coils are comprised of a minimum of two rows of
aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. The coils are
pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory
installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
Refrigerant System
System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration
circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding
charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare.
All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be
field insulated.
Electrical
Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power
with voltage variances of ±10%.
Casing
Units are designed to mount on a vertical surface, and are shipped
with a separate back plate that secures the unit to the wall, protruding no more than nine (9) inches. Unit is designed so that refrigerant
piping can be installed in one (1) of four (4) different directions.
Finish
The Art Cool Mirror unit has a flat, architectural panel with a smoked
charcoal mirror finish. Unit casing has a dark grey finish and is
manufactured of heavy-duty acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS)
and high impact polystyrene (HIPS) plastic.
Fan Assembly and Control
The unit has a single, direct-drive, crossflow fan made of high strength
ABS plastic. The fan motor is brushless digitally controlled (BLDC)
with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan and
motor assembly is mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets.
Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digitally
controlled algorithm that provides pre-programmed, field-selectable
fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling modes. For Art
Cool Mirror Wall-Mounted units, the indoor fan has Low, Med, High,
Jet Cool and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High,
Jet Heat and Auto settings for Heating mode. The Auto setting adjusts
the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint
and space temperature. Also, the separate Chaos setting provides a
simultaneous and random change in fan speed and flow direction at
the discharge, simulating a natural outdoor breeze.
Features
•
•
•
•
Inverter (Variable speed fan)
Comfort Air
3M filter
Jet cool/Jet heat
10
| ART COOL MIRROR
•
•
•
•
Air Filter
Return air inlet has a factory-supplied primary removable, washable
filter. The unit is also equipped with a secondary 3M Micro Dust
filter. Filters are accessed from the front of the unit without the use
of tools.
Airflow Guide Vanes
A motorized guide vane is factory installed, and allows the ability to
control the direction of airflow from side to side. A motorized louver
provides an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and
down to provide uniform air distribution.
Microprocessor Control
The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are
stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor.
The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the
value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit.
The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when
the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint
temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to
begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor will also provide
self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire
power/communications cable must be installed to connect the indoor
unit(s) to the outdoor unit.
Controls
The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared
sensor designed to communicate with the supplied LG wireless
handheld remote controller. An optional LG supplied wired controller
is available as an additional accessory. Communication between the
indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG,
four-core, stranded and shielded power/communication cable. The
indoor unit has built-in wi-fi and can be controlled with LG’s SmartThinQ app on a smart device. A field-supplied wi-fi network and
smart device are required. The SmartThinQ app is free and is available for Android and iOS smart devices.
Condensate
The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate and includes
a flexible drain hose capable of installation in one of two directions.
Unit includes a connection that is compatible with the AquaGuard®
AG-9300-LG condensate sensor.
Group Control
Self-cleaning indoor coil
Auto operation
Auto restart operation
•
•
•
•
Built-in wi-fi
Dehumidifying function
Self diagnosis function
Wireless LCD remote control included
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
General Data / Specifications
Table 3: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
1
LAN090HSV5
LAN120HSV5
LAN180HSV5
9,000
12,000
18,000
10,900
13,600
21,600
Operating Range
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
57-77
59-81
Fan
Type
Cross Flow
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
30 x 1
Motor/Drive
60.0 x 1
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L)
268 / 218 / 169
282 / 233 / 177
558 / 438 / 353
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
R410A
Art Cool Mirror™
Refrigerant Control
EEV
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz3
208-230, 1, 60
Rated Amps (A)
0.4
Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L)
Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
4
36 / 32 / 27
38 / 34 / 29
44 / 38 / 34
32-15/16 x 12-1/8 x 7-9/16
39-9/32 x 13-19/32 x 8-11/32
Net Unit Weight (lbs.)
20.5
29.8
Shipping Weight (lbs.)
25.6
36.4
Power Wiring / Communications Cable
(No. x AWG)5
Heat Exchanger
(Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number
4 x 18
(2 x 23 x 22) x 1
(2 x 16 x 20) x 1
Pipe Size
Liquid (in.)
1/4
Vapor (in.)
3/8
1/2
Liquid (in.)
1/4
3/8
Vapor (in.)
3/8
5/8
Connection Size
Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.)
27/32, 5/8
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in
accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and
indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
4
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
|
11
Refrigerant, Drain
Pipe, and Cable
Knock Out Hole
2 (51)
Display & Remote
Controller Signal
Receiver Signal
Bottom
2-3/8 (60)
3-5/8 (92)
Left & Right
55°
Refrigerant,
Drain Pipe
and Cable
Knock
Out Hole
5/16 (8)
3-21/32 (93)
5-19/32 (142)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
3-27/32 (98)
5-31/32 (152)
12-1/16 (306)
32-15/16 (837)
Installation Plate
Unit Outline
Unit Outline
Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe
32-15/16 (837)
Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole
29/32 (23)
3-11/16 (94)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
7-27/32 (199)
5-9/32 (134)
7-5/8 (194)
In Case of Left Side Piping
5-3/16 (132)
2-15/32 (63)
Rear
Right
2 (51)
7-9/16 (192)
Air Intake
Air Outlet
Terminal Block for
Power Supply and
Communication
Approx. 11-11/32 (288) to gas pipe
Refrigerant, Drain Approx. 8-19/32 (218) to liquid pipe
Pipe and Cable
Knock Out Hole
Drain Hose
Connection
1-1/2 (38)
2-15/32
(63)
[30-3/16 (767)]
Air Intake Hole
32-15/16 (837)
[28-5/32 (715)]
Air Outlet Hole
Heating
55°
29/32 (23)
Rear
Left
1-7/16 (33.5)
Decoration Cover
Up & Down
* If airflow direction control is available,
Cooling
15°
85°
12-1/8 (308)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Dimensions
Unit : inch (mm)
1-1/4 (31)
2-7/16 ( 61.5)
1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2)
1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3)
1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6)
15°
45°
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
| ART COOL MIRROR
12
11/32 (9)
12-1/8 (308)
12-1/8 (308)
2-7/32(56)
10-11/32 (263)
2-17/32 (64)
1-27/32(47)
2-5/16
(59)
[5-29/32 (150)]
Air Intake Hole
2
Air -7/32
Ou (5
tlet 6)
Ho
le
5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7)
2-13/32 (61)
2-7/32 (56)
5-31/32 (152)
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Figure 2: LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 Dimensions.
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Dimensions
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Figure 3: LAN180HSV5 Dimensions.
Rear
Right
Bottom
Air
Outlet
8-11/32 (212)
Air Intake
Refrigerant,
Drain Pipe
and Cable
Knock
Out Hole
Drain Hose Connection
Approx. 9-7/16 (240) to gas pipe
Approx. 6-5/16 (160) to liquid pipe
7/16 (11)
2-3/8 (60)
Terminal Block for
Power Supply and
Communication
Refrigerant, Drain
Pipe and Cable
Knock Out Hole
4-17/32 (115)
5-29/32 (150)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
3-9/32 (83)
5-9/32 (134)
1-15/32 (37)
14-11/16 (373)
39-9/32 (998)
Installation Plate
Unit Outline
1-1/16 (27)
5-13/32 (137)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
7-13/32 (188)
3-9/32 (83)
5-29/32 (150)
6-15/32 (164)
In case of Left Side Piping
Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole
39-9/32 (998)
Unit Outline
Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe
13
|
ART COOL MIRROR
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Art Cool Mirror™
Display & Remote
Controller Signal
Receiver Signal
50°
2-23/32 (69)
[36-5/32 (918)]
Air Intake Hole
39-9/32 (998)
[34-11/32 (872)]
Air Outlet Hole
2-1/4 (57)
3-17/32 (90)
2-7/32 (56)
Left & Right
50°
13-19/32 (345)
Rear
Left
1-7/16 (33.5)
Decoration Cover
Up & Down
Heating
* If airflow direction control is available,
Cooling
20°
1-1/16 (27)
Unit : inch (mm)
2-3/8 (60)
1-1/4 (31)
2-7/16 ( 61.5)
1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2)
1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6)
15°
45°
85°
2-3/8 (60)
2-3/32 (53)
11-13/16 (300)
2-15/32 (63)
2-3/32 (53)
13-19/32 (345)
13-19/32 (345)
7/16(11)
[6-11/16 (170)]
Air Intake Hole
A [2-29
ir O /32
utle (7
t H 4)]
ole
5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7)
2-13/32 (61)
Refrigerant, Drain
Pipe, and Cable
Knock Out Hole
2-3/8 (60)
1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3)
5-31/32 (152)
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 4: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LAN090HSV5
9,000
LAN120HSV5
12,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
8.82
8.82
8.81
8.80
8.80
8.79
8.78
8.78
8.77
8.76
8.76
8.75
8.54
8.33
8.12
7.91
7.68
7.50
7.31
7.12
6.94
6.82
6.79
11.76
11.75
11.75
11.74
11.73
11.72
11.71
11.70
11.69
11.68
11.67
11.66
11.38
11.10
10.83
10.55
10.25
10.00
9.75
9.50
9.25
9.10
9.05
6.04
6.09
6.13
6.18
6.23
6.28
6.32
6.37
6.42
6.46
6.51
6.56
6.45
6.34
6.22
6.10
6.04
5.88
5.72
5.52
5.36
5.32
5.30
8.51
8.57
8.64
8.71
8.77
8.84
8.90
8.97
9.03
9.10
9.17
9.23
9.08
8.92
8.76
8.60
8.51
8.28
8.05
7.77
7.54
7.49
7.47
73 / 61
TC
SHC
9.37
9.36
9.36
9.35
9.34
9.33
9.33
9.32
9.31
9.31
9.30
9.29
9.08
8.87
8.66
8.45
8.22
8.03
7.84
7.66
7.47
7.36
7.32
12.49
12.48
12.48
12.47
12.46
12.45
12.44
12.43
12.42
12.41
12.40
12.39
12.11
11.82
11.54
11.26
10.96
10.71
10.46
10.21
9.96
9.81
9.76
6.38
6.43
6.48
6.53
6.58
6.63
6.68
6.73
6.78
6.83
6.88
6.92
6.82
6.71
6.60
6.48
6.43
6.26
6.10
5.90
5.74
5.70
5.69
8.99
9.06
9.13
9.20
9.27
9.34
9.41
9.47
9.54
9.61
9.68
9.75
9.60
9.45
9.29
9.13
9.05
8.82
8.59
8.31
8.08
8.03
8.01
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
9.92
9.91
9.90
9.90
9.89
9.88
9.87
9.87
9.86
9.85
9.84
9.84
9.62
9.41
9.20
8.99
8.75
8.57
8.38
8.19
8.01
7.89
7.86
13.22
13.21
13.20
13.19
13.18
13.17
13.16
13.15
13.14
13.13
13.12
13.11
12.83
12.55
12.26
11.98
11.67
11.42
11.17
10.92
10.67
10.52
10.48
6.18
6.23
6.27
6.32
6.37
6.42
6.47
6.51
6.56
6.61
6.66
6.70
6.61
6.51
6.41
6.31
6.26
6.11
5.96
5.78
5.63
5.60
5.59
8.70
8.77
8.84
8.90
8.97
9.04
9.11
9.17
9.24
9.31
9.38
9.44
9.31
9.17
9.03
8.88
8.82
8.61
8.40
8.14
7.92
7.88
7.87
10.31
10.31
10.30
10.29
10.28
10.27
10.27
10.26
10.25
10.24
10.24
10.23
10.01
9.80
9.59
9.37
9.00
8.88
8.77
8.58
8.39
8.28
8.24
13.75
13.74
13.73
13.72
13.71
13.70
13.69
13.68
13.67
13.66
13.65
13.64
13.35
13.07
12.78
12.50
12.00
11.84
11.69
11.44
11.19
11.04
10.99
6.31
6.36
6.41
6.46
6.50
6.55
6.60
6.65
6.70
6.75
6.80
6.85
6.75
6.66
6.56
6.46
6.32
6.22
6.12
5.94
5.79
5.76
5.76
8.88
8.95
9.02
9.09
9.16
9.23
9.30
9.37
9.44
9.50
9.57
9.64
9.51
9.38
9.24
9.10
8.90
8.76
8.62
8.37
8.15
8.12
8.11
TC
86 / 72
SHC
11.01
11.01
11.00
10.99
10.98
10.97
10.96
10.96
10.95
10.94
10.93
10.92
10.71
10.49
10.28
10.06
9.83
9.64
9.45
9.26
9.08
8.96
8.93
14.69
14.67
14.66
14.65
14.64
14.63
14.62
14.61
14.60
14.59
14.57
14.56
14.27
13.99
13.70
13.42
13.10
12.85
12.60
12.35
12.10
11.95
11.90
6.36
6.41
6.46
6.51
6.56
6.61
6.66
6.71
6.76
6.81
6.85
6.90
6.82
6.73
6.64
6.55
6.52
6.37
6.23
6.06
5.91
5.89
5.89
8.96
9.03
9.10
9.17
9.24
9.31
9.38
9.45
9.52
9.58
9.65
9.72
9.60
9.48
9.36
9.22
9.18
8.98
8.78
8.53
8.33
8.30
8.29
TC
90 / 75
SHC
11.56
11.55
11.54
11.54
11.53
11.52
11.51
11.50
11.49
11.48
11.47
11.47
11.25
11.03
10.82
10.60
10.36
10.17
9.99
9.80
9.61
9.50
9.46
15.42
15.40
15.39
15.38
15.37
15.36
15.35
15.33
15.32
15.31
15.30
15.29
15.00
14.71
14.42
14.13
13.81
13.56
13.31
13.07
12.82
12.67
12.62
6.48
6.53
6.58
6.63
6.68
6.73
6.78
6.83
6.88
6.93
6.98
7.03
6.96
6.87
6.79
6.70
6.67
6.53
6.39
6.22
6.08
6.06
6.06
9.13
9.20
9.27
9.34
9.41
9.48
9.55
9.62
9.70
9.77
9.84
9.91
9.79
9.68
9.56
9.43
9.39
9.20
9.01
8.76
8.56
8.54
8.53
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
14
| ART COOL MIRROR
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 5: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued).
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LAN180HSV5
18,000
17.65
17.63
17.62
17.60
17.59
17.58
17.56
17.55
17.54
17.52
17.51
17.50
17.08
16.66
16.24
15.82
15.37
14.99
14.62
14.24
13.87
13.65
13.57
12.33
12.43
12.52
12.62
12.71
12.81
12.90
13.00
13.10
13.19
13.29
13.38
13.16
12.93
12.70
12.46
12.33
12.00
11.67
11.27
10.93
10.85
10.83
73 / 61
TC
SHC
18.74
18.73
18.71
18.70
18.68
18.67
18.66
18.64
18.63
18.61
18.60
18.58
18.16
17.74
17.32
16.90
16.44
16.06
15.69
15.32
14.94
14.72
14.64
13.02
13.13
13.23
13.33
13.43
13.53
13.63
13.73
13.83
13.93
14.03
14.13
13.92
13.70
13.47
13.23
13.12
12.78
12.45
12.05
11.71
11.64
11.62
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
19.84
19.82
19.81
19.79
19.78
19.76
19.75
19.73
19.72
19.70
19.69
19.67
19.24
18.82
18.40
17.97
17.51
17.13
16.76
16.39
16.01
15.79
15.71
12.61
12.71
12.81
12.91
13.00
13.10
13.20
13.30
13.39
13.49
13.59
13.69
13.49
13.30
13.09
12.88
12.78
12.47
12.17
11.79
11.48
11.42
11.40
20.63
20.61
20.60
20.58
20.57
20.55
20.53
20.52
20.50
20.49
20.47
20.46
20.03
19.60
19.17
18.75
18.00
17.77
17.53
17.16
16.79
16.56
16.49
12.88
12.98
13.08
13.18
13.28
13.38
13.48
13.58
13.68
13.78
13.87
13.97
13.79
13.60
13.40
13.19
12.90
12.70
12.50
12.13
11.82
11.77
11.75
TC
86 / 72
SHC
22.03
22.01
22.00
21.98
21.96
21.94
21.93
21.91
21.89
21.88
21.86
21.84
21.41
20.98
20.55
20.12
19.65
19.28
18.90
18.53
18.15
17.93
17.85
12.98
13.09
13.19
13.29
13.39
13.49
13.59
13.69
13.79
13.89
13.99
14.09
13.92
13.75
13.56
13.37
13.30
13.01
12.73
12.36
12.07
12.03
12.01
TC
90 / 75
SHC
23.12
23.11
23.09
23.07
23.05
23.04
23.02
23.00
22.98
22.97
22.95
22.93
22.50
22.06
21.63
21.20
20.72
20.35
19.97
19.60
19.22
19.00
18.92
13.23
13.33
13.44
13.54
13.64
13.75
13.85
13.95
14.05
14.16
14.26
14.36
14.20
14.03
13.85
13.67
13.61
13.33
13.05
12.70
12.41
12.37
12.36
Art Cool Mirror™
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
|
15
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 6: Multi F Art Cool Mirror Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity of
Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
Outdoor Air Temp.
°F DB
°F WB
61
TC
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
5.61
6.32
7.03
7.98
8.33
8.93
9.44
9.96
10.42
10.87
11.06
11.24
11.53
11.53
11.53
11.53
7.00
7.89
8.78
9.95
10.40
11.14
11.78
12.42
13.00
13.56
13.80
14.02
14.39
14.39
14.39
14.39
11.11
12.52
13.93
15.81
16.51
17.69
18.70
19.72
20.63
21.55
21.91
22.26
22.86
22.86
22.86
22.86
LAN090HSV5
10,900
LAN120HSV5
13,600
LAN180HSV5
21,600
64
TC
5.53
6.24
6.95
7.90
8.26
8.85
9.36
9.87
10.33
10.80
10.98
11.15
11.46
11.46
11.46
11.46
6.90
7.78
8.67
9.86
10.30
11.03
11.67
12.31
12.89
13.46
13.70
13.91
14.29
14.29
14.29
14.29
10.96
12.37
13.77
15.65
16.36
17.53
18.55
19.56
20.48
21.39
21.76
22.11
22.70
22.70
22.70
22.70
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
5.48
6.18
6.90
7.85
8.21
8.79
9.31
9.82
10.28
10.74
10.93
11.10
11.40
11.40
11.40
11.40
6.83
7.71
8.60
9.79
10.23
10.96
11.60
12.24
12.82
13.39
13.63
13.84
14.22
14.22
14.22
14.22
10.85
12.26
13.67
15.55
16.25
17.43
18.44
19.46
20.37
21.29
21.65
22.01
22.59
22.59
22.59
22.59
5.45
6.16
6.88
7.82
8.18
8.77
9.29
9.79
10.25
10.71
10.90
11.08
11.37
11.37
11.37
11.37
6.80
7.69
8.58
9.76
10.20
10.95
11.59
12.21
12.79
13.36
13.60
13.82
14.19
14.19
14.19
14.19
10.80
12.21
13.61
15.49
16.20
17.37
18.39
19.41
20.32
21.24
21.60
21.95
22.53
22.53
22.53
22.53
72
TC
75
TC
5.37
6.08
6.79
7.75
8.09
8.69
9.20
9.72
10.18
10.64
10.82
10.99
11.30
11.30
11.30
11.30
6.70
7.59
8.48
9.67
10.10
10.85
11.49
12.13
12.70
13.28
13.50
13.72
14.10
14.10
14.10
14.10
10.64
12.06
13.46
15.34
16.04
17.22
18.24
19.25
20.17
21.08
21.44
21.80
22.38
22.38
22.38
22.38
5.14
5.85
6.56
7.48
7.82
8.37
8.93
9.47
9.94
10.40
10.59
10.73
10.98
11.03
11.06
11.11
6.50
7.40
8.31
9.47
9.90
10.60
11.30
11.99
12.58
13.16
13.40
13.59
13.90
13.96
14.00
14.06
10.18
11.58
12.99
14.84
15.49
16.59
17.69
18.79
19.70
20.61
20.98
21.27
21.76
21.85
21.91
22.02
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
16
| ART COOL MIRROR
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
Figure 4: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location.
3.3 ft.
• Measurement taken 2.6′ below the bottom of the unit and at a
distance of 3.3′ from face of unit.
• Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full
load normal operating condition.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as
construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in
which the equipment is installed.
• Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±1.
• Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745.
Table 7: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
2.6 ft.
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
High Fan Speed
Medium Fan
Speed
Low Fan Speed
LAN090HSV5
36
32
27
LAN120HSV5
38
34
29
LAN180HSV5
44
38
34
Art Cool Mirror™
Microphone
Model No.
Figure 5: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
LAN090HSV5
LAN120HSV5
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
LAN180HSV5
ART COOL MIRROR
|
17
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution
Figure 6: LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Cooling
Heating
Figure 7: LAN180HSV5 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Cooling
18
| ART COOL MIRROR
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Heating
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Refrigerant Flow Diagram
Figure 8: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Th2
Vapor pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Heating
Heat
Th1 Exchanger Th4
Th5
Cooling
M
Cross Flow Fan
Liquid pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Table 8: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Sizes.
Line Size Liquid Line Size
Indoor Unit Capacity Vapor
(in., OD)
(in., OD)
9,000 Btu/h
12,000 Btu/h
18,000 Btu/h
Ø3/8
Table 9: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connections
Vapor Line
Liquid Line
Indoor Unit Capacity Connection
(in., OD) Connection (in., OD)
9,000 Btu/h
Ø1/4
Ø1/2
12,000 Btu/h
18,000 Btu/h
Ø3/8
Ø1/4
Ø5/8
Ø3/8
Table 10: Art Cool Mirror Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
Location
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
Th1
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
Th2
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
Th3
Evaporator Middle Temperature Thermistor
Th4
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
Th5
Water Level Sensor (Optional)
IDU PCB Connector
CN-TH1
CN-TH2
CN-TH3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
|
19
Art Cool Mirror™
Thermistor for
Indoor Air Temperature
Th3
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 9: Multi F Art Cool Mirror LAN090HSV5, LAN120HSV5, and LAN180HSV5 Indoor Units Wiring Diagram.
20
| ART COOL MIRROR
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials
Factory Supplied Parts
Table 11: Parts Table.
Part
Quantity
Installation Plate
One (1)
Image
Btu/h Indoor Units
7,000
~ 15,000and
Btu/h
Indoor Units 18,000 and 24,000
LAN090HSV5
LAN120HSV5
LAN180HSV5
Five (5)
Type “B” Screws
(M4 x 12L)
Two (2)
Wireless Handheld
Controller with Holder
AKB74955602
One (1)
Art Cool Mirror™
Type “A” Screws
Factory Supplied Materials
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
• Flaring tool set
• Spanner (Half union)
• Thermometer
WARNING
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes.
Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Note:
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect
installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
|
21
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
DANGER
Select a location for installing the wall-mounted indoor unit (IDU) that meets the following conditions:
• Where there is enough structural strength to bear the weight of the unit
• Where air circulation will not be blocked
• Where noise prevention is taken into consideration
• Ensure there is sufficient space from the ceiling and floor
• Locate the indoor unit in a location where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit/branch distribution unit
• Include space for drainage to ensure condensate flows properly out of the unit when it is in cooling mode
• Use a level indicator to ensure the unit is installed on a level plane
Note:
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the following conditions:
Do not install the unit where it will be subjected to direct thermal radiation from other heat sources.
Do not install the unit in an area where combustible gas may generate, flow, stagnate, or leak.
Do not install the unit in a location where acidic solution and spray (sulfur) are often used.
Do not use the unit in environments where oil, steam, or sulfuric gas are present.
Do not install additional ventilation products on the chassis of the unit.
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generator sources.
Figure 10:Minimum Clearance Requirements.
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
>4 inches
In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms
may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to
an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure:
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the
temperature by three degrees).
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
≥5 inches
>4 inches
Required Clearances
Recommended height
>6-1/2 feet from floor
Figure 10 shows required clearance distances around a typical
installed wall-mounted unit.
Mounting the Installation Plate
The mounting wall should be strong and solid enough to protect the unit from vibration.
• Mount the installation plate on the wall using the Type “A” screws. If mounting the unit on concrete, consider using anchor bolts.
• Always mount the installation plate horizontally. Measure the wall and mark the centerline using thread and a level.
Figure 11:Installation Plate for LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 Units.
Figure 12:Installation Plate for LAN180HSV5 Units.
Unit Outline
Place a level on raised tab
Place a level on raised tab
Unit Outline
18-1/8 inches
6-7/8 inches
3-3/4 inches
8-17/32 inches
Right rear piping
Installation Plate
5-1/4 inches
Ø2-3/4 inches
Installation Plate
Left rear
piping
Measuring Tape
| ART COOL MIRROR
Ø2-3/4 inches
Right rear
piping
2-7/32 inches
2-23/32 inches
4-1/8 inches
22
22-7/16 inches
Ø2-3/4
inches
Ø2-3/4 inches
Left rear piping
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
To avoid the possibility of fire, do not install the unit in an area where combustible gas may generate, flow, stagnate, or leak. Failure to do so will cause
serious bodily injury or death. Before beginning installation, read the safety summary at the beginning of this manual.
Measuring Tape Hanger
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
8-5/32 inches
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Drilling Piping Hole in the Wall
Figure 19:Drilling Piping Hole
Hanging the Indoor Unit Chassis
WALL
Indoor
Core Drill
Bushing
Sleeve
Figure 13:Locking the Indoor Unit onto the Installation Plate.
Art Cool Mirror™
1. Attach the three (3) hooks on the top of the indoor unit to the top edge of
the installation plate. Verify the hooks are properly attached to the installation plate by gently shaking the indoor unit from side to side.
2. Unlock the tubing clamp from the indoor unit frame. For easier access between the bottom of the indoor unit and the wall, prop the clamp between
the indoor unit frame and installation plate.
3. Remove the screw covers at the bottom of the indoor unit, unscrew the
two (2) screws, remove the frame cover, remove the piping connection
cover, and position the piping for installation (down, back, left, or right).
Figure 14:Accessing the Back of the Indoor Unit.
Outdoor
(3/16"~5/16")
Use caution when drilling holes through walls. Drilling into power wiring in the wall can
cause serious bodily injury or death.
Follow the left or right piping clearance recommendations in Figure 3 or Figure 4.
1. Using a 2-5/8 (ø 65mm) inch hole core drill bit, drill a hole at either the right or
left side of the wall mounting. The hole should slant 3/16” to 5/16” from level
(upward on the indoor unit side and downward on the outdoor unit side).
2. Finish off the newly drilled hole as shown with bushing and sleeve covering.
Sleeve and bushing prevents damage to the tubing/bundling of the piping.
Installation plate
Figure 15:Removing the Frame Cover.
Frame Cover
Tubing Clamp
Figure 16:Exterior Back View of Indoor Unit.
Tubing Clamp
Figure 17:Piping Installed to the Left.
Connecting
pipe
Right
Down
Back
Left
Figure 18:Piping Installed to the Right.
Tape
Tape
Connecting
pipe
Drain hose
Drain hose
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
|
23
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
Note:
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable
1. Insert the power wiring/communications cable from the outdoor
unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only)
through the bottom of the indoor unit.
Figure 20:Connecting the Power Wiring / Communications Cable.
2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit
control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from
the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems
only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor
unit.
3. Secure the power wiring/communications cable with the cable
restraint.
Figure 21:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch
Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LAN090HSV5 and
LAN120HSV5 models.
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
1(L1)
2(L2)
3 or S
3
GND
RD
BR
GRN / YLW
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
BL
GND
Figure 22:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch
Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LAN180HSV5 models.
GND
24
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
3
RD
BL
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
BR
GRN / YLW
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
| ART COOL MIRROR
3 or S
GND
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Terminal block
Wired Remote Controller
Terminal (Optional)
Power wiring /
communications cable
Cable restraint
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Wireless Handheld Controller
Figure 23:AKB74955602 Wireless Controller.
Table 12: AKB74955602 Wireless Controller Functions.
Screen Display
*
Art Cool Mirror™
*
*
RESET
Buttons
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
|
25
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Wired Controller Connections
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
To Wired Controller
Wired Controller Placement
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort
levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location
away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to
cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its
LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can
detect an average room temperature.
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
Hot or cold air from ducts
Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
Concealed pipes and chimneys
An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
TEMP
YES
Remote Controlle r
NO
TEMP
Rem
ot e
Cont
roller
NO
Cooling Mode
↓
Auto Operation
↓
Dehumidification Mode
↓
Heating Mode
| ART COOL MIRROR
To Wired Controller
Figure 26:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
Operation Mode Sequence
26
CN-REMO
3
BL
BR
GRN / YLW
CN-REMO
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
GND
RD
BL
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
BR
GRN / YLW
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
GND
Figure 25:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal
Block—LAN180HSV5 models.
RD
Figure 24:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal
Block—LAN090HSV5 and LAN120HSV5 models.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
NO
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL MIRROR INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring/cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation
is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and
then position wiring/cable on applicable side.
Figure 27:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Top
Top
Back
Right
Side
Right
Side
2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall
plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller
wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no
gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself.
3. Arrange wiring/cables so as not to interfere with the controller
circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into
place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto
the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired
controller and the wall plate on all sides.
Figure 28:Attaching the Wall Plate.
Installing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL MIRROR
|
27
Art Cool Mirror™
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to
release controller. Do not damage the controller components
when removing.
Figure 29:Installing/Removing the
Controller.
ART COOL GALLERY
INDOOR UNIT DATA
™
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 29
“General Data / Specifications” on page 30
“Dimensions” on page 31
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 32
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 33
“Acoustic Data” on page 34
“Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 35
“Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 36
“Wiring Diagram” on page 37
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 38
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 39
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Mechanical Specifications and Features
ART COOL Gallery Indoor Units
General
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Art Cool Gallery
indoor units have a sound rating no higher than 42 dB(A) as tested
per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745.
Coil
Indoor unit coils are comprised of a minimum of two rows of
aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. The coils are
pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory
installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
Refrigerant System
Electrical
Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power
with voltage variances of ±10%.
Casing
Units are designed to mount on a vertical surface, and are shipped
with a separate back plate that secures the unit to the wall, protruding no more than six (6) inches. Unit is designed so that refrigerant
piping can be installed in one of four different directions.
Cases / Finishes
The Art Cool Gallery unit has a frame that can accommodate a 20" x
20" photograph, picture or artwork. Unit casing has a gray finish and
is manufactured of heavy-duty acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (ABS)
and high impact polystyrene (HIPS) plastic.
Fan Assembly and Control
The unit has a single, direct-drive, crossflow fan made of high
strength ABS plastic. The fan motor is brushless digitally controlled
(BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The
fan/motor assembly is mounted on vibration attenuating rubber
grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based
direct digitally controlled algorithm that provides pre-programmed,
field-selectable fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling
modes. For Art Cool Gallery units, the indoor fan has Low, Med,
High, Power Cool and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low,
Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. The Auto setting
adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller
setpoint and space temperature. Also, the separate Chaos setting
provides a simultaneous and random change in fan speed and flow
Features
• Inverter (Variable speed fan)
• Chaos swing
• Jet cool
Figure 30: Multi F Art Cool Gallery
Indoor Unit.
Air Filter
Return air is filtered with a
factory-supplied, removable,
washable pre-filter. Filter
access is from the front of
the unit without the use of
tools.
Airflow Guide Vanes
Motorized oscillating guide
vanes are factory installed,
and allows the ability to
control the direction of
airflow from side to side. A
motorized air sweep louver provides an automatic change in airflow
by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution.
Microprocessor Control
The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to
communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are
stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor.
The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the
value provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit.
The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when
the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint
temperature, at which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to
begin the appropriate mode. The microprocessor will also provide
self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied fourwire power / communications cable must be installed to connect the
indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit.
Controls
The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared
sensor designed to communicate with the supplied LG wireless
handheld remote controller. An optional LG supplied wired controller
is available as an additional accessory. Communication between the
indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG,
four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable.
Condensate
The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate and includes
a flexible drain hose capable of installation in one of two directions.
Unit includes a connection that is compatible with the AquaGuard®
AG-9300-LG condensate sensor.
• Group control
• Self-cleaning indoor coil
• Auto operation / auto restart operation
• 24-Hour on/off timer
• Wireless LCD remote control included;
wired thermostat available (sold separately)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
29
Art Cool Gallery™
System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration
circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding
charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare.
All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must be
field insulated.
direction at the discharge,
simulating a natural outdoor
breeze.
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MULTI F MAX
General Data / Specifications
Table 13: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
1
LMAN097HVP
LMAN127HVP
9,000
11,200
10,400
13,300
57-77
57-77
59-81
59-81
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Operating Range
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
Fan
Type
Turbo
Turbo
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
Motor/Drive
Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L)
24 x 1
24 x 1
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
272 / 208 / 155
314 / 258 / 198
R410A
R410A
EEV
EEV
208-230, 1, 60
208-230, 1, 60
0.2
0.2
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
Refrigerant Control
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz
3
Rated Amps (A)
Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L)
39 / 35 / 31
42 / 38 / 34
23-5/8 x 23-5/8 x 5-25/32
23-5/8 x 23-5/8 x 5-25/32
Net Unit Weight (lbs.)
32
32
Shipping Weight (lbs.)
37
37
Power Wiring / Communications Cable
(No. x AWG)5
4 x 18
4 x 18
Heat Exchanger
(Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number
(2 x 20 x 21) x 1
(2 x 20 x 21) x 1
Liquid (in.)
1/4
1/4
Vapor (in.)
3/8
3/8
Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
4
Piping
Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.)
27/32, 5/8
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in
accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and
indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
30
| ART COOL GALLERY™
27/32, 5/8
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
4
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Dimensions
Figure 31: LMAN097HVP and LMAN127HVP Dimensions.
Supply Air Vane
Supply
Air
Supply Air
Supply Air Vane
Art Cool Gallery™
Supply
Air
Supply Air Vane
Return Air Inlet
Discharge Air Grille
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
31
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MAX
MULTI FTable
Cooling Capacity
Table 14: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LMAN097HVP
9,000
LMAN127HVP
12,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
8.82
8.82
8.81
8.80
8.80
8.79
8.78
8.78
8.77
8.76
8.76
8.75
8.54
8.33
8.12
7.91
7.68
7.50
7.31
7.12
6.94
6.82
6.79
10.98
10.97
10.96
10.95
10.95
10.94
10.93
10.92
10.91
10.90
10.90
10.89
10.63
10.36
10.10
9.84
9.56
9.33
9.10
8.86
8.63
8.49
8.44
5.68
5.72
5.77
5.81
5.85
5.90
5.94
5.99
6.03
6.07
6.12
6.16
6.06
5.96
5.85
5.74
5.68
5.52
5.37
5.19
5.03
5.00
4.98
7.06
7.12
7.17
7.23
7.28
7.34
7.39
7.45
7.50
7.56
7.61
7.67
7.54
7.41
7.27
7.14
7.06
6.87
6.68
6.46
6.26
6.22
6.20
73 / 61
TC
SHC
9.37
9.36
9.36
9.35
9.34
9.33
9.33
9.32
9.31
9.31
9.30
9.29
9.08
8.87
8.66
8.45
8.22
8.03
7.84
7.66
7.47
7.36
7.32
11.66
11.65
11.64
11.63
11.63
11.62
11.61
11.60
11.59
11.58
11.57
11.56
11.30
11.04
10.77
10.51
10.23
10.00
9.76
9.53
9.30
9.16
9.11
6.00
6.04
6.09
6.14
6.18
6.23
6.28
6.32
6.37
6.42
6.46
6.51
6.41
6.31
6.20
6.09
6.04
5.89
5.73
5.55
5.39
5.36
5.35
7.46
7.52
7.58
7.64
7.69
7.75
7.81
7.87
7.92
7.98
8.04
8.10
7.97
7.85
7.72
7.58
7.51
7.32
7.13
6.90
6.71
6.67
6.65
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
9.92
9.91
9.90
9.90
9.89
9.88
9.87
9.87
9.86
9.85
9.84
9.84
9.62
9.41
9.20
8.99
8.75
8.57
8.38
8.19
8.01
7.89
7.86
12.34
12.33
12.32
12.31
12.31
12.30
12.29
12.28
12.27
12.26
12.25
12.24
11.97
11.71
11.45
11.18
10.89
10.66
10.43
10.20
9.96
9.82
9.78
5.81
5.85
5.90
5.94
5.99
6.03
6.08
6.12
6.17
6.21
6.26
6.30
6.21
6.12
6.03
5.93
5.88
5.74
5.60
5.43
5.29
5.26
5.25
7.22
7.28
7.34
7.39
7.45
7.51
7.56
7.62
7.67
7.73
7.78
7.84
7.73
7.62
7.50
7.38
7.32
7.15
6.97
6.76
6.58
6.54
6.53
10.31
10.31
10.30
10.29
10.28
10.27
10.27
10.26
10.25
10.24
10.24
10.23
10.01
9.80
9.59
9.37
9.00
8.88
8.77
8.58
8.39
8.28
8.24
12.84
12.83
12.82
12.81
12.80
12.79
12.78
12.77
12.76
12.75
12.74
12.73
12.46
12.19
11.93
11.67
11.20
11.05
10.91
10.68
10.44
10.30
10.26
5.93
5.98
6.02
6.07
6.11
6.16
6.21
6.25
6.30
6.34
6.39
6.43
6.35
6.26
6.17
6.07
5.94
5.85
5.76
5.58
5.44
5.42
5.41
7.38
7.43
7.49
7.55
7.61
7.66
7.72
7.78
7.83
7.89
7.95
8.01
7.90
7.79
7.67
7.56
7.39
7.28
7.16
6.95
6.77
6.74
6.73
86 / 72
TC
SHC
11.01
11.01
11.00
10.99
10.98
10.97
10.96
10.96
10.95
10.94
10.93
10.92
10.71
10.49
10.28
10.06
9.83
9.64
9.45
9.26
9.08
8.96
8.93
13.71
13.70
13.69
13.68
13.66
13.65
13.64
13.63
13.62
13.61
13.60
13.59
13.32
13.05
12.79
12.52
12.23
11.99
11.76
11.53
11.30
11.16
11.11
5.98
6.03
6.07
6.12
6.17
6.21
6.26
6.30
6.35
6.40
6.44
6.49
6.41
6.33
6.24
6.16
6.12
5.99
5.86
5.69
5.56
5.54
5.53
7.44
7.50
7.55
7.61
7.67
7.73
7.79
7.84
7.90
7.96
8.02
8.07
7.97
7.87
7.77
7.66
7.62
7.45
7.29
7.08
6.91
6.89
6.88
90 / 75
TC
SHC
11.56
11.55
11.54
11.54
11.53
11.52
11.51
11.50
11.49
11.48
11.47
11.47
11.25
11.03
10.82
10.60
10.36
10.17
9.99
9.80
9.61
9.50
9.46
14.39
14.38
14.37
14.36
14.34
14.33
14.32
14.31
14.30
14.29
14.28
14.27
14.00
13.73
13.46
13.19
12.89
12.66
12.43
12.19
11.96
11.82
11.78
6.09
6.14
6.19
6.23
6.28
6.33
6.38
6.42
6.47
6.52
6.56
6.61
6.54
6.46
6.38
6.30
6.27
6.14
6.01
5.85
5.71
5.70
5.69
7.58
7.64
7.70
7.76
7.82
7.87
7.93
7.99
8.05
8.11
8.17
8.23
8.13
8.04
7.94
7.83
7.80
7.64
7.48
7.27
7.11
7.09
7.08
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
32
| ART COOL GALLERY™
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 15: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity
of Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
LMAN097HVP
9,000
64
TC
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
°F DB
°F WB
61
TC
72
TC
75
TC
0
-0.4
5.35
5.28
5.23
5
4.5
6.03
5.95
5.90
5.20
5.12
4.90
5.88
5.80
10
9
6.71
6.63
5.58
6.58
6.56
6.48
17
15
7.61
6.26
7.54
7.49
7.46
7.39
20
19
7.14
7.95
7.88
7.83
7.80
7.72
25
7.46
23
8.52
8.44
8.39
8.37
8.29
7.99
30
28
9.01
8.93
8.88
8.86
8.78
8.52
35
32
9.50
9.42
9.37
9.34
9.27
9.04
40
36
9.94
9.86
9.81
9.78
9.71
9.48
45
41
10.37
10.30
10.25
10.22
10.15
9.92
47
43
10.55
10.48
10.43
10.40
10.32
10.10
50
46
10.72
10.64
10.59
10.57
10.49
10.24
55
51
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.48
60
56
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.52
63
59
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.55
68
64
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.60
0
-0.4
6.84
6.75
6.68
6.65
6.55
6.26
5
4.5
7.71
7.61
7.55
7.52
7.42
7.13
10
9
8.58
8.48
8.42
8.38
8.29
8.00
17
15
9.73
9.64
9.57
9.54
9.44
9.14
20
19
10.17
10.07
10.01
9.98
9.88
9.54
25
23
10.89
10.79
10.73
10.70
10.60
10.22
30
28
11.52
11.42
11.36
11.32
11.23
10.89
35
32
12.14
12.05
11.98
11.95
11.85
11.57
40
36
12.71
12.61
12.55
12.51
12.42
12.13
45
41
13.27
13.17
13.11
13.08
12.98
12.69
47
43
13.49
13.40
13.33
13.30
13.20
12.91
50
46
13.71
13.61
13.55
13.52
13.42
13.10
55
51
14.07
13.97
13.91
13.88
13.78
13.40
60
56
14.07
13.97
13.91
13.88
13.78
13.46
63
59
14.07
13.97
13.91
13.88
13.78
13.49
68
64
14.07
13.97
13.91
13.88
13.78
13.55
Art Cool Gallery™
LMAN127HVP
12,000
Outdoor Air Temp.
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
33
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MAX
MULTI F Data
Acoustic
• Measurement taken 2.6′ below the bottom of the unit and at a
distance of 3.3′ from face of unit.
• Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full
load normal operating condition.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as
construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in
which the equipment is installed.
• Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3.
• Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745.
3.3ft
Table 16: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
2.6ft
Model No.
Microphone
Figure 33: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
LMAN097HVP
80
70
70
NC-65
60
NC-60
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
Approximate
Hearing
Threshold
10
63
NC-15
250
500
1000
2000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
4000
High Fan Speed
Medium Fan
Speed
Low Fan Speed
LMAN097HVP
39
35
31
LMAN127HVP
42
38
34
8000
NC-65
60
NC-60
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
Approximate
Hearing
Threshold
NC-20
125
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
LMAN127HVP
80
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa)
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 32: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location.
10
63
NC-20
NC-15
125
250
500
1000
2000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
4000
8000
s
34
| ART COOL GALLERY™
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution
Figure 34: LMAN097HVP Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Cooling
Discharge angle: 40°
Discharge angle: 50°
Heating
Air velocity [ft/s]
Air velocity [ft/s]
9f t
9f t
7f t
7f t
6.6
6.6
16ft
13ft
10ft
4.9
3.3
1.6
7 ft
3f t
3f t
4.6
3f t
0f t
0f t
3.3
1.6
16ft
13ft
10ft
7 ft
3f t
0f t
0f t
Temperature [°F]
Temperature [°F]
9f t
7f t
7f t
52
Art Cool Gallery™
9f t
109
55
3f t
3f t
106
16ft
13ft
59
63
66
10ft
7 ft
3f t
0f t
0f t
91
16ft
13ft
10ft
Figure 35: LMAN127HVP Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Cooling
Discharge angle : 40°
102
99
7 ft
3f t
0f t
Air velocity [ft/s]
9f t
9f t
7f t
7f t
8.2
6.6
6.6
3f t
3f t
4.9
3.3
1.6
16ft
13ft
0f t
Heating
Discharge angle : 50°
Air velocity [ft/s]
95
10f t
7 ft
3f t
0f t
0f t
Temperature [°F]
3.3
1.6
16ft
13ft
10f t
7 ft
4.9
3f t
0f t
0f t
Temperature [°F]
9f t
9f t
7f t
7f t
52
11 3
109
55
3f t
59
3f t
106
63
66
16ft
13ft
10f t
7 ft
3f t
0f t
0f t
91
16ft
13ft
10f t
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
95
7 ft
99 102
3f t
0f t
0f t
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
35
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MULTIDiagram
F MAX
Refrigerant Flow
Figure 36: Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Gas pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Cooling
Heating
M
Thermistor for
Indoor Air Temperature
Thermistor for Evaporator
Outlet Temperature
Turbo Fan
Thermistor for
Evaporator Inlet Temperature
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Heat Exchanger
Liquid pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Table 17: Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters.
Model No.
LMAN097HVP
LMAN127HVP
Vapor (inch)
Liquid (inch)
Ø3/8
Ø1/4
Table 18: Art Cool Gallery Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
36
PCB Connector
CN-TH1
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-TH2
Water Level Sensor (Optional)
CN-TH3
| ART COOL GALLERY™
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 37: Multi F Art Cool Gallery Indoor Units Wiring Diagram.
Art Cool Gallery™
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
37
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MULTIMaterials
F MAX
Factory Supplied Parts and
Factory Supplied Parts
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Table 19: Parts Table.
Part
Quantity
Installation Guide
One (1)
Type “A” Screws and
Plastic Anchors
Four (4)
Each
Type “B” Screws
(M4 x 12L)
Two (2)
Wireless Handheld
Controller with Holder
(AKB73635607)
One (1)
Factory Supplied Materials
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
Image
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
• Flaring tool set
• Spanner (Half union)
• Thermometer
WARNING
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes.
Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Note:
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect
installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
38
| ART COOL GALLERY™
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Selecting the Best Location
Figure 38:Minimum Clearance Requirements.
Do’s
•
•
•
•
•
•
Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked.
Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily.
Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration.
Ensure there is sufficient space from the ceiling and floor.
Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space.
Locate the indoor unit in a location where it can be easily connected to the outdoor
unit/branch distribution unit.
Don’ts
•
•
•
•
>8 inches
>20 inches
>20 inches
Recommended height
>5 feet from the floor
Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used.
Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored.
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators.
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed.
Figure 39:Using the Installation Guide.
In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure:
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees).
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
Using the Installation Guide
1. Choose an appropriate location for the indoor unit. To hang the installation guide, verify that it is level
and plumb, and then tape it to the wall.
Horizontal
1
2
2. Drill four (4) 1/4-inch diameter holes with a depth of 1-3/16 to 1-3/8 inches for the mounting screws.
Drill one (1) two (2) inch-diameter hole for the field-installed refrigerant and drain piping.
3. Insert a plastic anchor into each of the mounting holes.
3
4. Screw the top two (2) screws into the wall. Do not flush them to the wall; leave a 7/16 inch space for
hanging the indoor unit.
Note:
If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded.
Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components.
Plastic Anchor
4
6
7/1
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
h
inc
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
39
Art Cool Gallery™
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MULTI
F MAX
Installation and Best Layout
Practices
Preparing the Indoor Unit for
Installation
Removing the Front Panel
Figure 40:Preparing for Installation.
1A
1B
2A
2B
1. First pull the top of the front panel up (1A) and then out (1B).
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
2. Remove the two (2) screws at the bottom (2A), then lift off the front
panel (2B).
3. To completely detach the front panel, disconnect the panel connector
found at the top of the indoor unit (3).
3
Panel Connector
Figure 41:Removing the Piping and Side Covers.
Removing the Piping and Side Covers
1. Unscrew the center cover.
2. Remove the cover from the side of the indoor unit chosen for the piping connections,
and then knock out the piping access hole. If the refrigerant piping will be connected
through the back of the unit, the access hole does not need to be knocked out.
Access Hole
for Piping
3. Remove any burrs that may have been made.
Side cover
Figure 42:Preparing the Drain Hose.
Preparing the Drain Hose
1. Remove the rubber stopper from the chosen side of the indoor unit.
2. Insert the drain hose into the handle of the drain pan.
3. Connect the drain hose to the field-installed drain piping.
Adhesive
Drain
Hose
40
| ART COOL GALLERY™
Choose a Side
for the Drain
Connections
Field-Installed
Drain Piping
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Rubber Stopper
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Preparing the Refrigerant and Drain Piping Connections
Figure 43:Preparing the Refrigerant /
Drain Connections.
1. Depending on the installation requirements, route the indoor unit refrigerant piping and the
drain hose to the left, right (see guidelines below), or rear of the frame.
1
2. Bundle the piping and drain hose with tape where they meet near the indoor unit frame. Position the drain hose at the bottom of the bundle (positioning the drain hose at the top of the
bundle may cause the drain pan to overflow inside the indoor unit).
Installing Piping on the Right Side of the Indoor Unit Frame
1. Press on the top of the clamp, and then
slowly guide the piping downward.
Drain hose
Figure 44:Right Side Piping Access.
1
2
2. Bend the piping to the right side of the
indoor unit frame.
2
Do not bend the piping/drain hose from side to side; it may damage the components.
Power wiring /
Communication
cable
Connecting
pipe
Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame
1. Remove the installation guide and hang the indoor unit on the top two (2) screws. Verify
the indoor unit is hanging securely on the screws.
2. Align the holes at the bottom of the indoor unit to the mounting holes. Tighten first the top
screws, then tighten the bottom screws.
3. Verify that the indoor unit is completely secured to the wall by gently shaking it up and
down.
Tape
Drain hose
Figure 45:Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame.
1
Insta
llation
Guid
e
Holes for Hanging
(On back of
indoor unit)
2
Plastic Anchors
3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
41
Art Cool Gallery™
Loop
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MULTI
F MAX
Installation and Best Layout
Practices
Connecting the Indoor Unit Piping to the Field-Installed Piping
1. Center align the indoor unit piping (refrigerant and drain) and the field-installed
piping, then hand tighten the flare nut.
2. Tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench.
3. Attach the drain tube piping to the indoor unit drain hose as shown below.
Figure 46:Indoor Unit to Field-Installed Piping Connection.
Indoor unit piping
Flare nut
Drain extension
If the drain hose is routed inside a room, add insulation
to prevent condensation from
forming.
Indoor unit
drain hose
Adhesive
Field-installed
piping
Spanner
Narrow tape
Flare nut
Field-installed
piping
Torque
wrench
Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping
Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched.
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
Figure 48:Insulating the Piping.
Bands
Insulation
1.
Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely
covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping connections). Any exposed piping may
generate condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F.
Field-supplied
piping
Drain Piping Insulation
Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick.
Wide tape
Wrap with tape
Indoor unit
piping
Installing the Insulation
1. Overlap the insulation at the connection of the field-installed piping and the indoor unit
piping. Tape together so there are no gaps.
2. Secure insulation to the rear piping housing section with vinyl tape.
3. Bundle the piping and drain hose with tape where they meet at the back of the indoor
unit frame. Position the drain hose at the bottom of the bundle (positioning the drain
hose at the top of the bundle may cause the drain pan to overflow inside the indoor
unit).
Drain Slope
Drain hose should point
down so water can flow
away easily.
Figure 49:Drain Piping Slope.
Slope Down
Checking the Drainage System
1. Pour water on the indoor unit evaporator.
2.
3.
Wrap with tape
Piping
Drain hose
2. Ensure the water
flows through and out
of the hose and away
from the indoor unit
without leaking.
s
Drain extension
42
| ART COOL GALLERY™
Piping
Narrow tape
Figure 50:Checking the Drainage
System.
Indoor Unit
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 47:Extending the Drain Hose.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Wide tape
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
Note:
Art Cool Gallery™
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable
1. Insert the power wiring/communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only)
through the access hole of the indoor unit (ground wire should be
longer than the other wires/cables). Unscrew the control board
cover.
Figure 51:Connecting the Power Wiring / Communications Cable.
2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit
control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from
the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems
only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor
unit.
Control Board Cover
1(L1) 2(L2)
3
3. Secure the power wiring/communications cable to the control
board.
4. Reattach the control board cover.
Lock nut
(field supplied)
Figure 52:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch
Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LMAN097HVP and
LMAN127HVP models.
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
2(L2)
3
RD
BL
1(L1)
BR
GRN / YLW
GND
Conduit
(field supplied)
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
3 or S
GND
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
43
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MULTI
F MAX
Installation and Best Layout
Practices
Controller Options
Art Cool Gallery wall-mounted indoor units include a handheld controller (AKB73635607), but optional LG-supplied wired controllers are
available.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Wireless Handheld Controller
Figure 53:AKB73635607
Wireless Controller.
Table 20: AKB73635607 Wireless Controller Functions.
Control
Panel
Button
Display
Screen
Description
Air circulation button1: Circulates the room air without operating in cooling
or heating mode.
Display
Screen
Sleep Mode Auto Button1: Sets the sleep mode auto operation.
Temperature Adjustment Buttons: Raises or lowers temperature setpoint in
cooling and heating operation.
On / Off Button: Turns the power on/off.
Indoor Fan Speed Button: Changes the fan speed.
Control
Panel
Operation mode selection button1: Selects the operation mode.
Cooling operation
/ Auto operation or auto changeover
/
Dehumidifying operation / Heating operation
Jet Cool / Jet Heat Button1: Warms up or cools down the indoor
temperature within a short period.
Air Flow Direction Button: Adjusts the airflow direction.
Temperature Display Button: Displays the room temperature. Press and
hold button down for five (5) seconds to change from °C to °F.
Operation Mode Sequence
Cooling Mode
↓
Auto Operation
↓
Dehumidification Mode
↓
Heating Mode
Timer button: Sets the current time and the start/end times.
Navigation/Functions Button1: Adjusts the time and sets the special functions.
Auto clean / Operates energy saving cooling / Adjusts the brightness
of the indoor unit display
Set/Clear Button: Sets or cancels functions.
Reset Button: Resets the air conditioner settings.
1
44
| ART COOL GALLERY™
Depending on the indoor unit model, some functions may not be supported.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Wired Controller Connections
Figure 54:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block.
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
CN-REMO
3
RD
BL
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
BR
GRN / YLW
GND
To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
Wired Controller Placement
Figure 55:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
To Wired Controller
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort
levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location
away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to
cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its
LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can
detect an average room temperature.
YES
NO
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
Hot or cold air from ducts
Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
Concealed pipes and chimneys
An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
TEMP
Rem
ot e
Cont
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
roller
Art Cool Gallery™
•
•
•
•
•
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
NO
NO
Figure 56:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring/cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation
is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and
then position wiring/cable on applicable side.
Top
Top
Back
Right
Side
Right
Side
2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall
plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller
wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no
gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself.
3. Arrange wiring/cables so as not to interfere with the controller
circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into
place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto
the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired
controller and the wall plate on all sides.
Figure 57:Attaching the Wall Plate.
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to
release controller. Do not damage the controller components
when removing.
Figure 58:Installing/Removing the
Controller.
Installing the Controller
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Wall
ART COOL GALLERY™
Wall
|
45
MULTI
F
ART COOL GALLERY INDOOR
UNITS
MULTI
F MAX
Installation and Best Layout
Practices
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
Finalizing Indoor Unit Installation
1. Verify that the side covers are closed or opened, depending on
installation requirements. Place the power wiring / communications cable in the bottom groove along the left side of the frame.
Figure 59:Final Installation Step—Reattaching the Front Panel.
1
2
2. Reconnect the panel connector found at the top of the indoor unit.
Front Panel
Connector
3. Attach the top part of the front panel, then position its tabs in the
grooves on the bottom part of the indoor unit frame.
4. To ensure the front panel tabs are securely positioned in the
grooves, adjust the panel by loosening or tightening the screws
at the bottom.
46
| ART COOL GALLERY™
3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
4
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Art Cool Gallery™
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ART COOL GALLERY™
|
47
STANDARD
WALL-MOUNTED
INDOOR UNIT DATA
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 49
“General Data / Specifications” on page 50
“Dimensions” on page 51
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 53
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 56
“Acoustic Data” on page 58
“Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 60
“Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 62
“Wiring Diagram” on page 63
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 65
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 66
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Mechanical Specifications and Features
Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units
Figure 60: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit.
General
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Standard WallMounted units have a sound rating no higher than 46 dB(A) as tested
per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745.
Coil
Indoor unit coils are comprised of a minimum of two rows of
aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubing. The coils are
pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided with a factory
installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
Refrigerant System
Electrical
The indoor units require 208–230Vac/60Hz/1Φ power with voltage
variance of no more than ±10%.
Casing
The units mount on a vertical surface. They are shipped with a separate back plate that secures the unit to the wall, protruding no more
than nine (9) inches. Refrigerant piping can be installed in one (1) of
four (4) different directions.
Finish
The Standard Wall-Mounted unit has a curved architectural panel
with a pearl white finish. Unit casing has a pearl white or dark gray
finish and is manufactured of heavy-duty acrylonitrile butadiene
styrene (ABS) and high impact polystyrene (HIPS) plastic.
Fan Assembly and Control
The unit has a single, direct-drive, crossflow fan made of high strength
ABS plastic. The fan motor is brushless digitally controlled (BLDC)
with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor
assembly is mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets. Fan
speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digitally
controlled algorithm that provides pre-programmed, field-selectable
fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling modes. For
Standard Wall-Mounted units, the indoor fan has Low, Med, High, Jet
Cool, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High,
Jet Heat, and Auto settings for Heating mode. The Auto setting adjusts
the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint
and space temperature. Also, the separate Chaos setting provides a
simultaneous and random change in fan speed and flow direction at
the discharge, simulating a natural outdoor breeze.
Features
•
•
•
•
Inverter (Variable speed fan)
Comfort Air
3M filter
Jet cool/Jet Heat
•
•
•
•
The return air inlet has a factory-supplied primary removable, washable filter. The unit is also equipped with a secondary 3M Micro Dust
filter. Filters are accessed from the front of the unit without the use
of tools.
Airflow Guide Vanes
A factory-installed motorized guide vane controls the direction of
airflow from side to side. A motorized louver provides an automatic
change in airflow by directing the air up and down for uniform air
distribution.
Microprocessor Control
The indoor unit has an integrated control panel to communicate with
the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor
controls space temperature through using the value provided by the
temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control
will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature
falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which point, a
signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate mode. The
microprocessor also provides self-diagnostics and auto restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications cable must
be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit.
Controls
The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared sensor to communicate with the supplied LG wireless handheld remote
controller. An optional LG supplied wired controller is available as
an additional accessory. Communication between the indoor units
and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core,
stranded and shielded power / communication cable. The indoor unit
has built-in wi-fi and can be controlled with LG’s SmartThinQ app on
a smart device. A field-supplied wi-fi network and smart device are
required. The SmartThinQ app is free and is available for Android
and iOS smart devices.
Condensate
The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate and includes
a flexible drain hose capable of installation in one of two directions.
The unit also includes a connection that is compatible with the AquaGuard® AG-9300-LG condensate sensor.
Group control
Self-cleaning indoor coil
Auto operation
Auto restart operation
•
•
•
•
Built-in wi-fi
Dehumidifying function
Self-diagnostic function
Wireless LCD remote control included
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
49
Standard Wall-Mounted
The system is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a
holding charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45°
flare. All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units
must be field insulated.
Air Filter
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
General Data / Specifications
Table 21: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
1
LMN079HVT
LSN090HSV5
LSN120HSV5
LMN159HVT
LSN180HSV5
LMN249HVT
7,000
9,000
12,000
14,300
18,000
24,000
8,100
10,900
13,600
15,600
21,600
25,600
Operating Range
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
57-77
59-81
Fan
Type
Cross Flow
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
Motor/Drive
Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L)
30 x 1
60 x 1
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
254 / 204 / 148
268 / 218 / 169
282 / 233 / 177
314 / 268 / 184
558 / 438 / 353
597 / 452 / 367
44 / 38 / 34
46 / 41 / 36
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
R410A
Refrigerant Control
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz
EEV
208-230, 1, 60
3
Rated Amps (A)
Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A)
(H/M/L)4
0.4
35 / 31 / 26
36 / 32 / 27
38 / 34 / 29
42 / 38 / 32
32-15/16 x
12-1/8 x 7-7/16
39-9/32 x
13-19/32 x 8-9/32
Net Unit Weight (lbs.)
18.3
25.6
Shipping Weight (lbs.)
23.4
32.2
Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
Power Wiring / Communications
Cable (No. x AWG)5
Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x
Fin / inch) x Number
4 x 18
(2 x 23 x 22) x 1
(2 x 16 x 20) x 1
Pipe Size
Liquid (in.)
1/4
Vapor (in.)
3/8
1/2
Connection Size
Liquid (in.)
1/4
3/8
1/4
Vapor (in.)
3/8
5/8
1/2
Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.)
27/32, 5/8
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in
accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and
indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
50
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
4
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Dimensions
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Figure 61: LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, and LMN159HVT Dimensions.
1-7/16 (33.5)
Display & Remote
Controller Signal
Receiver
Bottom
Rear
Right
2 (51)
7-7/16 (189)
Air Intake
Air Outlet
Refrigerant,
Drain Pipe
and Cable
Routing
Knock Out
Hole
5/16 (8)
Terminal Block for
Power Supply and
Communication Approx. 11-11/32 (288) to gas pipe
12-1/8 (308)
Refrigerant, Drain Approx. 8-19/32 (218) to liquid pipe
Pipe and Cable
Routing Knock Out Hole
Drain Hose
Connection
3-21/32 (93)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
5-19/32 (142)
3-27/32 (98)
5-31/32 (152)
1-1/2 (38)
12-1/16 (306)
32-15/16 (837)
Installation Plate
Unit Outline
32-15/16 (837)
Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole
29/32 (23)
Unit Outline
Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe
3-11/16 (94)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
7-27/32 (199)
5-9/32 (134)
7-5/8 (194)
In Case of Left Side Piping
5-3/16 (132)
51
|
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Standard Wall-Mounted
30-3/16 (767)
Air Intake Hole
32-15/16 (837)
[28-5/32 (715)]
Air Outlet Hole
2-3/8 (60)
3-5/8 (92)
55°
Left & Right
55°
2-15/32
(63)
Rear
Left
Decoration Cover
Up & Down
Heating
* If airflow direction control is available,
Cooling
15°
29/32 (23)
Unit : Inch (mm)
Refrigerant,
Drain Pipe
and Cable
Routing
Knock Out
Hole
2 (51)
1-1/4 (31)
2-7/16 ( 61.5)
1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2)
1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3)
1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6)
15°
45°
85°
11/32 (9)
2-15/32 (63)
12-1/8 (308)
12-1/8 (308)
2-7/32(56)
10-11/32 (263)
2-17/32 (64)
1-27/32(47)
2-5/16
(59)
[5-29/32 (150)]
Air Intake Hole
2
Air -7/32
Ou (5
tlet 6)
Ho
le
5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7)
2-13/32 (61)
2-7/32 (56)
5-31/32 (152)
Air
Outlet
8-9/32 (210)
Air Intake
7/16 (11)
2-3/8 (60)
Refrigerant,
Drain Pipe
and Cable
Routing
Knock Out
Hole
Approx. 9-7/16 (240) to gas pipe
Approx. 6-5/16 (160) to liquid pipe
Drain Hose
Connection
4-17/32 (115)
5-29/32 (150)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
3-9/32 (83)
5-9/32 (134)
14-11/16 (373)
39-9/32 (998)
Installation Plate
Unit Outline
39-9/32 (998)
Unit Outline
Connecting Gas/Liquid Pipe
5-13/32 (137)
Ø2-9/16 (65)
7-13/32 (188)
3-9/32 (83)
5-29/32 (150)
6-15/32 (164)
In case of Left Side Piping
Fixing the Installation Plate, Drilling Hole
1-1/16 (27)
Rear
Right
Bottom
Terminal Block for
Power Supply and
Communication
Refrigerant, Drain
Pipe and Cable
Routing Knock Out
Hole
1-15/32 (37)
2-23/32 (69)
[36-5/32 (918)]
Air Intake Hole
50°
13-19/32 (345)
Rear
Left
39-9/32 (998)
Display & Remote
Controller Signal
Receiver
[34-11/32 (872)]
Air Outlet Hole
2-1/4 (57)
3-17/32 (90)
2-7/32 (56)
Left & Right
50°
1-1/16 (27)
[6-11/16 (170)]
Air Intake Hole
1-7/16 (33.5)
Decoration Cover
Up & Down
Heating
* If airflow direction control is available,
Cooling
20°
2-3/8 (60)
2-3/32 (53)
11-13/16 (300)
2-15/32 (63)
Unit : Inch (mm)
Refrigerant,
Drain Pipe
and Cable
Routing
Knock Out
Hole
2-3/8 (60)
1-1/4 (31)
2-7/16 ( 61.5)
1-3/32 (50.2) 1-1/16 (26.2)
1/4 (6) x 1/8 (3)
1/8 (3) x 1/4 (6)
15°
45°
85°
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
52
7/16(11)
2-3/32 (53)
13-19/32 (345)
13-19/32 (345)
2-3/8 (60)
5-31/32 (152)
[2
Air -29/
Ou 32 (
tlet 74
Ho )]
le
5/8 (15.3) 1-9/32 (32.7)
2-13/32 (61)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Dimensions
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Figure 62: LSN180HSV5 and LMN249HVT Dimensions.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 22: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LMN079HVT
7,000
73 / 61
TC
SHC
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
6.86
6.86
6.85
6.85
6.84
6.84
6.83
6.83
6.82
6.81
6.81
6.80
6.64
6.48
6.31
6.15
5.98
5.83
5.69
5.54
5.39
5.31
5.28
8.82
8.82
8.81
8.80
8.80
8.79
8.78
8.78
8.77
8.76
8.76
8.75
8.54
8.33
8.12
7.91
7.68
7.50
7.31
7.12
6.94
6.82
6.79
7.29
7.28
7.28
7.27
7.27
7.26
7.25
7.25
7.24
7.24
7.23
7.23
7.06
6.90
6.73
6.57
6.39
6.25
6.10
5.96
5.81
5.72
5.69
9.37
9.36
9.36
9.35
9.34
9.33
9.33
9.32
9.31
9.31
9.30
9.29
9.08
8.87
8.66
8.45
8.22
8.03
7.84
7.66
7.47
7.36
7.32
7.71
7.71
7.70
7.70
7.69
7.68
7.68
7.67
7.67
7.66
7.66
7.65
7.48
7.32
7.15
6.99
6.81
6.66
6.52
6.37
6.23
6.14
6.11
9.92
9.91
9.90
9.90
9.89
9.88
9.87
9.87
9.86
9.85
9.84
9.84
9.62
9.41
9.20
8.99
8.75
8.57
8.38
8.19
8.01
7.89
7.86
4.68
4.72
4.76
4.79
4.83
4.87
4.90
4.94
4.97
5.01
5.05
5.08
5.00
4.91
4.82
4.73
4.68
4.56
4.43
4.28
4.15
4.12
4.11
6.04
6.09
6.13
6.18
6.23
6.28
6.32
6.37
6.42
6.46
6.51
6.56
6.45
6.34
6.22
6.10
6.04
5.88
5.72
5.52
5.36
5.32
5.30
4.95
4.99
5.02
5.06
5.10
5.14
5.18
5.22
5.25
5.29
5.33
5.37
5.29
5.20
5.12
5.03
4.98
4.86
4.73
4.58
4.45
4.42
4.41
6.38
6.43
6.48
6.53
6.58
6.63
6.68
6.73
6.78
6.83
6.88
6.92
6.82
6.71
6.60
6.48
6.43
6.26
6.10
5.90
5.74
5.70
5.69
4.79
4.83
4.86
4.90
4.94
4.98
5.01
5.05
5.09
5.12
5.16
5.20
5.13
5.05
4.97
4.89
4.85
4.74
4.62
4.48
4.36
4.34
4.33
6.18
6.23
6.27
6.32
6.37
6.42
6.47
6.51
6.56
6.61
6.66
6.70
6.61
6.51
6.41
6.31
6.26
6.11
5.96
5.78
5.63
5.60
5.59
8.02
8.02
8.01
8.00
8.00
7.99
7.99
7.98
7.97
7.97
7.96
7.95
7.79
7.62
7.46
7.29
7.00
6.91
6.82
6.67
6.53
6.44
6.41
10.31
10.31
10.30
10.29
10.28
10.27
10.27
10.26
10.25
10.24
10.24
10.23
10.01
9.80
9.59
9.37
9.00
8.88
8.77
8.58
8.39
8.28
8.24
4.89
4.93
4.97
5.01
5.04
5.08
5.12
5.16
5.19
5.23
5.27
5.31
5.24
5.16
5.09
5.01
4.90
4.82
4.75
4.61
4.49
4.47
4.46
6.31
6.36
6.41
6.46
6.50
6.55
6.60
6.65
6.70
6.75
6.80
6.85
6.75
6.66
6.56
6.46
6.32
6.22
6.12
5.94
5.79
5.76
5.76
TC
86 / 72
SHC
8.57
8.56
8.55
8.55
8.54
8.53
8.53
8.52
8.51
8.51
8.50
8.49
8.33
8.16
7.99
7.83
7.64
7.50
7.35
7.21
7.06
6.97
6.94
11.01
11.01
11.00
10.99
10.98
10.97
10.96
10.96
10.95
10.94
10.93
10.92
10.71
10.49
10.28
10.06
9.83
9.64
9.45
9.26
9.08
8.96
8.93
4.93
4.97
5.01
5.05
5.09
5.12
5.16
5.20
5.24
5.28
5.31
5.35
5.29
5.22
5.15
5.08
5.05
4.94
4.83
4.70
4.58
4.57
4.56
6.36
6.41
6.46
6.51
6.56
6.61
6.66
6.71
6.76
6.81
6.85
6.90
6.82
6.73
6.64
6.55
6.52
6.37
6.23
6.06
5.91
5.89
5.89
TC
90 / 75
SHC
8.99
8.99
8.98
8.97
8.97
8.96
8.95
8.94
8.94
8.93
8.92
8.92
8.75
8.58
8.41
8.24
8.06
7.91
7.77
7.62
7.48
7.39
7.36
11.56
11.55
11.54
11.54
11.53
11.52
11.51
11.50
11.49
11.48
11.47
11.47
11.25
11.03
10.82
10.60
10.36
10.17
9.99
9.80
9.61
9.50
9.46
5.03
5.06
5.10
5.14
5.18
5.22
5.26
5.30
5.34
5.38
5.42
5.45
5.39
5.33
5.26
5.19
5.17
5.06
4.96
4.82
4.71
4.70
4.70
6.48
6.53
6.58
6.63
6.68
6.73
6.78
6.83
6.88
6.93
6.98
7.03
6.96
6.87
6.79
6.70
6.67
6.53
6.39
6.22
6.08
6.06
6.06
Standard Wall-Mounted
LSN090HSV5
9,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
53
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 23: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued).
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LSN120HSV5
12,000
LMN159HVT
14,300
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
11.76
11.75
11.75
11.74
11.73
11.72
11.71
11.70
11.69
11.68
11.67
11.66
11.38
11.10
10.83
10.55
10.25
10.00
9.75
9.50
9.25
9.10
9.05
14.02
14.01
14.00
13.99
13.98
13.96
13.95
13.94
13.93
13.92
13.91
13.90
13.57
13.23
12.90
12.57
12.21
11.91
11.61
11.32
11.02
10.84
10.78
8.51
8.57
8.64
8.71
8.77
8.84
8.90
8.97
9.03
9.10
9.17
9.23
9.08
8.92
8.76
8.60
8.51
8.28
8.05
7.77
7.54
7.49
7.47
10.23
10.31
10.39
10.47
10.55
10.62
10.70
10.78
10.86
10.94
11.02
11.10
10.92
10.73
10.53
10.33
10.23
9.95
9.68
9.35
9.07
9.00
8.98
73 / 61
TC
SHC
12.49
12.48
12.48
12.47
12.46
12.45
12.44
12.43
12.42
12.41
12.40
12.39
12.11
11.82
11.54
11.26
10.96
10.71
10.46
10.21
9.96
9.81
9.76
14.89
14.88
14.87
14.85
14.84
14.83
14.82
14.81
14.80
14.79
14.78
14.76
14.43
14.09
13.76
13.42
13.06
12.76
12.46
12.17
11.87
11.69
11.63
8.99
9.06
9.13
9.20
9.27
9.34
9.41
9.47
9.54
9.61
9.68
9.75
9.60
9.45
9.29
9.13
9.05
8.82
8.59
8.31
8.08
8.03
8.01
10.80
10.89
10.97
11.06
11.14
11.22
11.31
11.39
11.47
11.56
11.64
11.72
11.55
11.36
11.17
10.98
10.88
10.60
10.33
10.00
9.71
9.66
9.64
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
13.22
13.21
13.20
13.19
13.18
13.17
13.16
13.15
13.14
13.13
13.12
13.11
12.83
12.55
12.26
11.98
11.67
11.42
11.17
10.92
10.67
10.52
10.48
15.76
15.75
15.74
15.72
15.71
15.70
15.69
15.68
15.66
15.65
15.64
15.63
15.29
14.95
14.61
14.28
13.91
13.61
13.32
13.02
12.72
12.54
12.48
8.70
8.77
8.84
8.90
8.97
9.04
9.11
9.17
9.24
9.31
9.38
9.44
9.31
9.17
9.03
8.88
8.82
8.61
8.40
8.14
7.92
7.88
7.87
10.46
10.54
10.62
10.70
10.79
10.87
10.95
11.03
11.11
11.19
11.27
11.35
11.19
11.03
10.86
10.68
10.60
10.35
10.09
9.78
9.52
9.48
9.46
13.75
13.74
13.73
13.72
13.71
13.70
13.69
13.68
13.67
13.66
13.65
13.64
13.35
13.07
12.78
12.50
12.00
11.84
11.69
11.44
11.19
11.04
10.99
16.39
16.38
16.36
16.35
16.34
16.33
16.31
16.30
16.29
16.28
16.26
16.25
15.91
15.57
15.23
14.90
14.30
14.11
13.93
13.63
13.33
13.16
13.10
8.88
8.95
9.02
9.09
9.16
9.23
9.30
9.37
9.44
9.50
9.57
9.64
9.51
9.38
9.24
9.10
8.90
8.76
8.62
8.37
8.15
8.12
8.11
10.68
10.76
10.85
10.93
11.01
11.10
11.18
11.26
11.34
11.43
11.51
11.59
11.44
11.28
11.11
10.94
10.70
10.53
10.37
10.06
9.80
9.76
9.74
TC
86 / 72
SHC
14.69
14.67
14.66
14.65
14.64
14.63
14.62
14.61
14.60
14.59
14.57
14.56
14.27
13.99
13.70
13.42
13.10
12.85
12.60
12.35
12.10
11.95
11.90
17.50
17.49
17.47
17.46
17.45
17.43
17.42
17.41
17.39
17.38
17.37
17.35
17.01
16.67
16.33
15.99
15.61
15.31
15.02
14.72
14.42
14.24
14.18
8.96
9.03
9.10
9.17
9.24
9.31
9.38
9.45
9.52
9.58
9.65
9.72
9.60
9.48
9.36
9.22
9.18
8.98
8.78
8.53
8.33
8.30
8.29
10.77
10.85
10.94
11.02
11.11
11.19
11.27
11.36
11.44
11.52
11.61
11.69
11.55
11.40
11.25
11.09
11.03
10.79
10.56
10.26
10.01
9.98
9.97
TC
90 / 75
SHC
15.42
15.40
15.39
15.38
15.37
15.36
15.35
15.33
15.32
15.31
15.30
15.29
15.00
14.71
14.42
14.13
13.81
13.56
13.31
13.07
12.82
12.67
12.62
18.37
18.36
18.34
18.33
18.32
18.30
18.29
18.27
18.26
18.25
18.23
18.22
17.87
17.53
17.18
16.84
16.46
16.16
15.87
15.57
15.27
15.09
15.03
9.13
9.20
9.27
9.34
9.41
9.48
9.55
9.62
9.70
9.77
9.84
9.91
9.79
9.68
9.56
9.43
9.39
9.20
9.01
8.76
8.56
8.54
8.53
10.97
11.06
11.15
11.23
11.32
11.40
11.49
11.57
11.66
11.74
11.83
11.91
11.78
11.64
11.49
11.34
11.29
11.06
10.83
10.53
10.29
10.26
10.25
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
54
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 24: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued).
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LSN180HSV5
18,000
17.65
17.63
17.62
17.60
17.59
17.58
17.56
17.55
17.54
17.52
17.51
17.50
17.08
16.66
16.24
15.82
15.37
14.99
14.62
14.24
13.87
13.65
13.57
23.53
23.51
23.49
23.47
23.46
23.44
23.42
23.40
23.38
23.37
23.35
23.33
22.77
22.21
21.65
21.09
20.49
19.99
19.49
18.99
18.49
18.19
18.10
12.33
12.43
12.52
12.62
12.71
12.81
12.90
13.00
13.10
13.19
13.29
13.38
13.16
12.93
12.70
12.46
12.33
12.00
11.67
11.27
10.93
10.85
10.83
16.82
16.95
17.08
17.21
17.35
17.48
17.61
17.74
17.87
18.00
18.13
18.26
17.95
17.65
17.33
17.00
16.82
16.37
15.92
15.38
14.91
14.81
14.77
73 / 61
TC
SHC
18.74
18.73
18.71
18.70
18.68
18.67
18.66
18.64
18.63
18.61
18.60
18.58
18.16
17.74
17.32
16.90
16.44
16.06
15.69
15.32
14.94
14.72
14.64
24.99
24.97
24.95
24.93
24.91
24.89
24.87
24.85
24.84
24.82
24.80
24.78
24.21
23.65
23.09
22.53
21.92
21.42
20.92
20.42
19.92
19.62
19.52
13.02
13.13
13.23
13.33
13.43
13.53
13.63
13.73
13.83
13.93
14.03
14.13
13.92
13.70
13.47
13.23
13.12
12.78
12.45
12.05
11.71
11.64
11.62
17.77
17.91
18.05
18.19
18.32
18.46
18.60
18.74
18.87
19.01
19.15
19.28
18.99
18.69
18.38
18.06
17.89
17.44
16.99
16.44
15.98
15.88
15.85
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
19.84
19.82
19.81
19.79
19.78
19.76
19.75
19.73
19.72
19.70
19.69
19.67
19.24
18.82
18.40
17.97
17.51
17.13
16.76
16.39
16.01
15.79
15.71
26.45
26.43
26.41
26.39
26.37
26.35
26.33
26.31
26.29
26.27
26.25
26.23
25.66
25.09
24.53
23.96
23.35
22.85
22.35
21.85
21.35
21.05
20.95
12.61
12.71
12.81
12.91
13.00
13.10
13.20
13.30
13.39
13.49
13.59
13.69
13.49
13.30
13.09
12.88
12.78
12.47
12.17
11.79
11.48
11.42
11.40
17.21
17.34
17.47
17.61
17.74
17.88
18.01
18.14
18.27
18.41
18.54
18.67
18.41
18.14
17.86
17.57
17.44
17.02
16.60
16.09
15.66
15.59
15.56
20.63
20.61
20.60
20.58
20.57
20.55
20.53
20.52
20.50
20.49
20.47
20.46
20.03
19.60
19.17
18.75
18.00
17.77
17.53
17.16
16.79
16.56
16.49
27.50
27.48
27.46
27.44
27.42
27.40
27.38
27.36
27.34
27.32
27.29
27.27
26.70
26.13
25.57
25.00
24.00
23.69
23.38
22.88
22.38
22.08
21.98
12.88
12.98
13.08
13.18
13.28
13.38
13.48
13.58
13.68
13.78
13.87
13.97
13.79
13.60
13.40
13.19
12.90
12.70
12.50
12.13
11.82
11.77
11.75
17.57
17.70
17.84
17.98
18.12
18.25
18.39
18.52
18.66
18.79
18.93
19.07
18.81
18.55
18.28
18.00
17.60
17.33
17.06
16.55
16.12
16.05
16.03
TC
86 / 72
SHC
22.03
22.01
22.00
21.98
21.96
21.94
21.93
21.91
21.89
21.88
21.86
21.84
21.41
20.98
20.55
20.12
19.65
19.28
18.90
18.53
18.15
17.93
17.85
29.37
29.35
29.33
29.30
29.28
29.26
29.24
29.21
29.19
29.17
29.15
29.13
28.55
27.97
27.40
26.83
26.20
25.70
25.20
24.70
24.20
23.90
23.81
12.98
13.09
13.19
13.29
13.39
13.49
13.59
13.69
13.79
13.89
13.99
14.09
13.92
13.75
13.56
13.37
13.30
13.01
12.73
12.36
12.07
12.03
12.01
17.72
17.85
17.99
18.13
18.27
18.41
18.54
18.68
18.82
18.95
19.09
19.23
18.99
18.75
18.50
18.24
18.14
17.75
17.36
16.87
16.47
16.41
16.39
TC
90 / 75
SHC
23.12
23.11
23.09
23.07
23.05
23.04
23.02
23.00
22.98
22.97
22.95
22.93
22.50
22.06
21.63
21.20
20.72
20.35
19.97
19.60
19.22
19.00
18.92
30.83
30.81
30.79
30.76
30.74
30.72
30.69
30.67
30.64
30.62
30.60
30.57
29.99
29.42
28.84
28.27
27.63
27.13
26.63
26.13
25.63
25.33
25.23
13.23
13.33
13.44
13.54
13.64
13.75
13.85
13.95
14.05
14.16
14.26
14.36
14.20
14.03
13.85
13.67
13.61
13.33
13.05
12.70
12.41
12.37
12.36
18.05
18.19
18.33
18.47
18.61
18.75
18.89
19.03
19.17
19.31
19.45
19.59
19.37
19.14
18.90
18.65
18.57
18.19
17.81
17.32
16.93
16.88
16.86
Standard Wall-Mounted
LMN249HVT
24,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
55
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 25: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity of
Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
LMN079HVT
8,100
LSN090HSV5
10,900
LSN120HSV5
13,600
Outdoor Air Temp.
°F DB
°F WB
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
61
TC
4.17
4.70
5.22
5.93
6.19
6.63
7.01
7.40
7.74
8.08
8.22
8.35
8.57
8.57
8.57
8.57
5.61
6.32
7.03
7.98
8.33
8.93
9.44
9.96
10.42
10.87
11.06
11.24
11.53
11.53
11.53
11.53
7.00
7.89
8.78
9.95
10.40
11.14
11.78
12.42
13.00
13.56
13.80
14.02
14.39
14.39
14.39
14.39
64
TC
4.11
4.64
5.17
5.87
6.13
6.57
6.96
7.34
7.68
8.02
8.16
8.29
8.51
8.51
8.51
8.51
5.53
6.24
6.95
7.90
8.26
8.85
9.36
9.87
10.33
10.80
10.98
11.15
11.46
11.46
11.46
11.46
6.90
7.78
8.67
9.86
10.30
11.03
11.67
12.31
12.89
13.46
13.70
13.91
14.29
14.29
14.29
14.29
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
4.07
4.60
5.13
5.83
6.09
6.53
6.92
7.30
7.64
7.98
8.12
8.25
8.47
8.47
8.47
8.47
5.48
6.18
6.90
7.85
8.21
8.79
9.31
9.82
10.28
10.74
10.93
11.10
11.40
11.40
11.40
11.40
6.83
7.71
8.60
9.79
10.23
10.96
11.60
12.24
12.82
13.39
13.63
13.84
14.22
14.22
14.22
14.22
4.05
4.58
5.11
5.81
6.08
6.52
6.90
7.28
7.62
7.96
8.10
8.23
8.45
8.45
8.45
8.45
5.45
6.16
6.88
7.82
8.18
8.77
9.29
9.79
10.25
10.71
10.90
11.08
11.37
11.37
11.37
11.37
6.80
7.69
8.58
9.76
10.20
10.95
11.59
12.21
12.79
13.36
13.60
13.82
14.19
14.19
14.19
14.19
72
TC
3.99
4.52
5.05
5.75
6.02
6.46
6.84
7.22
7.56
7.90
8.04
8.17
8.39
8.39
8.39
8.39
5.37
6.08
6.79
7.75
8.09
8.69
9.20
9.72
10.18
10.64
10.82
10.99
11.30
11.30
11.30
11.30
6.70
7.59
8.48
9.67
10.10
10.85
11.49
12.13
12.70
13.28
13.50
13.72
14.10
14.10
14.10
14.10
75
TC
3.82
4.34
4.87
5.56
5.81
6.22
6.63
7.04
7.39
7.73
7.87
7.98
8.16
8.20
8.22
8.25
5.14
5.85
6.56
7.48
7.82
8.37
8.93
9.47
9.94
10.40
10.59
10.73
10.98
11.03
11.06
11.11
6.50
7.40
8.31
9.47
9.90
10.60
11.30
11.99
12.58
13.16
13.40
13.59
13.90
13.96
14.00
14.06
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
56
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 26: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity of
Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
LMN159HVT
15,600
LMN249HVT
25,600
°F DB
°F WB
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
61
TC
8.03
9.05
10.06
11.42
10.03
12.77
13.51
14.25
14.90
15.56
15.83
16.08
16.51
16.51
16.51
16.51
11.11
12.52
13.93
15.81
16.51
17.69
18.70
19.72
20.63
21.55
21.91
22.26
22.86
22.86
22.86
22.86
13.17
14.84
16.51
18.74
19.57
20.96
22.17
23.37
24.45
25.53
25.97
26.39
27.09
27.09
27.09
27.09
64
TC
7.91
8.93
9.95
11.31
11.81
12.66
13.40
14.13
14.79
15.45
15.71
15.97
16.39
16.39
16.39
16.39
10.96
12.37
13.77
15.65
16.36
17.53
18.55
19.56
20.48
21.39
21.76
22.11
22.70
22.70
22.70
22.70
12.99
14.66
16.33
18.56
19.39
20.77
21.98
23.19
24.27
25.35
25.79
26.21
26.90
26.90
26.90
26.90
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
7.84
8.86
9.87
11.23
11.73
12.58
13.32
14.06
14.71
15.37
15.64
15.89
16.32
16.32
16.32
16.32
10.85
12.26
13.67
15.55
16.25
17.43
18.44
19.46
20.37
21.29
21.65
22.01
22.59
22.59
22.59
22.59
12.87
14.54
16.20
18.42
19.27
20.65
21.85
23.07
24.15
25.23
25.67
26.08
26.78
26.78
26.78
26.78
7.80
8.82
9.83
11.19
11.70
12.55
13.28
14.02
14.67
15.34
15.60
15.86
16.28
16.28
16.28
16.28
10.80
12.21
13.61
15.49
16.20
17.37
18.39
19.41
20.32
21.24
21.60
21.95
22.53
22.53
22.53
22.53
12.80
14.47
16.14
18.37
19.20
20.59
21.80
23.00
24.08
25.16
25.60
26.02
26.71
26.71
26.71
26.71
72
TC
7.69
8.71
9.72
11.08
11.59
12.43
13.17
13.91
14.56
15.22
15.49
15.74
16.17
16.17
16.17
16.17
10.64
12.06
13.46
15.34
16.04
17.22
18.24
19.25
20.17
21.08
21.44
21.80
22.38
22.38
22.38
22.38
12.61
14.29
15.96
18.18
19.01
20.40
21.61
22.82
23.90
24.98
25.41
25.83
26.53
26.53
26.53
26.53
75
TC
7.35
8.37
9.38
10.71
11.19
11.98
12.77
13.57
14.23
14.88
15.15
15.36
15.71
15.78
15.83
15.89
10.18
11.58
12.99
14.84
15.49
16.59
17.69
18.79
19.70
20.61
20.98
21.27
21.76
21.85
21.91
22.02
12.06
13.73
15.40
17.59
18.37
19.66
20.96
22.26
23.34
24.42
24.86
25.20
25.79
25.90
25.97
26.08
Standard Wall-Mounted
LSN180HSV5
21,600
Outdoor Air Temp.
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
57
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 63: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
• Measurement taken 2.6′ below the bottom of the unit and at a
distance of 3.3′ from face of unit.
• Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full
load normal operating condition.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as
construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in
which the equipment is installed.
• Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±1.
• Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745.
Table 27: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
3.3 ft.
Model No.
2.6 ft.
Microphone
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
High Fan Speed
Medium Fan
Speed
Low Fan Speed
LMN079HVT
35
31
26
LSN090HSV5
36
32
27
LSN120HSV5
38
34
29
LMN159HVT
42
38
32
LSN180HSV5
44
38
34
LMN249HVT
46
41
36
Figure 64:LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, and LSN120HSV5 Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
LMN079HVT
58
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
LSN090HSV5
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
LSN120HSV5
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
Figure 65:LMN159HVT, LSN180HSV5, and LMN249HVT Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
LMN159HVT
LSN180HSV5
LMN249HVT
Standard Wall-Mounted
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
59
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 66:LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, LMN159HVT Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Figure 67:LSN180HSV5 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
60
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution
Figure 68:LMN249HVT Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Standard Wall-Mounted
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
61
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Refrigerant Flow Diagram
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Figure 69:Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Gas pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Cooling
Heating
M
Liquid pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Table 28: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit
Refrigerant Pipe Sizes.
Model No.
Vapor (inch)
Table 29: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit
Refrigerant Pipe Connections.
Liquid (inch)
LMN079HVT
LSN090HSV5
LSN120HSV5
LMN249HVT
Ø1/4
Ø1/2
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
Evaporator Middle Temperature Thermistor
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
Water Level Sensor (Optional)
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Vapor (inch)
Liquid (inch)
Ø3/8
Ø1/4
LSN180HSV5
Ø5/8
Ø3/8
LMN249HVT
Ø1/2
Ø1/4
LSN090HSV5
Ø3/8
Table 30: Multi F LSNxxxHSV5 Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit
Thermistor Details.
62
Model No.
LMN079HVT
LMN159HVT
LSN180HSV5
Thermistor for
Indoor Air Temperature
Thermistor for Evaporator
Outlet Temperature
Cross Flow Fan
Thermistor for
Evaporator Inlet Temperature
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Heat Exchanger
PCB Connector
CN-TH1
CN-TH2
LSN120HSV5
LMN159HVT
Table 31: Multi F LMNxxxHVT Standard Wall-Mounted Indoor Unit
Thermistor Details.
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
PCB Connector
CN-TH1
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-TH2
Water Level Sensor (Optional)
CN-TH3
CN-TH3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 70:Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, LSN180HSV5 Indoor Units Wiring Diagram.
Standard Wall-Mounted
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
63
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 71: Multi F Standard Wall-Mounted LMN079HVT, LMN159HVT, LMN249HVT Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram.
64
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials
Factory Supplied Parts
Table 32: Parts Table.
Part
Quantity
Installation Plate
One (1)
Image
7,000 ~ 15,000 Btu/h Indoor Units 18,000 and 24,000 Btu/h Indoor Units
Five (5)
Type “B” Screws
(M4 x 12L)
Two (2)
Wireless
Controller with Holder
AKB74955602
One (1)
Factory Supplied Materials
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
Standard Wall-Mounted
Type “A” Screws
• Flaring tool set
• Spanner (Half union)
• Thermometer
WARNING
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes.
Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Note:
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect
installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
65
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Selecting the Best Location
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Figure 72:Minimum Clearance Requirements.
•
•
•
•
•
•
>4 inches
Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked.
Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily.
Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration.
Ensure there is sufficient space from the ceiling and floor.
Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space.
Locate the indoor unit where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit or branch
distribution unit.
Recommended height
•
•
•
•
≥5 inches
>4 inches
>6-1/2 feet from floor
Don’ts
Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used.
Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored.
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators.
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and / or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed.
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an
unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure:
Figure 73:Installation Plate—
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees).
Side View.
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
Installation Plate
Mounting the Installation Plate
The mounting wall should be strong and solid enough to protect the unit from
vibration.
• Mount the installation plate on the wall using the Type “A” screws. If mounting
the unit on concrete, consider using anchor bolts.
• Always mount the installation plate horizontally. Measure the wall and mark the
centerline using thread and a level.
Figure 74:Installation Plate for LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5,
LSN120HSV5, and LMN159HVT Units.
17-3/8
6-7/8
Ø2-9/16
5
Place a level on raised tab
18-1/8 inches
Ø2-9/16
5-3/16
Type "A" Screws
Unit Outline
3-11/16
8-1/2
Right rear piping
17-3/8
Frame
Hooks
Figure 75:Installation Plate for LSN180HSV5 and LMN249HVT Units.
Place a level on raised tab
Unit Outline
Left rear piping
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Do’s
Ø2-3/4 inches
22-7/16 inches
Installation Plate
Left rear
piping
Measuring Tape
Ø2-3/4 inches
Right rear
piping
2-7/32 inches
2-23/32 inches
4-1/8 inches
Measuring Tape Hanger
8-5/32 inches
If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be
taken for the unit and all components.
66
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Preparing for Installation
Prepare the refrigerant piping and drain hose (indoor unit piping) for installation through the
wall: press on the top of the tubing clamp and slowly guide the piping / hose down (depending
on installation requirements, then to the left or right). Relock the tubing clamp after the piping /
hose are released.
Figure 76:Preparing for Installation.
Note:
Do not bend the piping / drain hose from side to side; it may damage the components.
Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame
Figure 77:Locking the Indoor Unit onto the Installation Plate.
Figure 78:Accessing the Back of the Indoor Unit.
Installation plate
Tubing Clamp
Figure 79:Removing the Frame Cover.
Figure 80:Exterior Back View of Indoor Unit.
Tubing Clamp
Right
Frame Cover
Figure 81:Piping Installed to the Left.
Connecting
pipe
Standard Wall-Mounted
1. Attach the three (3) hooks on the top of the indoor unit to the top edge of the installation plate. Verify the hooks are properly attached to the installation plate by gently
shaking the indoor unit from side to side.
2. Unlock the tubing clamp from the indoor unit frame. For easier access between the
bottom of the indoor unit and the wall, prop the clamp between the indoor unit frame
and installation plate.
3. Remove the screw covers at the bottom of the indoor unit, unscrew the two (2) screws,
remove the frame cover, remove the piping connection cover, and position the piping
for installation (down, back, left, or right).
Down
Back
Left
Figure 82:Piping Installed to the Right.
Tape
Tape
Connecting
pipe
Drain hose
Drain hose
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
67
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch
fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
Figure 83: Connecting Power Wiring / Communications Cable.
Note:
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly
tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the
normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Terminal block
Wired Remote Controller
Terminal (Optional)
Power wiring /
communications cable
Cable restraint
Connect Power Wiring and
Communications Cable
1. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor
unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through
the bottom of the indoor unit.
2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit
control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the
outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only)
wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit.
3. Secure power wiring/communications cable with cable restraint.
68
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
3 or S
GND
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
3
RD
3
GND
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
BL
2(L2)
RD
BR
1(L1)
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
GRN / YLW
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
BL
GND
Figure 85:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch
Distribution Unit Terminal Connections— LSN180HSV5 and
LMN249HVT.
BR
Figure 84:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch
Distribution Unit Terminal Connections—LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5,
LSN120HSV5 and LMN159HVT.
GRN / YLW
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
3 or S
GND
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Controller Options
Standard wall-mounted indoor units include a wireless controller (AKB74955602), but optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available.
Wireless Controller
Figure 86:AKB74955602 Wireless Controller.
Table 33: AKB74955602 Wireless Controller Functions.
Screen Display
Standard Wall-Mounted
*
*
*
RESET
Buttons
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
69
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Wired Controller Connections
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
To Wired Controller
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
To Outdoor Unit or Branch Distribution Unit
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
Wired Controller Placement
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort
levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location away
from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold air.
Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED display
can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature.
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
Hot or cold air from ducts
Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
Concealed pipes and chimneys
An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
70
| STD. WALL-MOUNTED
CN-REMO
3
BL
BR
GRN / YLW
CN-REMO
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
GND
RD
BL
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
BR
GRN / YLW
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
GND
Figure 88:Wired Controller Connection on Indoor Unit Terminal Block—
LSN180HSV5 and LMN249HVT Models.
RD
Figure 87:Wired Controller Connection on Indoor Unit Terminal Block—
LMN079HVT, LSN090HSV5, LSN120HSV5, and LMN159HVT Models.
To Wired Controller
Figure 89:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
TEMP
YES
Remote Controlle r
NO
TEMP
Rem
ot e
Cont
roller
NO
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
NO
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
STANDARD WALL-MOUNTED INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation
is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and
then position wiring / cable on applicable side.
Figure 91:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Top
Top
Back
Right
Side
Right
Side
2. Choose and mark the area of installation. Use the provided parts
and screw the wall plate into place. Install the controller wall plate
to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist
between the wall plate and the wall itself.
3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller
circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into
place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto
the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired
controller and the wall plate on all sides.
Figure 92:Attaching the Wall Plate.
Figure 93:Installing / Removing
the Controller.
Installing the Controller
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
Finalizing Indoor Unit Installation
Figure 90:Attach Bottom of Indoor Unit to Installation Plate.
1. Move the tubing clamp to its original position.
2. Ensure the three (3) hooks are properly attached to the installation plate by gently shaking the indoor unit from side to side.
3. Press the bottom left and right sides of the indoor unit against the
installation plate until the hooks click firmly into their slots.
4. Using two (2) Type “C” screws, secure the bottom of the indoor
unit to the installation plate.
Type 'C' screws
Figure 94:Removing the Filter Tabs.
5. Remove the two (2) tabs from the filter.
6. Replace the frame cover.
Filter
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
STD. WALL-MOUNTED
|
71
Standard Wall-Mounted
Wall
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to
release controller. Do not damage the controller components
when removing.
CEILING-CONCEALED
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
INDOOR UNIT DATA
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 73
“General Data / Specifications” on page 74
“Dimensions” on page 75
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 76
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 78
“External Static Pressure” on page 79
“Acoustic Data” on page 80
“Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 81
“Wiring Diagram” on page 83
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 84
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 85
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Mechanical Specifications and Features
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Indoor Unit
Figure 95: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Unit.
General
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Ceiling-Concealed
Duct (Low Static) units have a sound rating no higher than 36 dB(A)
as tested per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745, and are designed for
low-static pressure up to 0.20″WG.
Coil
Refrigerant System
System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration
circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding
charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare,
and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must
be field insulated.
Electrical
Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power
with voltage variances of ±10%.
Casing
The case has a low profile design with a maximum height of 7.5
inches designed to mount fully concealed above a finished ceiling in
as little as 8 inches vertical space. Casing is manufactured of galvanized steel plate, and provided with hanger brackets designed to
support the weight on four corners. Unit has a front horizontal supply
air discharge outlet, and one rear horizontal return air inlet; unit is
also field-convertible for a rear bottom return.
Fan Assembly and Control
The units have at least two direct-drive, Sirocco fans made of
high strength ABS HT-700 polymeric resin that are statically and
dynamically balanced. The fans are mounted on a common brushless digitally controlled (BLDC) motor with permanently lubricated
and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on
vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using
a microprocessor-based direct digital control algorithm. The indoor
fan has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and
Features
•
•
•
•
Inverter (Variable speed fan)
External mounted drain pump
Control lock function
Auto operation
•
•
•
•
Air Filter
Return air is filtered with a factory-supplied, removable, washable
filter accessible from the rear of the indoor unit.
Microprocessor Control
The unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate
with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory residing on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided
by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor
control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which
point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate
mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto
restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications
cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor
unit.
Controls
The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished
through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable.
Condensate Lift/Pump
The indoor unit is provided with an externally mounted, factory
installed and wired condensate lift/pump capable of providing a minimum 27.5 inch lift from the bottom surface of the unit. Drain pump
has a safety switch to shut off the indoor unit if the condensate rises
too high in the drain pan.
Auto restart operation
Dehumidification function
Two thermistor control
External static pressure control
• Self-diagnostics function
• Group control
• Wired thermostat included
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
73
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has two rows of
coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided
with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Each of the
settings can be field-adjusted from the factory setting (RPM / ESP).
The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference
between the controller set-point and space temperature.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
General Data / Specifications
Table 34: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Low-Static Ducted Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
1
LDN097HV4
LDN127HV4
LMDN186HV
9,000
12,000
18,000
10,400
13,800
20,800
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Operating Range
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
57-77
59-81
Fan
Type
Sirocco
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
Motor/Drive
Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L)
Factory Set External Static Pressure (in. wg)
Max. External Static Pressure (in. wg)
19 x 1
5 x 1, 19 x 1
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
318 / 247 / 194
353 / 300 / 247
530 / 441 / 353
0.10
0.20
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
R410A
Refrigerant Control
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz
EEV
208-230, 1, 60
3
Rated Amps (A)
0.40
Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L)
0.80
30 / 26 / 23
4
Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
31 / 28 / 27
27-9/16 x 7-15/32 x 27-9/16
35-7/16 x 7-15/32 x 27-9/16
39
51
Net Unit Weight (lbs.)
Shipping Weight (lbs.)
46
Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)
60
57
4 x 18
5
Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number
36 / 34 / 31
(2 x 11 x 14) x 1
(2 x 11 x 18) x 1
Piping
Liquid (in.)
1/4
Vapor (in.)
3/8
Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.)
1-1/4, 1
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in
accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and
indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
74
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
1/2
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
4
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Dimensions
Figure 96:LDN097HV4, LDN127HV4, and LMDN186HV Dimensions.
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
75
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 35: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LDN097HV4
9,000
LDN127HV4
12,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
8.82
8.82
8.81
8.80
8.80
8.79
8.78
8.78
8.77
8.76
8.76
8.75
8.54
8.33
8.12
7.91
7.68
7.50
7.31
7.12
6.94
6.82
6.79
11.76
11.75
11.75
11.74
11.73
11.72
11.71
11.70
11.69
11.68
11.67
11.66
11.38
11.10
10.83
10.55
10.25
10.00
9.75
9.50
9.25
9.10
9.05
7.55
7.61
7.67
7.73
7.79
7.84
7.90
7.96
8.02
8.08
8.14
8.19
8.06
7.92
7.78
7.63
7.55
7.35
7.15
6.90
6.69
6.65
6.63
9.94
10.02
10.09
10.17
10.25
10.33
10.40
10.48
10.56
10.63
10.71
10.79
10.61
10.43
10.24
10.04
9.94
9.67
9.41
9.09
8.81
8.75
8.73
73 / 61
TC
SHC
9.37
9.36
9.36
9.35
9.34
9.33
9.33
9.32
9.31
9.31
9.30
9.29
9.08
8.87
8.66
8.45
8.22
8.03
7.84
7.66
7.47
7.36
7.32
12.49
12.48
12.48
12.47
12.46
12.45
12.44
12.43
12.42
12.41
12.40
12.39
12.11
11.82
11.54
11.26
10.96
10.71
10.46
10.21
9.96
9.81
9.76
7.98
8.04
8.10
8.16
8.22
8.29
8.35
8.41
8.47
8.53
8.59
8.66
8.52
8.39
8.25
8.10
8.03
7.83
7.63
7.38
7.17
7.13
7.11
10.50
10.58
10.66
10.75
10.83
10.91
10.99
11.07
11.15
11.23
11.31
11.40
11.22
11.05
10.86
10.67
10.57
10.31
10.04
9.72
9.44
9.39
9.37
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
9.92
9.91
9.90
9.90
9.89
9.88
9.87
9.87
9.86
9.85
9.84
9.84
9.62
9.41
9.20
8.99
8.75
8.57
8.38
8.19
8.01
7.89
7.86
13.22
13.21
13.20
13.19
13.18
13.17
13.16
13.15
13.14
13.13
13.12
13.11
12.83
12.55
12.26
11.98
11.67
11.42
11.17
10.92
10.67
10.52
10.48
7.72
7.78
7.84
7.90
7.96
8.02
8.08
8.14
8.20
8.26
8.32
8.38
8.26
8.14
8.02
7.89
7.83
7.64
7.45
7.22
7.03
7.00
6.98
10.17
10.25
10.33
10.40
10.48
10.56
10.64
10.72
10.80
10.88
10.96
11.03
10.88
10.72
10.55
10.38
10.30
10.06
9.81
9.51
9.26
9.21
9.19
10.31
10.31
10.30
10.29
10.28
10.27
10.27
10.26
10.25
10.24
10.24
10.23
10.01
9.80
9.59
9.37
9.00
8.88
8.77
8.58
8.39
8.28
8.24
13.75
13.74
13.73
13.72
13.71
13.70
13.69
13.68
13.67
13.66
13.65
13.64
13.35
13.07
12.78
12.50
12.00
11.84
11.69
11.44
11.19
11.04
10.99
7.89
7.95
8.01
8.07
8.13
8.19
8.25
8.31
8.38
8.44
8.50
8.56
8.44
8.33
8.20
8.08
7.90
7.78
7.66
7.43
7.24
7.21
7.19
10.38
10.46
10.54
10.62
10.70
10.79
10.87
10.95
11.03
11.11
11.19
11.27
11.12
10.96
10.80
10.63
10.40
10.24
10.08
9.78
9.53
9.49
9.47
86 / 72
TC
SHC
11.01
11.01
11.00
10.99
10.98
10.97
10.96
10.96
10.95
10.94
10.93
10.92
10.71
10.49
10.28
10.06
9.83
9.64
9.45
9.26
9.08
8.96
8.93
14.69
14.67
14.66
14.65
14.64
14.63
14.62
14.61
14.60
14.59
14.57
14.56
14.27
13.99
13.70
13.42
13.10
12.85
12.60
12.35
12.10
11.95
11.90
7.95
8.01
8.08
8.14
8.20
8.26
8.32
8.38
8.45
8.51
8.57
8.63
8.53
8.42
8.30
8.19
8.14
7.97
7.79
7.57
7.39
7.37
7.36
10.47
10.55
10.63
10.71
10.79
10.88
10.96
11.04
11.12
11.20
11.28
11.36
11.22
11.08
10.93
10.78
10.72
10.49
10.26
9.97
9.73
9.70
9.69
90 / 75
TC
SHC
11.56
11.55
11.54
11.54
11.53
11.52
11.51
11.50
11.49
11.48
11.47
11.47
11.25
11.03
10.82
10.60
10.36
10.17
9.99
9.80
9.61
9.50
9.46
15.42
15.40
15.39
15.38
15.37
15.36
15.35
15.33
15.32
15.31
15.30
15.29
15.00
14.71
14.42
14.13
13.81
13.56
13.31
13.07
12.82
12.67
12.62
8.10
8.17
8.23
8.29
8.36
8.42
8.48
8.54
8.61
8.67
8.73
8.79
8.69
8.59
8.48
8.37
8.34
8.16
7.99
7.77
7.60
7.58
7.57
10.67
10.75
10.83
10.92
11.00
11.08
11.16
11.25
11.33
11.41
11.49
11.58
11.45
11.31
11.17
11.02
10.97
10.75
10.52
10.24
10.00
9.98
9.97
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
76
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 36: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table (continued).
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
17.65
17.63
17.62
17.60
17.59
17.58
17.56
17.55
17.54
17.52
17.51
17.50
17.08
16.66
16.24
15.82
15.37
14.99
14.62
14.24
13.87
13.65
13.57
13.09
13.20
13.30
13.40
13.50
13.60
13.71
13.81
13.91
14.01
14.11
14.21
13.98
13.74
13.49
13.23
13.09
12.74
12.39
11.97
11.61
11.53
11.50
73 / 61
TC
SHC
18.74
18.73
18.71
18.70
18.68
18.67
18.66
18.64
18.63
18.61
18.60
18.58
18.16
17.74
17.32
16.90
16.44
16.06
15.69
15.32
14.94
14.72
14.64
13.83
13.94
14.05
14.16
14.26
14.37
14.48
14.58
14.69
14.80
14.90
15.01
14.78
14.55
14.30
14.06
13.93
13.58
13.23
12.80
12.44
12.36
12.34
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
19.84
19.82
19.81
19.79
19.78
19.76
19.75
19.73
19.72
19.70
19.69
19.67
19.24
18.82
18.40
17.97
17.51
17.13
16.76
16.39
16.01
15.79
15.71
13.39
13.50
13.60
13.71
13.81
13.91
14.02
14.12
14.23
14.33
14.43
14.53
14.33
14.12
13.90
13.68
13.57
13.25
12.93
12.53
12.19
12.13
12.11
20.63
20.61
20.60
20.58
20.57
20.55
20.53
20.52
20.50
20.49
20.47
20.46
20.03
19.60
19.17
18.75
18.00
17.77
17.53
17.16
16.79
16.56
16.49
13.67
13.78
13.89
13.99
14.10
14.21
14.31
14.42
14.52
14.63
14.74
14.84
14.64
14.44
14.23
14.01
13.70
13.49
13.28
12.88
12.55
12.50
12.48
TC
86 / 72
SHC
22.03
22.01
22.00
21.98
21.96
21.94
21.93
21.91
21.89
21.88
21.86
21.84
21.41
20.98
20.55
20.12
19.65
19.28
18.90
18.53
18.15
17.93
17.85
13.79
13.90
14.01
14.11
14.22
14.33
14.43
14.54
14.65
14.75
14.86
14.97
14.78
14.60
14.40
14.20
14.12
13.82
13.52
13.13
12.82
12.77
12.76
TC
90 / 75
SHC
23.12
23.11
23.09
23.07
23.05
23.04
23.02
23.00
22.98
22.97
22.95
22.93
22.50
22.06
21.63
21.20
20.72
20.35
19.97
19.60
19.22
19.00
18.92
14.05
14.16
14.27
14.38
14.49
14.60
14.71
14.82
14.92
15.03
15.14
15.25
15.08
14.90
14.71
14.52
14.46
14.16
13.86
13.48
13.18
13.14
13.13
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
LMDN186HV
18,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
77
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 37: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity of
Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
Outdoor Air Temp.
°F DB
°F WB
61
TC
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
0
5
10
17
20
25
30
35
40
45
47
50
55
60
63
68
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
-0.4
4.5
9
15
19
23
28
32
36
41
43
46
51
56
59
64
5.35
6.03
6.71
7.61
7.95
8.52
9.01
9.50
9.94
10.37
10.55
10.72
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
7.10
8.00
8.90
10.10
10.55
11.30
11.95
12.60
13.18
13.77
14.00
14.23
14.60
14.60
14.60
14.60
10.70
12.06
13.41
15.22
15.90
17.03
18.01
18.99
19.87
20.75
21.10
21.44
22.01
22.01
22.01
22.01
LDN097HV4
9,000
LDN127HV4
12,000
LMDN186HV
18,000
64
TC
5.28
5.95
6.63
7.54
7.88
8.44
8.93
9.42
9.86
10.30
10.48
10.64
10.93
10.93
10.93
10.93
7.00
7.90
8.80
10.00
10.45
11.20
11.85
12.50
13.08
13.67
13.90
14.13
14.50
14.50
14.50
14.50
10.55
11.91
13.26
15.07
15.75
16.88
17.86
18.84
19.72
20.60
20.95
21.29
21.86
21.86
21.86
21.86
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
5.23
5.90
6.58
7.49
7.83
8.39
8.88
9.37
9.81
10.25
10.43
10.59
10.88
10.88
10.88
10.88
6.93
7.83
8.73
9.93
10.38
11.13
11.78
12.43
13.02
13.60
13.83
14.06
14.43
14.43
14.43
14.43
10.45
11.81
13.16
14.97
15.65
16.78
17.76
18.74
19.62
20.50
20.85
21.19
21.75
21.75
21.75
21.75
5.20
5.88
6.56
7.46
7.80
8.37
8.86
9.34
9.78
10.22
10.40
10.57
10.85
10.85
10.85
10.85
6.90
7.80
8.70
9.90
10.35
11.10
11.75
12.40
12.98
13.57
13.80
14.03
14.40
14.40
14.40
14.40
10.40
11.76
13.11
14.92
15.60
16.73
17.71
18.69
19.57
20.45
20.80
21.14
21.70
21.70
21.70
21.70
72
TC
75
TC
5.12
5.80
6.48
7.39
7.72
8.29
8.78
9.27
9.71
10.15
10.32
10.49
10.78
10.78
10.78
10.78
6.80
7.70
8.60
9.80
10.25
11.00
11.65
12.30
12.88
13.47
13.70
13.93
14.30
14.30
14.30
14.30
10.25
11.61
12.96
14.77
15.45
16.58
17.56
18.54
19.42
20.30
20.65
20.99
21.55
21.55
21.55
21.55
4.90
5.58
6.26
7.14
7.46
7.99
8.52
9.04
9.48
9.92
10.10
10.24
10.48
10.52
10.55
10.60
6.50
7.40
8.30
9.48
9.90
10.60
11.30
12.00
12.58
13.17
13.40
13.59
13.90
13.96
14.00
14.06
9.80
11.15
12.51
14.29
14.92
15.98
17.03
18.09
18.97
19.85
20.20
20.48
20.95
21.04
21.10
21.20
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
78
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
External Static Pressure
Table 38: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) External Static Pressure Setting Values Table.
Static Pressure (in. wg)
Model No. / Nominal Capacity
of Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
LDN097HV4
9,000
LMDN186HV
18,000
0.04
0.08
Airflow Rate / CFM
0.12
0.16
0.20
Setting Value
High
318
98
103
108
116
123
130
Mid
247
82
88
94
102
110
118
Low
194
69
76
83
91
99
109
High
353
95
99
104
109
116
124
Mid
300
86
91
96
101
108
116
Low
247
78
82
87
93
100
108
High
530
123
125
129
134
141
145
Mid
441
109
112
117
123
129
136
Low
353
95
99
104
109
116
124
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
LDN127HV4
12,000
0.0
• To get the desired air flow and external static pressure combination, use the setting value from the table. Using a setting value other
than that listed in the table will not provide the desired combination.
• Table data is based at 230V. Air flow rate varies according to voltage fluctuation.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
79
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
• Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full
load normal operating condition.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as
construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in
which the equipment is installed.
• Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3.
• Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745.
4.9 ft.
Ceiling
6.6 ft.
Table 39:Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
Model No.
Microphone
LDN097HV4
LMDN096HV
High Fan Speed
30
LMDN186HV
36
34
31
LDN127HV4
LMDN126HV
LMDN186HV
70
NC-45
NC-45
40
40
NC-40
NC-40
NC-35
NC-35
30
30
NC-30
NC-30
20
20
10
10
NC-25
NC-25
Approximate
Approximate
Hearing
Hearing
Threshold
Threshold
63
63
NC-60
NC-60
125
125
250
250
500
500
1000
1000
2000
2000
4000
4000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
8000
8000
NC-55
NC-55
50
50
NC-50
NC-50
NC-45
NC-45
40
40
NC-40
NC-40
NC-35
NC-35
30
30
NC-30
NC-30
20
20
NC-20
NC-20
NC-15
NC-15
NC-65
NC-65
60
60
10
10
NC-25
NC-25
Approximate
Approximate
Hearing
Hearing
Threshold
Threshold
63
63
125
125
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa)
NC-50
NC-50
Octave
Band
Sound
Pressure
Level (0dB
= 20μPa)
Octave
Band
Sound
Pressure
Level
(0dB = 20μPa)
70
70
50
50
23
27
70
70
NC-55
NC-55
26
28
80
NC-60
NC-60
Low Fan Speed
31
80
80
NC-65
NC-65
Medium Fan
Speed
LDN127HV4
80
80
60
60
80
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
LDN097HV4
Figure 98: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
Octave
Band
Sound
Pressure
Level
(0dB = 20μPa)
Octave
Band
Sound
Pressure
Level (0dB
= 20μPa)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 97: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location.
NC-60
250
250
500 1000 2000 4000 8000
500
1000 2000 4000 8000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
Approximat e
Hearing
Threshold
NC-20
NC-20
NC-15
NC-15
NC-65
60
10
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
63
NC-20
NC-15
125
250
500
1000
2000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
4000
8000
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Refrigerant Flow Diagrams
Figure 99: LDN097HV4 Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
: Cooling
: Heating
Evaporator
Outlet
Temperature
Thermistor
Sirocco Fan
M
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Evaporator
Inlet
Temperature
Thermistor
Indoor Unit
Indoor Air
Temperature
Thermistor
Table 40: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN097HV4 Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters.
Model No.
Vapor (inch)
Liquid (inch)
LDN097HV4
Ø3/8
Ø1/4
Table 41: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN097HV4 Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
PCB Connector
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
CN-ROOM
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/IN
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/OUT
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
81
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Refrigerant Flow Diagrams
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Figure 100:LDN127HV4 and LMDN186HV Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
: Cooling
: Heating
Evaporator
Outlet
Temperature
Thermistor
Evaporator
Inlet
Temperature
Thermistor
Sirocco Fan
M
M
Indoor Unit
Indoor Air
Temperature
Thermistor
Table 42: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN127HV4 and LMDN186HV Indoor Unit Refrigerant
Pipe Connection Port Diameters.
Model No.
Vapor (inch)
LDN127HV4
Ø3/8
LMDN186HV
Ø1/2
Liquid (inch)
Ø1/4
Table 43: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN127HV4 and LMDN186HV Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
82
PCB Connector
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
CN-ROOM
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/IN
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/OUT
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 101:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static) LDN097HV4, LDN127HV4, and LMDN186HV Indoor Units Wiring Diagram.
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
83
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials
Factory Supplied Parts
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Table 44: Parts Table.
Part
Quantity
Drain Hose
Metal Clamp
Insulation for
Fittings
1
Image
Part
Quantity
One (1)
Zip Ties
Four (4)
Two (2)
Washers for
Hanging
Brackets
Eight (8)
One (1) Set
Simple
Controller
with Mode
Selection
(AKB72955816)1
One (1)
For Vapor Piping For Liquid Piping
Image
Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (low static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW.
Factory Supplied Materials
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
Flaring tool set
•
•
•
•
Torque wrenches
Hexagonal wrench
Gas-leak detector
Thermometer
WARNING
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes.
Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Note:
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect
installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
84
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Selecting the Best Location
Do’s
•
•
•
•
•
•
Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked.
Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily.
Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration.
Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor unit.
Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space.
Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can be easily
connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit.
Figure 102:General Installation Guidelines.
Top view
23-5/8
Don’ts
•
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and / or will not operate
as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed.
Control box
Access Opening
( 23-5/8 x 23-5/8 )
23-5/8
(Unit : Inch)
Side view
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable
amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used.
•
Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases
are generated, vented into, or stored.
•
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators.
•
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
(Unit : Inch)
H = ≤25/32
• "H" dimension is necessary to ensure a slope is included for
condensate drainage.
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
In some installation applications, areas(floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an unheated garage
or storeroom). To countermeasure:
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature
by three degrees).
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
Figure 103:Service / Access Panel Dimensions.
A (Min)
B (Min)
Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels
If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean,
lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum:
• Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32
inches thick).
• Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches
thick).
• Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air
tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the conditioned
space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation.
Ceiling
Service Space
A
If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being
corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all
components.
B
Table 45:General Access Panel Dimensions.
Dimensions (in.)
Model / Capacity (Btu/h)
A
B
LDN097HV4 / 9,000
LDN127HV4 / 12,000
LMDN186HV / 18,000
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
31-1/2
31-1/2
39-3/8
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
85
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Duct (Low Static) Indoor Units can be installed in two ways:
Table 47:Indoor Unit Bolt Locations.
E
Figure 104:Air inlet from the back of the indoor Figure 105:Air inlet from the bottom of the
indoor unit.
unit.
Air Filter
G
Back Panel
Air Filter
I
Air Outlet
Back Panel
J
A
B
F
Air Outlet
Indoor Unit s
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
D C
H
Drainage hole
Table 46:Indoor Unit Bolt Location Dimensions.
Model / Capacity (Btu/h)
LDN097HV4 / 9,000
LDN127HV4 / 12,000
LMDN186HV / 18,000
A
B
28-27/32
30-13/32
36-23/32
38-9/32
C
D
24-23/32
27-9/16
Dimensions (in.)
E
F
1-13/32
7-15/32
G
25/32
H
25-31/32
33-27/32
I
J
27-9/16
6-3/32
35-7/16
Preparing the Installation Area and Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame
1. Select and mark the area for the suspension or console bolts
(use embedded inserts or anchor bolts in new buildings, and
hole-in-anchors in older buildings).
2. Drill the holes.
3. Add the set-anchor and the plate washer to the bolts (bolts
should be at least 13/32 inches in diameter), and then insert the
bolts into the installation area.
Figure 106:Preparing the Installation Area.
4. Add the plate washer, spring washer, and nut to secure the bolts
into the installation area.
5. Position the indoor unit installation plates onto the bolts. Secure
using nuts, plate washers, and spring washers. Adjust for level as
necessary.
Figure 107:Console Bolt Options.
Figure 108:Hanging the Indoor Unit.
M10 Nut
(Field
X 4 supplied)
X4
M10 washer
X4
M10 SP. washer
M10 Nut
Install a canvas duct to the air outlet and air inlet so that vibration from the indoor unit does not carry
to the duct or ceiling. Also, add insulation to the interior of the duct, and apply anti-vibration to the
suspension bolts.
• Unit must be installed correctly.
• Tighten the nuts and bolts to prevent the unit from falling.
86
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
X4
M10 washer
M10 SP. washer
(Field
X 4 supplied)
X4
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Installing the Drain System
Figure 109:Drain Connection.
• Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow,
slope should not be straight up and down.
• Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the field-supplied drain
piping.
• Drain piping specifications:
- Indoor Unit Drain Connection: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter.
- Field-Supplied Drain Piping: Polyvinyl chloride piping with 1-inch inside diameter and pipe
fittings.
Insulation
(Field Supplied)
Drain Pipe
(Field Supplied)
Indoor Unit
Close Any Gaps
Drain Hole
Ducted (low static) indoor units have two options for condensate drainage: Using the factory-installed drain pump, or using a gravity drain.
• Maximum drain lift is 27-9/16 inches, therefore, the drain piping should be placed below
the maximum lift height.
• Field-installed drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to
prevent reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down.
Figure 110:Indoor Unit Using Drain Pump.
1/50~1/100
Drain Pipe
≤27-9/16 inch
Drain Pump
Pump location may be different on the indoor unit.
Using the Gravity Drain
Field-drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent
reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down.
Figure 111:Indoor Unit Using Gravity Drain.
Drain hose
Angle ≥ 1/50~1/100
Approx 3/32~5/32 inches
Checking the Drain Pump
Figure 112:Checking the Drain Pump.
The unit uses a drain pump to remove condensate. The pump must be tested before the
system operates.
• Connect the flexible drain hose to the field-installed drain piping; leave it as is until the
test is complete.
• Pour water into the flexible drain hose and check for leaks.
• After power wiring installation is complete, operate the drain pump to see if it sounds
and functions properly.
• After the test is complete, connect the flexible drain hose to the indoor unit drain port.
Checking the Drainage System
Flexible drain hose
(accessory)
Pour Water
Field-Installed
Drain Piping
Drain
Port
Indoor Unit
Drain Pan
Figure 113:Checking the Drainage System.
Glue the Joint
Drain Hose Connection
Use the clip (accessory)
Drain Pump
Pump location may be different
on the indoor unit.
1. Remove the air filter.
2. Check the drainage.
• Spray water on the evaporator.
• Verify that water flows through the indoor unit drain
hose without leaking.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
87
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Using the Drain Pump
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping
Figure 114:Insulating the Piping.
Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns
if touched.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
Liquid Piping
Connection
Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be
properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit
piping connections). Any exposed piping may generate condensate
or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F.
Duct (low static) indoor units have been tested under and meet the
requirements of the “KS Conditions.” If the indoor unit is installed
and is operated at an extended period in a highly humid environment
(dew point temperature >73°F), however, condensate will form. To
prevent this phenomenon, install adiabatic glass wool insulation with
a thickness or 13/32 to 13/16 inches thick. Also, install glass wool
insulation on all indoor unit that are located in the ceiling plenum.
Insulation for Refrigerant Piping
(Field-Supplied)
Clamp for Insulation
(Field-Supplied)
Insulation
(Field-Supplied)
Vapor Piping Connection
Insulation for Refrigerant Piping
(Field-Supplied) Insulation for Field-Installed Piping
(Field-Supplied)
Drain Piping Insulation
Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick.
Overlap the Insulation at the
Connection
Ensure no gaps are present.
88
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable
1(L) 2(N)
GND
3 or S GND
3
RD
GRN /
YLW
BL
2. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit
control board. Verify that the color and terminal numbers from
the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems
only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the indoor
unit.
Figure 115:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit
(Multi F MAX systems only) Power Wiring / Communications Cable
Connections.
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
BR
1. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only)
through the side of the indoor unit. Pass the wiring through the
designated access holes to prevent damage. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave a space
between the power wiring and communications cable outside of
the indoor unit.
3. Secure the power wiring / communications cable with the cable
restraint.
4. Screw the steel clamp to the inside of the control panel.
• Place the wiring / cables in the clamp and tighten the plastic clamp to an open surface of the control panel.
• When clamping, do not apply force to the wiring connections.
• Neatly arrange the wiring, do not catch the wiring in the electric box cover, and ensure the cover firmly closes.
5. Fill in any gaps around the wiring access hole with sealant to prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit.
Using a Conduit
1. Remove the rubber stopper on the indoor unit. Pass the power
wiring / communications cable through the conduit, the conduit
mounting plate, and to the control panel of the indoor unit.
2. Connect the power wiring / communications cable to the indoor
unit terminal block.
3. Screw the conduit mounting plate to the indoor unit.
Figure 116:Exterior View of Conduit Installation.
Lock nut
Conduit
Conduit
mounting
plate
4. Tighten the conduit and the conduit mounting plate together.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
89
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
Note:
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Controller Options
Wired Controller
Figure 117:AKB729558161 Wired Controller.
• Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions.
Operation Display
Panel
• Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature.
Temperature Control
Button
Fan Speed Button
• Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed.
On/Off Button
FA N
SPEED
TEMP
Mode Selection
Check Button
OPER
MODE
• On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off.
• Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto,
Dry (Dehumidification), or Fan.
Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first cycled on.
1
Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (low static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW.
Wired Controller Connections
Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different
ways.
1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1;
sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the
indoor unit PCB.
Figure 118:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable.
Verify the connectors are properly inserted.
C/BOX Cable (Plug type)
FAN
SPEED
TEMP
OPER
MODE
Extension cable
2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit
terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG,
two-core, one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and
building codes require plenum cable usage).
To Indoor Unit
CN-REMO
Terminal
Figure 119:Wired Controller Connections on the Indoor Unit
Terminal Block.
Outd
Branch D
(Mu
CN-REMO
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Comm.
RD
BK
12V
Power Ground
1(L) 2(N)
GND
GRN /
YLW
90
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
3
RD
YL
BL
When using field-supplied controller cable, make sure to connect
the yellow to yellow (communications wire), red to red (12V power
wire), and black to black (ground wire) terminals from the remote
controller to the indoor unit terminal blocks.
BR
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Ceiling-concealed duct (low static) indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller
(AKB72955816)1, but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. The
wireless handheld controller (Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional
accessory with use of the wired controller.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Figure 120:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation
is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and
then position wiring / cable on applicable side.
Top
Top
Back
Right
Side
Right
Side
2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall
plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller
wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no
gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself.
Figure 121:Attaching the Wall Plate. Figure 122: Installing / Removing
the Controller.
Installing the Controller
Wall
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to
release controller. Do not damage the controller components
when removing.
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
Figure 123:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
Wired Controller Placement
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort
levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location
away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to
cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its
LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can
detect an average room temperature.
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
Hot or cold air from ducts
Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
Concealed pipes and chimneys
An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
TEMP
YES
Remote Controlle r
NO
TEMP
Rem
ot e
Cont
roller
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
NO
NO
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
91
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller
circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into
place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto
the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired
controller and the wall plate on all sides.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
External Static Pressure Control
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
To provide a required air flow rate that accounts for the external static pressure change, follow the steps
below.
Figure 125:Controller External
Static Pressure Setting Display.
1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection
buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “06” by pressing the mode selection button.
Figure 124:Select Code and
2. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the
Set Value.
desired setting value.
Setting Values
01 : V-H
02 : F-H
03 : V-L
04 : F-L
Code
Set Value
TEM P
OPER
MODE
FAN
SPEED
3. Press the on / off button to save the established settings.
TEM P
OPER
MODE
4. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold
the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three
(3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode
will automatically deactivate.
Table 48:Static Pressure Setting Table.
Pressure Selection
Function
Zone State
External Static Pressure Standard Value
Variable
High
01
V-H
02
F-H
Fixed
High
03
V-L
Variable
Low
04
F-L
Fixed
Low
• Select the position after verifying duct work and the external static pressure of the indoor unit.
• Factory set to pressure selection F-H.
92
FAN
SPEED
| DUCT (LOW STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (LOW STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Assigning Air Flow
To assign an air flow for each fan speed, follow the steps below.
1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection
buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “03” by pressing the mode selection button.
Figure 126:Controller External
Static Pressure Setting Display.
2. Use the fan speed button to select the desired fan speed. ( Lo→Med→Hi will display on the LED).
3. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the desired external static
pressure setting value (thereby assigning the respective airflow). External static pressure value range:
0~255; the value will display near the lower right corner of the LED.
4. Press the on / off button to save the established settings.
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (Low Static)
5. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold
the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three
(3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode
will automatically deactivate.
FAN
SPEED
TEMP
OPER
MODE
• A certified technician must set the external static pressure value(s). If the external static pressure is set incorrectly, the system may
malfunction.
• Do not alter the external static pressure value that corresponds to each air flow level.
• External static pressure value can vary depending on the indoor unit.
• If by pressing the fan speed button during external static pressure setup, the fan speed is raised to the next level, the air flow value of
the previous fan speed will be maintained (external static pressure setting value is saved).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (LOW STATIC)
|
93
CEILING-CONCEALED
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
INDOOR UNIT DATA
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 95
“General Data / Specifications” on page 96
“Dimensions” on page 97
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 98
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 99
“External Static Pressure” on page 100
“Acoustic Data” on page 100
“Refrigerant Flow Diagrams” on page 101
“Wiring Diagram” on page 102
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 103
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 104
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Mechanical Specifications and Features
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
Indoor Unit
Figure 127: Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit.
General
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided
with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Ceiling-Concealed Duct
(High Static) units are designed for high-speed air volume against an
external static pressure up to 0.78″WG for the 24,000 Btu/h model;
up to 0.55″WG for the 36,000 Btu/h model.
Coil
Air Filter
Refrigerant System
System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration
circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding
charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare,
and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must
be field insulated.
Electrical
Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power
with voltage variances of ±10%.
Casing
The casing is designed to mount fully concealed above a finished
ceiling. Casing is manufactured of galvanized steel plate. Cold surfaces of the unit are covered internally with a coated polystyrene insulating material, and covered externally with sheet insulation made
of ethylene propylene diene monomer (M-Class) (EPDM). External
insulation is plenum rated and conforms to ASTM Standard D-1418.
Hanger brackets are included on the casing to support the weight on
four corners. Unit has a front horizontal supply air discharge outlet,
and one dedicated rear horizontal return air inlet.
Fan Assembly and Control
The units have two direct-drive, Sirocco fans made of high strength
ABS GP-2200 polymeric resin that are statically and dynamically
balanced. The fans are mounted on a common brushless digitally
controlled (BLDC) motor with permanently lubricated and sealed
ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digital control algorithm. The indoor fan has
Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for Cooling mode; and has Low,
Features
•
•
•
•
Inverter (Variable speed fan)
Internal drain pump
Control lock function
Auto operation
Med, High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Each of the settings
can be field-adjusted from the factory setting (RPM / ESP). The Auto
setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the
controller setpoint and space temperature.
•
•
•
•
Return air is filtered with a factory-supplied, removable, washable
filter accessible from the rear of the indoor unit. High efficiency air
filter options include a return filter box and an LG / Dynamic supplied
air cleaner (both sold separately).
Microprocessor Control
The unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate
with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor. The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value provided
by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor
control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at which
point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate
mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto
restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications
cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor
unit.
Controls
The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished
through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable.
Condensate Lift/Pump
The indoor unit is provided with a factory installed and wired internal
condensate lift/pump capable of providing a minimum 27.5 inch lift
from the bottom surface of the unit. Drain pump has a safety switch
to shut off the indoor unit if the condensate rises too high in the drain
pan.
Auto restart operation
Dehumidifying function
Two thermistor control
External static pressure control
• Group control
• Self-diagnostics function
• Wired thermostat included
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
95
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has two rows of
coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided
with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
General Data / Specifications
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Table 49: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed High-Static Ducted Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
LMHN240HV
LMHN360HV
24,000
36,000
27,000
40,000
57-77
57-77
59-81
59-81
Type
Sirocco
Sirocco
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
Motor/Drive
Factory Set Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L)
Factory Set External Static Pressure (in. wg)
Maximum External Static Pressure (in. wg)
154 x 1
350 x 1
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
688 / 618 / 530
1,130 / 953 / 706
0.39
0.39
0.78
0.55
R410A
R410A
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Operating Range
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
Fan
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
Refrigerant Control
EEV
EEV
208-230, 1, 60
208-230, 1, 60
0.9
1.4
37 / 36 / 35
44 / 42 / 40
46-17/32 x 11-23/32 x 17-23/32
46-17/32 x 11-23/32 x 17-23/32
80
91
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz3
Rated Amps (A)
Sound Pressure Level (Standard Mode) ±3 dB(A) H/M/L)
Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
4
Net Unit Weight (lbs.)
Shipping Weight (lbs.)
91
101
4 x 18
4 x 18
(2 x 12 x 21) x 1
(3 x 12 x 21) x 1
Liquid (in.)
1/4
3/8
Vapor (in.)
1/2
5/8
1-1/4, 1
1-1/4, 1
Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)5
Heat Exchanger
(Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number
Piping
Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.)
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in
accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and
indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
96
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
4
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Dimensions
Figure 128: LMHN240HV and LMHN360HV Dimensions.
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
97
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 50:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LMHN240HV
24,000
LMHN360HV
36,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
23.53
23.51
23.49
23.47
23.46
23.44
23.42
23.40
23.38
23.37
23.35
23.33
22.77
22.21
21.65
21.09
20.49
19.99
19.49
18.99
18.49
18.19
18.10
35.29
35.26
35.24
35.21
35.18
35.16
35.13
35.10
35.08
35.05
35.02
34.99
34.15
33.31
32.48
31.64
30.74
29.99
29.24
28.49
27.74
27.29
27.14
17.66
17.80
17.94
18.08
18.21
18.35
18.49
18.62
18.76
18.90
19.03
19.17
18.85
18.53
18.19
17.85
17.66
17.19
16.71
16.14
15.66
15.55
15.51
25.46
25.66
25.86
26.06
26.25
26.45
26.65
26.85
27.04
27.24
27.44
27.63
27.18
26.71
26.23
25.73
25.46
24.78
24.10
23.27
22.58
22.41
22.36
73 / 61
TC
SHC
24.99
24.97
24.95
24.93
24.91
24.89
24.87
24.85
24.84
24.82
24.80
24.78
24.21
23.65
23.09
22.53
21.92
21.42
20.92
20.42
19.92
19.62
19.52
37.48
37.45
37.43
37.40
37.37
37.34
37.31
37.28
37.25
37.23
37.20
37.17
36.32
35.47
34.63
33.79
32.88
32.13
31.38
30.63
29.88
29.43
29.28
18.66
18.80
18.95
19.09
19.24
19.38
19.53
19.67
19.82
19.96
20.10
20.25
19.94
19.63
19.30
18.96
18.79
18.31
17.84
17.26
16.78
16.68
16.64
26.90
27.11
27.32
27.53
27.73
27.94
28.15
28.36
28.57
28.78
28.98
29.19
28.75
28.29
27.82
27.33
27.09
26.40
25.72
24.89
24.19
24.04
23.99
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
26.45
26.43
26.41
26.39
26.37
26.35
26.33
26.31
26.29
26.27
26.25
26.23
25.66
25.09
24.53
23.96
23.35
22.85
22.35
21.85
21.35
21.05
20.95
39.67
39.64
39.61
39.58
39.55
39.52
39.49
39.46
39.43
39.40
39.37
39.34
38.49
37.64
36.79
35.94
35.02
34.27
33.52
32.77
32.02
31.57
31.43
18.07
18.21
18.35
18.49
18.63
18.77
18.91
19.05
19.19
19.33
19.47
19.61
19.33
19.05
18.75
18.45
18.31
17.87
17.43
16.90
16.45
16.36
16.34
26.04
26.25
26.45
26.65
26.85
27.06
27.26
27.46
27.66
27.86
28.06
28.26
27.87
27.46
27.03
26.59
26.39
25.76
25.13
24.36
23.71
23.59
23.55
27.50
27.48
27.46
27.44
27.42
27.40
27.38
27.36
27.34
27.32
27.29
27.27
26.70
26.13
25.57
25.00
24.00
23.69
23.38
22.88
22.38
22.08
21.98
41.26
41.23
41.19
41.16
41.13
41.10
41.07
41.04
41.01
40.97
40.94
40.91
40.05
39.20
38.35
37.50
36.00
35.53
35.07
34.32
33.57
33.12
32.97
18.45
18.59
18.73
18.88
19.02
19.16
19.31
19.45
19.59
19.73
19.88
20.02
19.75
19.48
19.19
18.90
18.48
18.19
17.91
17.37
16.93
16.86
16.83
26.59
26.80
27.01
27.21
27.42
27.63
27.83
28.04
28.24
28.45
28.65
28.86
28.47
28.08
27.66
27.24
26.64
26.23
25.82
25.04
24.41
24.30
24.26
TC
86 / 72
SHC
29.37
29.35
29.33
29.30
29.28
29.26
29.24
29.21
29.19
29.17
29.15
29.13
28.55
27.97
27.40
26.83
26.20
25.70
25.20
24.70
24.20
23.90
23.81
44.06
44.02
43.99
43.96
43.92
43.89
43.86
43.82
43.79
43.76
43.72
43.69
42.82
41.96
41.10
40.25
39.30
38.55
37.80
37.05
36.31
35.86
35.71
18.60
18.75
18.89
19.04
19.18
19.33
19.47
19.61
19.76
19.90
20.04
20.19
19.94
19.69
19.43
19.15
19.05
18.64
18.23
17.71
17.29
17.23
17.21
26.81
27.02
27.23
27.44
27.65
27.86
28.07
28.27
28.48
28.69
28.90
29.10
28.75
28.39
28.00
27.61
27.46
26.87
26.28
25.54
24.93
24.84
24.81
TC
90 / 75
SHC
30.83
30.81
30.79
30.76
30.74
30.72
30.69
30.67
30.64
30.62
30.60
30.57
29.99
29.42
28.84
28.27
27.63
27.13
26.63
26.13
25.63
25.33
25.23
46.25
46.21
46.18
46.14
46.11
46.07
46.04
46.00
45.97
45.93
45.90
45.86
44.99
44.12
43.26
42.40
41.44
40.69
39.94
39.20
38.45
38.00
37.85
18.95
19.10
19.25
19.40
19.54
19.69
19.84
19.99
20.13
20.28
20.42
20.57
20.34
20.10
19.84
19.59
19.50
19.10
18.70
18.19
17.77
17.72
17.71
27.32
27.54
27.75
27.96
28.17
28.39
28.60
28.81
29.02
29.23
29.44
29.65
29.32
28.97
28.61
28.23
28.11
27.53
26.96
26.22
25.62
25.55
25.53
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
98
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 51:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity
of Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
LMHN360HV
36,000
61
64
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
72
75
°F DB
°F WB
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
0
-0.4
13.89
13.70
13.57
13.50
13.30
12.72
5
4.5
15.65
15.46
15.33
15.26
15.07
14.48
10
9
17.41
17.22
17.09
17.02
16.83
16.24
17
15
19.76
19.57
19.43
19.37
19.17
18.55
20
19
20.64
20.45
20.32
20.25
20.05
19.37
25
23
22.11
21.91
21.78
21.72
21.52
20.74
30
28
23.38
23.18
23.05
22.99
22.79
22.11
35
32
24.65
24.46
24.33
24.26
24.07
23.48
40
36
25.79
25.60
25.47
25.40
25.21
24.62
45
41
26.93
26.74
26.61
26.54
26.35
25.76
47
43
27.39
27.20
27.07
27.00
26.80
26.22
50
46
27.83
27.64
27.51
27.44
27.24
26.58
55
51
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.20
60
56
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.32
63
59
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.39
68
64
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.51
0
-0.4
20.58
20.29
20.10
20.00
19.71
18.84
5
4.5
23.19
22.90
22.71
22.61
22.32
21.45
10
9
25.80
25.51
25.31
25.22
24.93
24.06
17
15
29.28
28.99
28.79
28.70
28.41
27.48
20
19
30.58
30.29
30.10
30.00
29.71
28.70
25
23
32.75
32.46
32.27
32.17
31.88
30.72
30
28
34.64
34.35
34.15
34.06
33.77
32.75
35
32
36.52
36.23
36.04
35.94
35.65
34.78
40
36
38.21
37.92
37.73
37.63
37.34
36.47
45
41
39.90
39.61
39.42
39.32
39.03
38.16
47
43
40.58
40.29
40.10
40.00
39.71
38.84
50
46
41.23
40.94
40.75
40.65
40.36
39.38
55
51
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.29
60
56
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.47
63
59
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.58
68
64
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.76
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
LMHN240HV
24,000
Outdoor Air Temp.
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
99
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
External Static Pressure / Acoustic Data
Table 52:Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) External Static Pressure Setting Values Table.
Static Pressure (in. wg)
0.1
0.16
0.23
0.31
Model No. / Nominal Capacity Airflow Rate / CFM
of Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
LMHN360HV
36,000
688
618
530
1,130
953
706
0.47
0.55
0.62
0.70
0.78
140
137
134
160
152
141
147
144
141
-
154
151
148
-
160
157
154
-
Setting Value (in. wg)
82
78
73
-
92
89
86
124
112
97
103
99
96
133
122
107
113
110
107
140
130
117
122
119
116
148
137
125
131
128
125
154
145
133
• To get the desired air flow and external static pressure combination, use the setting value from the table. Using a setting value other
than that listed in the table will not provide the desired combination.
• Table data is based at 230V. Air flow rate varies according to voltage fluctuation.
Figure 129: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location.
DISCHARGE
• Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full
load normal operating condition.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as
construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in
which the equipment is installed.
• Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3.
• Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745.
SUCTION
DUCT
6.6 ft.
3.3 ft.
4.9 ft.
DUCT
Table 53:Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
Model No.
Figure 130: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
LMHN240HV
80
70
70
NC-65
60
NC-60
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
Approximate
Hearing
Threshold
10
100
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
4000
8000
High Fan Speed
Medium Fan
Speed
Low Fan Speed
LMHN240HV
37
36
35
LMHN360HV
44
42
40
NC-65
60
NC-60
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
Approximate
Hearing
Threshold
NC-20
NC-15
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
LMHN360HV
80
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa)
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (0dB = 20μPa)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
LMHN240HV
24,000
0.39
10
63
NC-20
NC-15
125
250
500
1000
2000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
4000
8000
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Refrigerant Flow Diagrams
Figure 131: LMHN240HV and LMHN360HV Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Gas pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Heat exchanger
Heating
Cooling
Thermistor for
evaporator outlet
temperature
Sirocco Fan
M
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
Thermistor for
suction air
temperature
Thermistor for
evaporator inlet
temperature
Liquid pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Table 54: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters.
Model No.
Vapor (inch)
Liquid (inch)
LMHN240HV
Ø1/2
Ø1/4
LMHN360HV
Ø5/8
Ø3/8
Table 55: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
PCB Connector
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
CN-ROOM
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/IN
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/OUT
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
101
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagrams
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 132: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) LMHN240HV Indoor Units Wiring Diagram.
Figure 133: Multi F Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static) LMHN360HV Indoor Units Wiring Diagram.
ROOM
PIPE IN
THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
102
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
PIPE OUT
THERMISTOR
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials / Installation
Factory Supplied Parts
Table 56: Parts Table.
Part
Quantity
Drain Hose
Metal Clamp
1
Part
Quantity
One (1)
Zip Ties
Four (4)
Two (2)
Insulation for
Fittings
One (1) Set
Simple
Controller
with Mode
Selection
(AKB72955816)1
One (1)
Eight (8)
Image
For Vapor Piping For Liquid Piping
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
Washers for
Hanging
Brackets
Image
Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (high static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW.
Factory Supplied Materials
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
WARNING
•
•
•
•
•
Flaring tool set
Torque wrenches
Hexagonal wrench
Gas-leak detector
Thermometer
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and
all local or other applicable codes. Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Note:
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections,
and the order of installation. Incorrect installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
Selecting the Best Location
Do’s
•
•
•
•
•
•
Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked.
Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily.
Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration.
Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor unit.
Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space.
Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit.
Don’ts
•
•
•
•
Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used.
Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored.
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators.
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and / or will not operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions listed.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
103
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be
taken for the unit and all components.
In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an
unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure:
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees).
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels
If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum:
• Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick).
• Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick).
• Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the
conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation.
Figure 134: Access Panel and General Service Space Required
Dimensions.
Figure 135: Indoor Unit Bolt Locations.
A
B
C
E
23-5/8 inches x 23-5/8 inches
23-5/8
inches
D
G
I
F
23-5/8
inches
39-3/8
inches
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
H
H = ≥25/32 inches
Drain hole
Table 57:Indoor Unit Bolt Location Dimensions.
Model / Capacity
(Btu/h)
LMHN240HV / 24,000
LMHN360HV / 36,000
104
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
Dimensions (inches)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
48-17/32
46-17/32
13-31/32
1-25/32
17-23/32
1-7/32
3-5/8
32-19/32
7-11/32
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Preparing the Installation Area and Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame
1. Select and mark the area for the suspension or console bolts (use
embedded inserts or anchor bolts in new buildings, and hole-inanchors in older buildings).
2. Drill the holes.
3. Add the set-anchor and the plate washer to the bolts (bolts
should be at least 13/32 inches in diameter), and then insert the
bolts into the installation area.
Figure 136: Preparing the Installation Area.
4. Add the plate washer, spring washer, and nut to secure the bolts
into the installation area.
5. Position the indoor unit installation plates onto the bolts. Secure
using nuts, plate washers, and spring washers. Adjust for level as
necessary.
Figure 137: Suspension Bolt Options.
Figure 138: Hanging the Indoor Unit.
X4
M10 washer
(FieldX 4 supplied)
X4
M10 washer
X4
M10 SP. washer
X4
M10 Nut
X4
M10 SP. washer
(Fieldsupplied)
Install a canvas duct to the air outlet and air inlet so that vibration from the indoor unit does not
carry to the duct or ceiling. Also, add insulation to the interior of the duct, and apply anti-vibration
to the suspension bolts.
• Unit must be installed correctly. Tighten the nuts and bolts to prevent the unit from falling and
causing severe injury or death.
Installing the Drain System
Figure 139:Indoor Unit Drain Piping.
• Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope
should not be straight up and down.
•
Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the field-supplied drain piping.
• Drain piping specifications:
- Indoor Unit Drain Connection: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter.
- Field-Supplied Drain Piping: Polyvinyl chloride piping with 1-inch inside diameter and pipe fittings.
Indoor unit
Drain Port
Maintenance
Figure 140:Drain Piping Installation Dimensions.
Maximum
27-9/16 inches
Hanger distance
Maximum
11-13/16 inches
Hanger Bracket
3.3~49.2 feet 1/50~1/100 slope
Metal
clamp
Flexible drain hose
Drain Pipe Support
1/50~1/100mm
Maximum
27-9/16 inches
Insulation
Do not apply force or twist the drain hose: it may leak.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
105
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
M10 Nut
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Checking the Drain Pump
Figure 141:Checking the drain pump.
The unit uses a drain pump to remove condensate. The pump must be tested before the
system operates.
• Connect (field supplied) flexible drain hose to the field-installed drain piping; leave it as
is until the test is complete.
• Pour water into the flexible drain hose and check for leaks.
• After power wiring installation is complete, operate the drain pump to see if it sounds
and functions properly.
• After the test is complete, connect the flexible drain hose to the indoor unit drain port.
Flexible drain hose
(accessory)
Pour Water
Field-Installed
Drain Piping
Drain
Port
Drain Pump
Glue the Joint
Drain Hose Connection
Use the clip (accessory)
Drain Pan
Checking the Drainage System
Figure 142:Checking the Drainage System.
1. Remove the air filter.
2. Check the drainage.
• Spray water on the evaporator.
• Verify that water flows through the indoor unit drain hose without leaking.
Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping
Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched.
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit piping
connections). Any exposed piping may generate condensate or will
cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant
piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F.
Figure 143: Insulating the Piping.
Liquid Piping
Connection
Insulation for Refrigerant Piping
(Field-Supplied)
Drain Piping Insulation
Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick.
Clamp for Insulation
(Field-Supplied)
Insulation
(Field-Supplied)
Vapor Piping Connection
Insulation for Refrigerant Piping
(Field-Supplied) Insulation for Field-Installed Piping
(Field-Supplied)
Overlap the Insulation at the
Connection
Ensure no gaps are present.
106
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
Note:
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable
Figure 144:Accessing the Indoor Unit Terminal Block.
1. To access the terminal block, first unscrew the cover from the control box.
Terminal Block
Control Box
2. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch
distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the sides of the indoor unit
and control box. Pass the wiring through the designated access holes to prevent
damage. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave
a space between the power wiring and communications cable outside of the
indoor unit.
A
3. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board.
Verify that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch
Control Box Cover
distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal
numbers on the indoor unit.
Lock nut
Figure 145:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F
Conduit
MAX systems only) Power Wiring / Communications
Cable Conduit
4. Secure the power wiring / communications cable with the cable
mounting
Connections.
restraint.
plate
3
GND
RD
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
3 or S3
1(L1) 2(L2)
GND
BL
1(L1 ) 2 (L2)
GRN /
YLW
6. Fill in any gaps around the wiring access holes with sealant to
prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit.
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
BR
5. Screw the steel clamp to the inside of the control panel.
• Place the wiring / cables in the clamp and tighten the plastic
clamp to an open surface of the control panel.
• When clamping, do not apply force to the wiring connections.
• Neatly arrange the wiring, do not catch the wiring in the electric
box cover, and ensure the cover firmly closes.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Power Wiring Connections
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
107
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
MULTI F
A
MAX
MULTI F
Terminal Block
Control Box
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Using a Conduit
1. Remove the rubber stopper on the indoor unit. Pass the power wiring / communications cable through the conduit, the conduit mounting plate, and to / through the
control panel of the indoor unit.
2. Connect the power wiring / communications cable to the indoor unit terminal block.
3. Screw the conduit mounting plate to the indoor unit.
4. Tighten the conduit and the conduit mounting plate together.
Control Box Cover
Figure
146:Exterior View of Conduit Installation.
Lock nut
Conduit
Conduit
mounting
plate
If the distance between the outdoor unit and indoor unit is greater than 131 feet, connect
the power wiring and communications cable separately (i.e., a conduit cannot be used).
Controller Options
Ceiling-concealed duct (high static) indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller (AKB72955816)1, but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available.
The wireless handheld controller (Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional accessory with use of the wired controller.
•
•
•
•
•
3
Power Wiring Connections
Wired Controller
Figure 147:AKB729558161 Wired Controller.
Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions.
Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature.
Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed.
On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off.
Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto,
Dry (Dehumidification), or Fan.
Operation Display
Panel
Temperature Control
Button
Fan Speed Button
On/Off Button
FA N
SPEED
TEMP
Mode Selection
Check Button
OPER
MODE
Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first
cycled on.
1
Simple Mode Controllers for the ceiling-concealed duct (high static) indoor units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW.
Wired Controller Connections
Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different
ways.
1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1;
sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the
indoor unit PCB.
Figure 148:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable.
Verify the connectors are properly inserted.
C/BOX Cable (Plug type)
OPER
MODE
2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit
terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG,
two-core, one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and
building codes require plenum cable usage).
To Indoor Unit
CN-REMO
Terminal
FAN
SPEED
TEMP
Extension cable
Figure 149:Wired Controller Connections on the Indoor Unit Terminal
Block.
CN-REMO
RD BK
1(L1 ) 2 (L2)
3
RD
108
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
GND
GRN /
YLW
YL
12V
Comm. Power Ground
BL
When using field-supplied controller cable, make sure to connect the yellow to
yellow (communications wire), red to red (12V power wire), and black to black
(ground wire) terminals from the remote controller to the indoor unit terminal
blocks.
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
BR
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
1(L1) 2(L2)
Outdoor Unit Terminal
Branch Distribution Unit Te
(Multi F MAX System
3o
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Wired Controller Placement
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort
levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location
away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to
cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its
LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can
detect an average room temperature.
NO
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
Hot or cold air from ducts
Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
Concealed pipes and chimneys
An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation
is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and
then position wiring / cable on applicable side.
TEMP
YES
Remote Controlle r
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
TEMP
Rem
ot e
Cont
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
roller
NO
NO
Figure 151:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Top
Top
Back
Right
Side
Right
Side
2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall
plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller
wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no
gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself.
3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller
circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into
place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto
the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired
controller and the wall plate on all sides.
Figure 152:Attaching the Wall Plate.
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to
release controller. Do not damage the controller components
when removing.
Figure 153:Installing / Removing
the Controller.
Installing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
109
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
•
•
•
•
•
Figure 150:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
External Static Pressure Control
To provide a required air flow rate that accounts for the external static pressure change, follow the steps
below.
Figure 155:Controller External
Static Pressure Setting Display.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection
buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “06” by pressing the mode selection button.
2. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the
desired setting value.
Figure 154:Select Code and
Set Value.
Setting Values
Code
01 : V-H
02 : F-H
03 : V-L
04 : F-L
3. Press the on / off button to save the established settings.
TEM P
OPER
MODE
FAN
SPEED
TEM P
OPER
MODE
4. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold
the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three
(3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode
will automatically deactivate.
Table 64:Static Pressure Setting Table.
Pressure Selection
Function
Zone State
External Static Pressure Standard Value
Variable
High
01
V-H
02
F-H
Fixed
High
03
V-L
Variable
Low
04
F-L
Fixed
Low
• Select the position after verifying duct work and the external static pressure of the indoor unit.
• Factory set to pressure selection F-H.
110
| DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
FAN
SPEED
Set Value
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
DUCT (HIGH STATIC) INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Assigning Air Flow
To assign an air flow for each fan speed, follow the steps below.
1. To access system installer setting mode, press and hold the temperature increase and mode selection
buttons simultaneously for approximately three (3) seconds. Choose setting code value “03” by pressing the mode selection button.
Figure 156:Controller External
Static Pressure Setting Display.
2. Use the fan speed button to select the desired fan speed. ( Lo→Med→Hi will display on the LED).
3. Use the temperature increase and decrease buttons to select the desired external static pressure setting value (thereby assigning the respective airflow). External static pressure value range: 0~255; the
value will display near the lower right corner of the LED.
Ceiling-Concealed Duct (High Static)
FAN
SPEED
4. Press the on / off button to save the established settings.
TEMP
5. To deactivate system installer setting mode after the settings have been established, press and hold
the temperature increase and mode selection check buttons simultaneously for approximately three
(3) seconds. If a button is not pressed for more than 25 seconds, the system installer setting mode
will automatically deactivate.
OPER
MODE
• A certified technician must set the external static pressure value(s). If the external static pressure is set incorrectly, the system may
malfunction.
• Do not alter the external static pressure value that corresponds to each air flow level.
• External static pressure value can vary depending on the indoor unit.
• If by pressing the fan speed button during external static pressure setup, the fan speed is raised to the next level, the air flow value of
the previous fan speed will be maintained (external static pressure setting value is saved).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DUCT (HIGH STATIC)
|
111
FOUR-WAY
CEILING-CASSETTE
INDOOR UNIT DATA
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 113
“General Data / Specifications” on page 114
“Dimensions” on page 115
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 117
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 120
“Acoustic Data” on page 121
“Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution” on page 123
“Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 125
“Wiring Diagram” on page 126
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 127
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 128
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Mechanical Specifications and Features
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units
General
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Four-way ceilingcassette units have a sound rating no higher than 38 dB(A) as tested
per KSA0701 ISO Standard 3745.
Coil
Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has two rows of
coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is provided
with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
Refrigerant System
Electrical
Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power
with voltage variances of ±10%.
Casing
The case is constructed of a galvanized steel plate designed to recess
in the ceiling, and has a surface mounted concentric grille on the bottom of the unit. Unit has four supply air outlets and one return air inlet.
Ventilation Air
The case has a factory designated knockouts to connect a fieldsupplied, pressurized, and filtered outside air duct.
Fan Assembly and Control
All indoor units have a single, direct-drive turbo fan. Fans are manufactured of high-strength ABS HT-700 polymeric resin that is statically and dynamically balanced. The fan motor is brushless digitally
controlled (BLDC) with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is mounted on vibration-attenuating
rubber grommets. Fan speed is controlled using a microprocessorbased direct digital control algorithm that provides pre-programmed,
field-selectable fixed or auto fan speeds in the Heating and Cooling
modes.
The indoor fan has Low, Med, High, Power Cool and Auto settings
for Cooling mode; and has Low, Med, High, and Auto settings for
Heating mode. Auto setting adjusts the fan speed based on the difference between the controller setpoint and space temperature.
Air Filter
Return air is filtered with a factory-supplied, removable, washable
Features
•
•
•
•
•
Inverter (Variable speed fan)
Internal drain pump
Jet cool
Control lock function
Auto operation
•
•
•
•
Figure 157: Multi F Four-Way
Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit.
Architectural Grille
An architectural grille is sold as
a separate required accessory.
The four-way grille is off-white
acrylonitrile butadiene styrene
(ABS) polymeric resin with a
tapered trim edge.
Airflow Guide Vanes
The supply air outlet has four-directional slot diffusers, each equipped
with an independent oscillating motorized guide vane to change
airflow direction. A guide vane algorithm sequentially changes the
predominant discharge airflow direction in counterclockwise pattern,
or can be used to lock each guide vane independently in a fieldadjusted fixed position. The four vanes can be individually adjusted
from the wired remote controller to customize the airflow pattern for
the conditioned space. A setting in the cooling and heating modes can
cycle the vanes up and down for uniform / random air distribution.
Microprocessor Control
The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are
stored in non-volatile memory residing on the unit microprocessor. The
microprocessor controls space temperature through using the value
provided by the temperature sensor within the indoor unit. The microprocessor control will activate indoor unit operation when the indoor
room temperature falls below or rises above a setpoint temperature, at
which point, a signal is sent to the outdoor unit to begin the appropriate
mode. The microprocessor will also provide self-diagnostics and auto
restart functions. A field-supplied four-wire power / communications
cable must be installed to connect the indoor unit(s) to the outdoor
unit.
Controls
The indoor unit casing has a factory-standard, integral infrared
sensor designed to communicate with the supplied LG wireless
handheld remote controller. An optional wired controller is available
as an additional accessory. Communication between the indoor units
and the outdoor unit is accomplished through 18 AWG, four-core,
stranded and shielded power / communication cable.
Condensate Lift/Pump
The indoor unit is provided with a factory installed and wired internal
condensate lift/pump capable of providing a minimum 27.5 inch lift
from the bottom surface of the unit. Drain pump has a safety switch
to shut off the indoor unit if the condensate rises too high in the drain
pan.
Auto restart operation
24-Hour on/off timer
Two thermistor control
Required accessory grille (PT-QCHW0 or
PT-UQC) sold separately
• Group Control
• Plasma kit (PTPKQ0) sold separately
• Wireless LCD remote control included;
wired thermostat available (sold
separately)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
113
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration
circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding
charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare,
and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must
be field insulated.
filter accessible from the bottom
of the unit. A plasma filter is
also available as an optional
accessory.
FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
General Data / Specifications
Table 65:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
LMCN077HV
LCN097HV4
LCN127HV4
LMCN185HV
Grille (Sold Separately)
PT-QCHW0 /
PT-UQC
PT-QCHW0 /
PT-UQC
PT-QCHW0 /
PT-UQC
PT-QCHW0 /
PT-UQC
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)1
7,000
9,000
12,000
18,000
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
8,100
10,400
13,800
20,800
1
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Operating Range
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
57-77
59-81
Fan
Type
Turbo
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
Motor/Drive
Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L)
43 x 1
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
265 / 212 / 177
300 / 265 / 230
335 / 283 / 247
459 / 424 / 388
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
R410A
Refrigerant Control
EEV
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz3
208-230, 1, 60
Rated Amps (A)
0.25
Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L)
31 / 27 / 24
4
36 / 33 / 30
Body Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
38 / 35 / 32
22-7/16 x 8-7/16 x 22-7/16
Grille (Sold separately) Dimensions (WxHxD, in.)
22-7/16 x 10-3/32 x 22-7/16
27-9/16 x 7/8 x 27-9/16
Body Net Weight (lbs.)
31
34
Grille (Sold separately) Net Weight (lbs.)
7
Body Shipping Weight (lbs.)
34
Grille (Sold separately) Shipping Weight (lbs.)
Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)
38 / 37 / 34
37
11
42
9
9
11
4 x 18
5
Heat Exchanger (Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number
(2 x 8 x 18) x 1
(2 x 10 x 18) x 1
Piping
Liquid (in.)
1/4
Vapor (in.)
3/8
Drain O.D. / I.D. (in.)
1-1/4, 1
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor
units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
114
| CEILING-CASSET TE
1/2
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
4
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Dimensions
Figure 158:LMCN077HV, LCN097HV4, and LCN127HV4 Dimensions.
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
115
FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Dimensions
Supply Air Vane
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 159: LMCN185HV Dimensions.
Supply Air Vane
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Supply Air Vane
Return Air Grille
116
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 66:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LMCN077HV
7,000
73 / 61
TC
SHC
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
6.86
6.86
6.85
6.85
6.84
6.84
6.83
6.83
6.82
6.81
6.81
6.80
6.64
6.48
6.31
6.15
5.98
5.83
5.69
5.54
5.39
5.31
5.28
8.82
8.82
8.81
8.80
8.80
8.79
8.78
8.78
8.77
8.76
8.76
8.75
8.54
8.33
8.12
7.91
7.68
7.50
7.31
7.12
6.94
6.82
6.79
7.29
7.28
7.28
7.27
7.27
7.26
7.25
7.25
7.24
7.24
7.23
7.23
7.06
6.90
6.73
6.57
6.39
6.25
6.10
5.96
5.81
5.72
5.69
9.37
9.36
9.36
9.35
9.34
9.33
9.33
9.32
9.31
9.31
9.30
9.29
9.08
8.87
8.66
8.45
8.22
8.03
7.84
7.66
7.47
7.36
7.32
7.71
7.71
7.70
7.70
7.69
7.68
7.68
7.67
7.67
7.66
7.66
7.65
7.48
7.32
7.15
6.99
6.81
6.66
6.52
6.37
6.23
6.14
6.11
9.92
9.91
9.90
9.90
9.89
9.88
9.87
9.87
9.86
9.85
9.84
9.84
9.62
9.41
9.20
8.99
8.75
8.57
8.38
8.19
8.01
7.89
7.86
4.87
4.91
4.95
4.99
5.03
5.06
5.10
5.14
5.18
5.21
5.25
5.29
5.20
5.11
5.02
4.93
4.87
4.74
4.61
4.46
4.32
4.29
4.28
6.31
6.36
6.41
6.46
6.50
6.55
6.60
6.65
6.70
6.75
6.80
6.85
6.73
6.62
6.50
6.37
6.31
6.14
5.97
5.77
5.59
5.55
5.54
5.15
5.19
5.23
5.27
5.31
5.35
5.39
5.43
5.47
5.51
5.55
5.59
5.50
5.42
5.33
5.23
5.19
5.05
4.92
4.76
4.63
4.60
4.59
6.66
6.72
6.77
6.82
6.87
6.92
6.97
7.03
7.08
7.13
7.18
7.23
7.12
7.01
6.89
6.77
6.71
6.54
6.37
6.17
5.99
5.96
5.94
4.99
5.02
5.06
5.10
5.14
5.18
5.22
5.26
5.30
5.33
5.37
5.41
5.33
5.26
5.17
5.09
5.05
4.93
4.81
4.66
4.54
4.52
4.51
6.45
6.50
6.55
6.60
6.65
6.70
6.75
6.80
6.85
6.90
6.95
7.00
6.90
6.80
6.70
6.59
6.54
6.38
6.23
6.03
5.87
5.84
5.83
8.02
8.02
8.01
8.00
8.00
7.99
7.99
7.98
7.97
7.97
7.96
7.95
7.79
7.62
7.46
7.29
7.00
6.91
6.82
6.67
6.53
6.44
6.41
10.31
10.31
10.30
10.29
10.28
10.27
10.27
10.26
10.25
10.24
10.24
10.23
10.01
9.80
9.59
9.37
9.00
8.88
8.77
8.58
8.39
8.28
8.24
5.09
5.13
5.17
5.21
5.25
5.29
5.33
5.37
5.41
5.45
5.49
5.52
5.45
5.38
5.30
5.21
5.10
5.02
4.94
4.79
4.67
4.65
4.64
6.59
6.64
6.69
6.74
6.79
6.84
6.90
6.95
7.00
7.05
7.10
7.15
7.05
6.96
6.85
6.75
6.60
6.50
6.40
6.20
6.05
6.02
6.01
86 / 72
TC
SHC
8.57
8.56
8.55
8.55
8.54
8.53
8.53
8.52
8.51
8.51
8.50
8.49
8.33
8.16
7.99
7.83
7.64
7.50
7.35
7.21
7.06
6.97
6.94
11.01
11.01
11.00
10.99
10.98
10.97
10.96
10.96
10.95
10.94
10.93
10.92
10.71
10.49
10.28
10.06
9.83
9.64
9.45
9.26
9.08
8.96
8.93
5.13
5.17
5.21
5.25
5.29
5.33
5.37
5.41
5.45
5.49
5.53
5.57
5.50
5.43
5.36
5.29
5.26
5.14
5.03
4.89
4.77
4.76
4.75
6.64
6.70
6.75
6.80
6.85
6.90
6.95
7.00
7.06
7.11
7.16
7.21
7.12
7.03
6.94
6.84
6.80
6.66
6.51
6.33
6.18
6.15
6.15
90 / 75
TC
SHC
8.99
8.99
8.98
8.97
8.97
8.96
8.95
8.94
8.94
8.93
8.92
8.92
8.75
8.58
8.41
8.24
8.06
7.91
7.77
7.62
7.48
7.39
7.36
11.56
11.55
11.54
11.54
11.53
11.52
11.51
11.50
11.49
11.48
11.47
11.47
11.25
11.03
10.82
10.60
10.36
10.17
9.99
9.80
9.61
9.50
9.46
5.23
5.27
5.31
5.35
5.39
5.43
5.47
5.52
5.56
5.60
5.64
5.68
5.61
5.55
5.48
5.40
5.38
5.27
5.16
5.02
4.90
4.89
4.89
6.77
6.82
6.87
6.93
6.98
7.03
7.09
7.14
7.19
7.24
7.29
7.35
7.26
7.18
7.09
6.99
6.96
6.82
6.68
6.50
6.35
6.33
6.32
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
LCN097HV4
9,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
117
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 67:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LCN127HV4
12,000
LMCN185HV
18,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
11.76
11.75
11.75
11.74
11.73
11.72
11.71
11.70
11.69
11.68
11.67
11.66
11.38
11.10
10.83
10.55
10.25
10.00
9.75
9.50
9.25
9.10
9.05
17.65
17.63
17.62
17.60
17.59
17.58
17.56
17.55
17.54
17.52
17.51
17.50
17.08
16.66
16.24
15.82
15.37
14.99
14.62
14.24
13.87
13.65
13.57
8.51
8.57
8.64
8.71
8.77
8.84
8.90
8.97
9.03
9.10
9.17
9.23
9.08
8.92
8.76
8.60
8.51
8.28
8.05
7.77
7.54
7.49
7.47
12.33
12.43
12.52
12.62
12.71
12.81
12.90
13.00
13.10
13.19
13.29
13.38
13.16
12.93
12.70
12.46
12.33
12.00
11.67
11.27
10.93
10.85
10.83
73 / 61
TC
SHC
12.49
12.48
12.48
12.47
12.46
12.45
12.44
12.43
12.42
12.41
12.40
12.39
12.11
11.82
11.54
11.26
10.96
10.71
10.46
10.21
9.96
9.81
9.76
18.74
18.73
18.71
18.70
18.68
18.67
18.66
18.64
18.63
18.61
18.60
18.58
18.16
17.74
17.32
16.90
16.44
16.06
15.69
15.32
14.94
14.72
14.64
8.99
9.06
9.13
9.20
9.27
9.34
9.41
9.47
9.54
9.61
9.68
9.75
9.60
9.45
9.29
9.13
9.05
8.82
8.59
8.31
8.08
8.03
8.01
13.02
13.13
13.23
13.33
13.43
13.53
13.63
13.73
13.83
13.93
14.03
14.13
13.92
13.70
13.47
13.23
13.12
12.78
12.45
12.05
11.71
11.64
11.62
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
13.22
13.21
13.20
13.19
13.18
13.17
13.16
13.15
13.14
13.13
13.12
13.11
12.83
12.55
12.26
11.98
11.67
11.42
11.17
10.92
10.67
10.52
10.48
19.84
19.82
19.81
19.79
19.78
19.76
19.75
19.73
19.72
19.70
19.69
19.67
19.24
18.82
18.40
17.97
17.51
17.13
16.76
16.39
16.01
15.79
15.71
8.70
8.77
8.84
8.90
8.97
9.04
9.11
9.17
9.24
9.31
9.38
9.44
9.31
9.17
9.03
8.88
8.82
8.61
8.40
8.14
7.92
7.88
7.87
12.61
12.71
12.81
12.91
13.00
13.10
13.20
13.30
13.39
13.49
13.59
13.69
13.49
13.30
13.09
12.88
12.78
12.47
12.17
11.79
11.48
11.42
11.40
13.75
13.74
13.73
13.72
13.71
13.70
13.69
13.68
13.67
13.66
13.65
13.64
13.35
13.07
12.78
12.50
12.00
11.84
11.69
11.44
11.19
11.04
10.99
20.63
20.61
20.60
20.58
20.57
20.55
20.53
20.52
20.50
20.49
20.47
20.46
20.03
19.60
19.17
18.75
18.00
17.77
17.53
17.16
16.79
16.56
16.49
8.88
8.95
9.02
9.09
9.16
9.23
9.30
9.37
9.44
9.50
9.57
9.64
9.51
9.38
9.24
9.10
8.90
8.76
8.62
8.37
8.15
8.12
8.11
12.88
12.98
13.08
13.18
13.28
13.38
13.48
13.58
13.68
13.78
13.87
13.97
13.79
13.60
13.40
13.19
12.90
12.70
12.50
12.13
11.82
11.77
11.75
86 / 72
TC
SHC
14.69
14.67
14.66
14.65
14.64
14.63
14.62
14.61
14.60
14.59
14.57
14.56
14.27
13.99
13.70
13.42
13.10
12.85
12.60
12.35
12.10
11.95
11.90
22.03
22.01
22.00
21.98
21.96
21.94
21.93
21.91
21.89
21.88
21.86
21.84
21.41
20.98
20.55
20.12
19.65
19.28
18.90
18.53
18.15
17.93
17.85
8.96
9.03
9.10
9.17
9.24
9.31
9.38
9.45
9.52
9.58
9.65
9.72
9.60
9.48
9.36
9.22
9.18
8.98
8.78
8.53
8.33
8.30
8.29
12.98
13.09
13.19
13.29
13.39
13.49
13.59
13.69
13.79
13.89
13.99
14.09
13.92
13.75
13.56
13.37
13.30
13.01
12.73
12.36
12.07
12.03
12.01
90 / 75
TC
SHC
15.42
15.40
15.39
15.38
15.37
15.36
15.35
15.33
15.32
15.31
15.30
15.29
15.00
14.71
14.42
14.13
13.81
13.56
13.31
13.07
12.82
12.67
12.62
23.12
23.11
23.09
23.07
23.05
23.04
23.02
23.00
22.98
22.97
22.95
22.93
22.50
22.06
21.63
21.20
20.72
20.35
19.97
19.60
19.22
19.00
18.92
9.13
9.20
9.27
9.34
9.41
9.48
9.55
9.62
9.70
9.77
9.84
9.91
9.79
9.68
9.56
9.43
9.39
9.20
9.01
8.76
8.56
8.54
8.53
13.23
13.33
13.44
13.54
13.64
13.75
13.85
13.95
14.05
14.16
14.26
14.36
14.20
14.03
13.85
13.67
13.61
13.33
13.05
12.70
12.41
12.37
12.36
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
118
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Heating Capacity Table
Table 68:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity of
Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
LMCN077HV
7,000
64
TC
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
°F DB
°F WB
61
TC
0
-0.4
4.17
4.11
4.07
72
TC
75
TC
4.05
3.99
3.82
5
4.5
4.70
4.64
4.60
4.58
4.52
4.34
10
9
5.22
5.17
5.13
5.11
5.05
4.87
17
15
5.93
5.87
5.83
5.81
5.75
5.56
20
19
6.19
6.13
6.09
6.08
6.02
5.81
25
23
6.63
6.57
6.53
6.52
6.46
6.22
30
28
7.01
6.96
6.92
6.90
6.84
6.63
35
32
7.40
7.34
7.30
7.28
7.22
7.04
40
36
7.74
7.68
7.64
7.62
7.56
7.39
45
41
8.08
8.02
7.98
7.96
7.90
7.73
47
43
8.22
8.16
8.12
8.10
8.04
7.87
50
46
8.35
8.29
8.25
8.23
8.17
7.98
55
51
8.57
8.51
8.47
8.45
8.39
8.16
60
56
8.57
8.51
8.47
8.45
8.39
8.20
63
59
8.57
8.51
8.47
8.45
8.39
8.22
68
64
8.57
8.51
8.47
8.45
8.39
8.25
0
-0.4
5.35
5.28
5.23
5.20
5.12
4.90
5
4.5
6.03
5.95
5.90
5.88
5.80
5.58
10
9
6.71
6.63
6.58
6.56
6.48
6.26
17
15
7.61
7.54
7.49
7.46
7.39
7.14
20
19
7.95
7.88
7.83
7.80
7.72
7.46
25
23
8.52
8.44
8.39
8.37
8.29
7.99
30
28
9.01
8.93
8.88
8.86
8.78
8.52
35
32
9.50
9.42
9.37
9.34
9.27
9.04
40
36
9.94
9.86
9.81
9.78
9.71
9.48
45
41
10.37
10.30
10.25
10.22
10.15
9.92
47
43
10.55
10.48
10.43
10.40
10.32
10.10
50
46
10.72
10.64
10.59
10.57
10.49
10.24
55
51
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.48
60
56
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.52
63
59
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.55
68
64
11.00
10.93
10.88
10.85
10.78
10.60
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
LCN097HV4
9,000
Outdoor Air Temp.
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
119
FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Heating Capacity Table
Table 69:Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity of
Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
LCN127HV4
12,000
LMCN185HV
18,000
Outdoor Air Temp.
64
TC
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
°F DB
°F WB
61
TC
0
-0.4
7.10
7.00
6.93
72
TC
75
TC
6.90
6.80
6.50
5
4.5
8.00
7.90
7.83
7.80
7.70
7.40
10
9
8.90
8.80
8.73
8.70
8.60
8.30
17
15
10.10
10.00
9.93
9.90
9.80
9.48
20
19
10.55
10.45
10.38
10.35
10.25
9.90
25
23
11.30
11.20
11.13
11.10
11.00
10.60
30
28
11.95
11.85
11.78
11.75
11.65
11.30
35
32
12.60
12.50
12.43
12.40
12.30
12.00
40
36
13.18
13.08
13.02
12.98
12.88
12.58
45
41
13.77
13.67
13.60
13.57
13.47
13.17
47
43
14.00
13.90
13.83
13.80
13.70
13.40
50
46
14.23
14.13
14.06
14.03
13.93
13.59
55
51
14.60
14.50
14.43
14.40
14.30
13.90
60
56
14.60
14.50
14.43
14.40
14.30
13.96
63
59
14.60
14.50
14.43
14.40
14.30
14.00
68
64
14.60
14.50
14.43
14.40
14.30
14.06
0
-0.4
10.70
10.55
10.45
10.40
10.25
9.80
5
4.5
12.06
11.91
11.81
11.76
11.61
11.15
10
9
13.41
13.26
13.16
13.11
12.96
12.51
17
15
15.22
15.07
14.97
14.92
14.77
14.29
20
19
15.90
15.75
15.65
15.60
15.45
14.92
25
23
17.03
16.88
16.78
16.73
16.58
15.98
30
28
18.01
17.86
17.76
17.71
17.56
17.03
35
32
18.99
18.84
18.74
18.69
18.54
18.09
40
36
19.87
19.72
19.62
19.57
19.42
18.97
45
41
20.75
20.60
20.50
20.45
20.30
19.85
47
43
21.10
20.95
20.85
20.80
20.65
20.20
50
46
21.44
21.29
21.19
21.14
20.99
20.48
55
51
22.01
21.86
21.75
21.70
21.55
20.95
60
56
22.01
21.86
21.75
21.70
21.55
21.04
63
59
22.01
21.86
21.75
21.70
21.55
21.10
68
64
22.01
21.86
21.75
21.70
21.55
21.20
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
120
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Acoustic Data
Figure 160: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location.
• Measurement taken 4.9′ away from the unit.
• Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full
load normal operating condition.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as
construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in
which the equipment is installed.
• Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3.
• Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745.
Ceiling
Table 70: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
Model No.
4.9 ft.
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
Medium Fan
Speed
Low Fan Speed
31
36
27
33
24
30
LCN127HV4
38
35
32
LMCN185HV
38
37
34
LMCN077HV
Microphone
LCN097HV4
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
High Fan Speed
Figure 161: LMCN077HV and LCN097HV4 Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
90 90
NC-60
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
Approximate
Hearing
Threshold
63
70 70
Sound Pressure Level (dB re 20uPa)
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (dB re 20Pa)
NC-65
60
Sound Pressure Level (dB re 20uPa)
80 80
70
10
LCN097HV4
LMCN097HV
LMCN077HV
80
60 60
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
NC-20
NC-15
125
250
500
1000
2000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
4000
8000
10 10
63
63 125
125250
500
250
1000
500
2000
1000
NC-70
NC-70
NC-65
NC-65
NC-60
NC-60
NC-55
NC-55
NC-50
NC-50
NC-45
NC-45
NC-40
NC-40
NC-35
NC-35
NC-30
NC-30
NC-25
NC-25
NC-20
NC-20
NC-15
NC-15
4000
2000 80004000
8000
Octave
BandBand
Center
Frequency
(Hz)
Octave
Center
Frequency
(Hz)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
121
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Acoustic Data
Figure 162: LCN127HV4 and LMCN185HV Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
70 70
70
NC-65
NC-65
60 60
NC-60
NC-60
NC-55
NC-55
50 50
NC-50
NC-50
NC-45
NC-45
40 40
NC-40
NC-40
NC-35
NC-35
30 30
NC-30
NC-30
NC-25
NC-25
20 20
Approximate
Approximate
Hearing
Hearing
Threshold
Threshold
10 10
63 63 125125 250
250
NC-15
NC-15
500
500
1000
1000
2000
2000
4000 8000
8000
4000
| CEILING-CASSET TE
LMCN185HV
NC-65
60
NC-60
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
NC-20
NC-20
Octave
center
frequency
Octave band
band center
frequency
(Hz) (Hz)
122
Sound pressure level (0 dB = 20 µPa)
Sound pressure level (0 dB = 20 µPa)
80
Sound pressure level (0 dB = 20 µPa)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
LCN127HV4
LMCN125HV
80 80
10
Approximate
Hearing
Threshold
63
NC-20
NC-15
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
Octave band center frequency (Hz)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution
Figure 163:LMCN077HV Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Cooling
Discharge angle: 40°
Air velocity [ft/s]
Air velocity [ft/s]
9f t
6.6
6.6
4.9
3.3
4.9
3.3
6.6
7f t
4.9
4.9
5f t
0f t
5 ft
8 ft
7f t
3.3
1.6
1.6
3f t
1.6
9f t
6.6
3.3
1.6
8f t
Heating
Discharge angle: 50°
0f t
8f t
5f t
0f t
3f t
5 ft
8 ft
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
Temperature [°F]
Temperature [°F]
9f t
9f t
91
68
68
81
75
75
0f t
5 ft
81
0f t
8f t
8 ft
7f t
64
75
75
3f t
72
5f t
70
64
72
91
70
7f t
54
54
8f t
0f t
5f t
0f t
3f t
5 ft
8 ft
0f t
Figure 164:LCN097HV4 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Cooling
Discharge angle: 40°
Heating
Discharge angle: 50°
Air velocity [ft/s]
Air velocity [ft/s]
9ft
6.6
6.6
4.9
6.6
4.9
7ft
4.9
3.3
3.3
3.3
1.6
8ft
7ft
3.3
1.6
3ft
9ft
6.6
4.9
1.6
3ft
1.6
5ft
0ft
0ft
8ft
5ft
5ft
8ft
0ft
0ft
8ft
5ft
Temperature [°F]
Temperature [°F]
9ft
9ft
64
91
64
68
7ft
68
72
91
86
72
70
75
7ft
86
81
81
75
75
8ft
70
3ft
3ft
75
5ft
0ft
5ft
0ft
8ft
8ft
5ft
0ft
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
5ft
0ft
8ft
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
123
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution
Figure 165:LCN127HV4 Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Cooling
Discharge angle: 40°
Heating
Discharge angle: 50°
Air velocity [ft/s]
Air velocity [ft/s]
9ft
6.6
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
6.6
4.6
7ft
4.6
4.6
3.3
1.6
3ft
0ft
1.6
1.6
0ft
8ft
5ft
8ft
0ft
5ft
0ft
8ft
5ft
Temperature [°F]
Temperature [°F]
9ft
9ft
64
64
91
91
7ft
7ft
68
68
72
72
75
75
3ft
3ft
81
81
75
75
8ft
3ft
3.3
3.3
1.6
5ft
6.6
7ft
4.6
3.3
8ft
9ft
6.6
5ft
0ft
0ft
8ft
5ft
8ft
0ft
5ft
0ft
8ft
5ft
Figure 166:LMCN185HV Air Velocity and Temperature Distribution Charts.
Cooling
Discharge angle : 40°
Heating
Discharge angle : 50°
Air velocity [ft/s]
Air velocity [ft/s]
9ft
6.6
6.6
4.9
3.3
10ft
7ft
6.6
7ft
4.9
3.3
0ft
3ft
3.3
1.6
7ft
10ft
13ft
0ft
Temperature [°F]
13ft
10ft
7ft
3ft
0ft
64
68
72
91
7ft
72
75
124
7ft
10ft
13ft
0ft
75
9ft
91
86
70
3ft
7ft
3ft
Temperature [°F]
64
68
10ft
3ft
1.6
9ft
13ft
7ft
4.9
3.3
3ft
1.6
3ft
6.6
4.9
1.6
13ft
9ft
7ft
86
70
81
81
3ft
75
75
3ft
| CEILING-CASSET TE
0ft
3ft
7ft
10ft
13ft
0ft
13ft
10ft
7ft
3ft
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
0ft
3ft
7ft
10ft
13ft
0ft
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Refrigerant Flow Diagram
Figure 167: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Gas pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Heat exchanger
Heating
Cooling
Evaporator Outlet
Temperature Thermistor
Turbo fan
M
Evaporator Inlet
Temperature Thermistor
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
Indoor Air
Temperature Thermistor
Liquid pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Table 71: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters.
Model No.
Vapor (inch)
Liquid (inch)
LMCN077HV
LCN097HV4
Ø3/8
Ø1/4
LCN127HV4
LMCN185HV
Ø1/2
Table 72: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
PCB Connector
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
CN-ROOM
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/IN
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/OUT
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
125
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Wiring Diagram
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 168: Multi F Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram.
126
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials
Factory Supplied Parts
Table 73: Parts Table.
Part
Quantity
Drain Hose
Quantity
One (1)
Zip Ties
Four (4)
Metal
Clamp
Two (2)
Conduit
Bracket
One (1)
Insulation
for Fittings
One (1)
Set
M4 Screws
Two (2)
1
Image
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
Part
Washer for
Hanging
Bracket
Image
For Vapor Piping For Liquid Piping
Wireless Handheld
Controller with
One (1)
Holder
1
(AKB73757604)
Eight (8)
Wireless Handheld Controller for the four-way ceiling cassette indoor units is also referenced by Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB.
Table 74:Required Accessory Table.
Part
Quantity
Grille Kit
(PT-QCHW0 or PT-UQC)
One (1)
Factory Supplied Materials
• Installation Guide (template)
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
WARNING
Image
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
Flaring tool set
•
•
•
•
Torque wrenches
Hexagonal wrench
Gas-leak detector
Thermometer
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes.
Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Note:
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect
installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
127
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Selecting the Best Location
Figure 169:Indoor Unit Clearance Requirements.
≥11-13/16 inches
Ceiling Tile
≥19-11/16
inches
•
Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where
considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used.
•
Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored.
•
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators.
•
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
Ceiling Tile
≥19-11/16
inches
≤11-13/16 inches
Don’ts
Ceiling
H = 6 feet to 12 feet
Place the unit where air circulation will not be blocked.
Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily.
Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration.
Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor
unit.
• Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space.
• Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can
be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit.
≥39-3/8 inches
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
•
•
•
•
≥13/32
inches
Do’s
Floor
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not
operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions
listed.
Note:
If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded.
Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken for the unit and all components.
Installing in a High or Dropped Ceiling
High or dropped ceilings, often found in commercial buildings and
offices, may cause a wide temperature differentiation. To countermeasure:
• Change the indoor unit mode selection to allow for higher ceilings
(see table).
• Install an air circulator.
• Set the air discharge outlet so that heated air flows in a downward
direction.
• Use a dual door system to protect the building gate or exit.
Table 75:Indoor Unit High Ceiling Mode Selection Options.
Ceiling Height
Mode Selection
≤7-1/2 feet
Low Ceiling
7-1/2 feet to 8-7/8 feet
Standard
8-7/8 feet to 10-3/16 feet
High Ceiling
10-3/16 feet to 11-13/16 feet
Very High Ceiling
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an
unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure:
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three (3) degrees).
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels
If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes,
etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum:
• Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches
thick).
• Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick).
• Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so
that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the conditioned space. Also, add a
ceiling grille for ventilation.
128
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Figure 170:Installing in a Highly Humid Location.
Ventilation Grille
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Installing Multiple Indoor Units in One Area
Ensure there is enough space between indoor units, lighting fixtures,
and ventilation fans / systems.
Figure 171:Installing Multiple Indoor Units.
Indoor unit
Indoor unit
Ventilator
Lighting
>59-1/16 inches
>78-25/32 inches
>118-5/32 inches
Preparing the Installation Area and Hanging the Indoor Unit Frame
23-1/16 inches ~ 26 inches (Ceiling Opening)
Unit Size
20-19/32 inches
12-9/16 inches 22-15/32 inches
3. Drill holes for the bolts. Use either a W 3/8 inch or a M10 size
bolt.
For easier installation, attach the accessories (except for the
decoration panel) before hanging the indoor unit.
Anchor
Long nut or turnbuckle
Suspension bolt
Ceiling tile
18-5/32 inches
Figure 174:Installation Diagram.
Ceiling
7-3/32 inches
Ceiling
22-15/32 inches
Unit Size
23-1/16 inches ~ 26 inches (Ceiling Opening)
20-3/8 inches
2. Choose the location for the indoor unit, and then mark where the
bolts, refrigerant piping, and drain hose should be. Suspension
bolt angle should account for drain direction.
Figure 173:Installing the Hanging Bolt in the Ceiling.
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
1. Installation guide (template) depicts the exact dimensions
necessary for the ceiling opening.
Figure 172:Ceiling Opening Dimensions and Bolt Locations.
20-3/8 inches
Preparing the Installation Area
Leave 1-9/16 inches of the bolt
beneath the bracket
Indoor Unit
Ceiling tile
Ceiling tile
Leave a space of 1-3/16 inches ± 1/8 inches
between the bottom of the indoor unit and the
ceiling
Installation Guide
(template)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Install the four screws
at the location marked on the
template
Open the ceiling tiles that are
along the outside edge of the
installation guide.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
129
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
For New Ceilings
Figure 175:Hanging the Indoor Unit.
1. Use a sunken insert, a sunken anchor, or any other field-supplied part to reinforce the
Hanging bolt
ceiling so that it can bear the weight of the indoor unit. Use a temporary washer plate
(W3/8 or M10)
to more easily set up the unit suspension location.
Nut
2. Ceiling height is shown on the side of the installation guide (template). Adjust the
Flat washer for M10
(W3/8
or
M10)
height of the unit accordingly. Adjust the clearance before hanging the indoor unit.
(field supplied)
Spring washer
3. Refer to the installation guide (template) for the dimensions to the ceiling opening.
(M10)
Match the center of the indoor unit (labeled) to the center indicated on the installation
guide.
Flat washer for M10
4. Align the installation guide (template) with the label attached to the unit (affixing the
(field supplied)
template to the unit if desired) to properly place the unit.
Nut
5. Remove the temporary washer plate and position the indoor unit hanger brackets
(W3/8 or M10)
on the bolts. Secure with nuts and washers on the top and bottom of the hanger
brackets.
6. Ceiling-cassette indoor units are equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch, therefore, the unit must be installed horizontally or
condensate will drip out and cause product malfunction. Measure the unit at each corner to verify that it is level.
7. Remove the installation guide (template).
For Existing Ceilings
1. Use anchors when installing the indoor unit in an existing ceiling.
2. Ceiling height is shown on the side of the installation guide (template). Adjust the height of the unit accordingly. Adjust the clearance
before hanging the indoor unit.
3. Remove the temporary washer plate and position the indoor unit hanger brackets on the bolts. Secure with nuts and washers on the top
and bottom of the hanger brackets.
4. Ceiling-cassette indoor units are equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch, therefore, the unit must be installed horizontally or
condensate will drip out and cause product malfunction. Measure the unit at each corner to verify that it is level.
5. Remove the installation guide (template).
Installing the Drain System
Figure 176: Indoor Unit Drain Piping.
• Drain piping must have downward gradient of at least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent
reverse flow, slope should not be straight up and down.
•
Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit when connecting the fieldsupplied drain piping.
• Drain piping specifications:
- Indoor Unit Drain Connection: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter.
- Field-Supplied Drain Piping: Polyvinyl chloride piping with 1-inch inside diameter
and pipe fittings.
Checking the Drain Pump
The unit uses a drain pump to remove condensate. The pump must be tested before the
system operates.
• Connect flexible drain hose to the field-installed drain piping; leave it as is until the test
is complete.
• Pour water into the flexible drain hose and check for leaks.
• After power wiring installation is complete, operate the drain pump to see if it sounds
and functions properly.
• After the test is complete, connect the flexible drain hose to the indoor unit drain port.
1/50~
1/100
<27-9/16 inches
Figure 177:Checking the Drain Pump.
Pour Water
Drain Pump
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Field-Installed
Drain Piping
Drain
Port
Glue the Joint
Drain Hose Connection
Use the clip (accessory)
Drain Pan
130
Flexible drain hose
(accessory)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Liquid Piping
Connection
Insulation for Refrigerant Piping
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR
(Field-Supplied)
UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Clamp for Insulation
(Field-Supplied)
Insulation
(Field-Supplied)
Insulating the Refrigerant and Drain Piping
Vapor Piping Connection
Figure 178:Insulating the Piping.
Insulation for Refrigerant Piping
(Field-Supplied) Insulation for Field-Installed Piping
(Field-Supplied)
Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause burns if touched.
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be
properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor unit
piping connections). Any exposed piping may generate condensate
or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat resistance of 248°F.
Overlap the Insulation at the
Connection
Drain Piping Insulation
Drain piping must have insulation a minimum of 7/32 inches thick.
Ensure no gaps are present.
1. Overlap the insulation at the connection of the field-installed piping and the indoor unit piping. Tape together so that no gaps exist.
2. Secure insulation to the rear piping housing section with vinyl tape.
3. Bundle the piping and drain hose with tape where they meet at the back of the indoor unit frame. Position the drain hose at the bottom of
the bundle (positioning the drain hose at the top of the bundle may cause the drain pan to overflow inside the indoor unit).
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
Note:
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
131
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
Installing the Insulation
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Connecting the Power Wiring and
Communications Cable
Figure 179:Power Wiring and Communications
Cable Connection Access.
2. Insert the power wiring / communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch
distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the sides of the indoor unit and
control box. Pass the wiring through the designated access holes to prevent damage. To prevent electromagnetic interference and product malfunction, leave a space
between the power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor unit.
3. Connect each wire to its appropriate terminal on the indoor unit control board. Verify
that the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch distribution unit
(Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the color and terminal numbers on the
indoor unit.
Power Wiring
Wired
Controller
Cable
Control Box
Cover Screws
Control Box Cover
4. Neatly arrange power wiring / communications cable and secure with the appropriate
cable restraint.
When clamping, do not apply force to the wiring connections.
5. Firmly reattach the control box cover.
Do not catch the wiring in the electric box
cover and make sure the cover firmly closes.
6. Fill in any gaps around the wiring access holes with sealant to prevent foreign
particles from entering the indoor unit.
Wiring / Cable Connections
Figure 180:Simplified View of Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch
Distribution Unit Terminal Connections.
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
2(L2)
3
3 or S
GND
RD
BR
1(L1)
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
BL
GND
GRN / YLW
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
1. To access the terminal block, open the control box cover.
Using a Conduit
1. Remove the rubber stopper on the indoor unit. Pass the power wiring / communications cable
through the conduit, the conduit mounting plate, and to / through the control panel of the indoor unit.
Figure 181:Using a Conduit.
Rubber Stopper
2. Tighten the conduit and the conduit mounting plate together.
3. Connect the power wiring / communications cable to the indoor unit terminal block.
4. Screw the conduit mounting plate to the indoor unit.
If the distance between the outdoor unit and indoor unit is greater than 131 feet, connect the power
wiring and communications cable separately (i.e., a conduit cannot be used).
132
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Conduit Bracket
Cable
Screws
Conduit
Ceiling cassette 4-way
_ 19
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Controller Options
Four-way ceiling-concealed indoor units include a wireless handheld controller (AKB73757604)1, but optional LG-supplied wired controllers
are available.
Wireless Handheld Controller
Figure 182:AKB73757604 Wireless Handheld Controller.
Table 76:AKB737576041 Wireless Handheld Controller Functions.2
Button
Description
Label
1
Vane Angle Button: Sets the angle to each vane.
2
Function Setting Button: Sets or clears auto clean, smart clean,
electric heater, or individual vane angle control functions.
3
1
3
10
11
12
4
13
5
6
14
7
8
15
16
9
17
4
5
Operation Mode Sequence
6
Cooling Mode
↓
Auto Mode/Changeover
↓
Dehumidification Mode
↓
Heating Mode
↓
Fan Mode
7
On Time Button: Sets the time when the operation begins.
8
Sleep Timer Button: Sets the sleep mode operation.
Set / Clear Button: Sets or cancels the timer, also sets the current
time.
Plasma Button: Starts or stops plasma-purification functions.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Room Temperature Setting Button: Raises or lowers temperature
setpoint in cooling and heating operation.
Operation mode selection button: Selects the operation mode.
Indoor Fan Speed Button: Changes the fan speed to one of four
choices: low, medium, high, and chaos.
Room Temperature Check Button: Displays / checks the room
temperature.
Off Timer button: Sets the time when the operation ends.
16
Time Setting (Up / Down) / Light Button: Sets the timer and
adjusts the brightness of the LED.
17
Reset Button: Resets the remote controller.
Wireless Handheld Controller for the four-way ceiling cassette indoor units is also referenced by Model
No. PQWRHQ0FDB.
2
Depending on the indoor unit model, some functions may not be supported or displayed.
1
Wired Controller Connections
Figure 183:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal
Block.
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
3(C)
RD
BL
1(L1 ) 2(L2)
BR
GRN / YLW
GND
3 or S
CN-REMO
To Wired Controller
GND
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
133
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
2
On / Off Button: Turns the power on/off.
Jet Cool: Sets the unit to super high fan speed when in cooling
mode.
Left / Right Air Flow Button (optional): Sets the desired left / right
(horizontal) air flow direction.
Up / Down Air flow Button: Stops or starts louver movement, and
sets the desired air flow direction to up or down.
FOUR-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNITSMULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Wired Controller Placement
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain comfort
levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in a location
away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly exposed to cold
air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the floor where its LED
display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect
an average room temperature.
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
• Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
• Hot or cold air from ducts
• Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
• Concealed pipes and chimneys
• An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
Figure 184:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
YES
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
NO
ot e
Cont
NO
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
TEMP
Rem
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
roller
NO
Figure 185:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top, back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation
is desired, remove cable guide grooves on the controller, and
then position wiring / cable on applicable side.
Top
Top
Back
Right
Side
Right
Side
2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall
plate into place (using the provided parts). Install the controller
wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no
gaps exist between the wall plate and the wall itself.
3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller
circuitry. Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into
place by pressing the bottom part of the wired controller onto
the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps exist between the wired
controller and the wall plate on all sides.
Figure 186:Attaching the Wall
Plate.
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to
release controller.
Do not damage the controller components
when removing.
Figure 187:Installing / Removing
the Controller.
Installing the Controller
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Wall
Wall
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
134
| CEILING-CASSET TE
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F FOUR-WAY CEILING-CASSETTE INDOOR UNITS
MULTI F MAX
Installation and Best Layout Practices
PTVK430 Ventilation Kit
Figure 188:PTVK430 Ventilation Kit.
PTVK430 Ventilation Kit includes a flange for field-supplied ventilation pipe connection.
Easily connects at the four-way ceiling-cassette three (3) inch fresh air knockout hole.
Finalizing Indoor Unit Installation—
Installing the Decoration Panel
Decoration panel must be installed properly; cool air will leak from any gaps found between the indoor unit frame and the decoration panel,
which will cause condensation to generate.
1. Remove the packaging, take out air inlet grille from the front
panel (1A), and then remove the corner covers of the panel (1B).
1A
Grille
Corner
Cover
3. Attach two screws on diagonal corners of each panel, but do not
tighten completely (3). Screws to attach the panel to the indoor
unit frame are factory-provided and can be found in the shipping
box.
4. Verify the panel is aligned with the ceiling. Adjust the height by
using the hanging bolts as shown (4).
1B
Four-Way Ceiling-Cassette
2. Attach the panel to the indoor frame by inserting the hooks as
shown (2).
Figure 189:Installing the Decoration Panel.
2
3
4
5
Hook clip
Hook
5. Attach the corner covers (5).
6. Unscrew the control panel cover (6).
7. Connect the one display connector (CN-DISP) and the two vane
control connectors (CN-VANE1, CN-VANE2) of the front panel to
the indoor unit PCB (7).
8. Close the control box cover. Attach the link on the front panel as
shown (8). The link is supplied in the front panel shipping package.
9. Attach the other side of the link on the filter guide of the air inlet
grille, then install the filter and the air inlet grille on the front panel
(9).
6
Figure 190:Ensure that no gaps are present between the
indoor unit frame and the decoration panel.
7
Screw
Indoor Unit
Ceiling
Tile
Insulation should fit tightly so that
cool air does not leak
Decoration panel
CN VANE 1,2
8
Link
CN DISP
9
Link
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Filter
guide
CEILING-CASSET TE
|
135
TWO-WAY
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
AIR HANDLING
INDOOR UNIT DATA
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 137
“General Data / Specifications” on page 138
“Dimensions” on page 139
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 140
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 141
“External Static Pressure” on page 142
“Acoustic Data” on page 143
“Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 144
“Wiring Diagram” on page 145
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 147
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 148
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Mechanical Specifications and Features
Two-way Vertical-Horizontal Air
Handing Indoor Unit
General
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Vertical-Horizontal
Air Handling units are designed for high-speed air volume against an
external static pressure up to 1.00″WG. Supply air opening is flanged
to accept field-installed ductwork that cannot exceed the external
static pressure limit of the unit.
Coil
Refrigerant System
System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration
circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding
charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare,
and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must
be field insulated.
Electrical
Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power
with voltage variances of ±10%.
Filter Assembly
The unit includes a filter rack that can accept a field-supplied 16” x
20” x 1” filter cartridge. The filter rack has a guide to assist in centering the filters, and can be accessed from the front.
Microprocessor Control
Casing
The casing is designed to mount fully concealed behind a wall
or above a finished ceiling. Casing is manufactured of 22-gauge
precoated metal and finished with a high-gloss baked enamel finish.
Cold surfaces of the unit are covered internally with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation; inside surface of the pan assembly door access
panel is treated with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation, encapsulated on both sides. The access panel is sealed along the edges with
reinforced foil-faced covering, all access panels also have gasket
seals to minimize air leaks.
The two-way vertical-horizontal air handling unit can operate in one
of two airflow configurations: the vertical (upflow) configuration or
horizontal (left) end discharge. Supply air is drawn from the top, and
there is a dedicated bottom vertical return. Unit is also designed to
accept an internal, optional LG electrical strip heater.
Fan Assembly and Control
Figure 191: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal
Air Handling Indoor Unit.
The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are
stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor.
The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the
value provided by temperature sensors within the indoor unit. A
field-supplied communication cable must be installed to connect the
indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit.
Controls
The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished
through 18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication cable.
Condensate
The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate.
The units have an integral fan assembly consisting of galvanized
Features
• Inverter (Variable speed fan)
• Control lock function
• Auto operation
• Dehumidifying function
• Two thermistor control
• Group control
• External static pressure control
• Self-diagnostics function
• Wired thermostat included
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
137
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has a minimum of
two rows of coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is
provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
steel housing and a forward
curve fan wheel. The fan
motor is a brushless digitally
controlled (BLDC) motor with
permanently lubricated and
sealed ball bearings. The fan
/ motor assembly is mounted
on vibration-attenuating rubber grommets. Fan speed is
controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digital
control algorithm. The indoor
fan has Low, Med, High, and
Auto settings for Cooling
mode; and has Low, Med,
High, and Auto settings for
Heating mode. Each of the
settings can be field-adjusted
from the factory setting (RPM
/ ESP). The Auto setting adjusts the fan speed to most
effectively achieve setpoint.
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
General Data / Specifications
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Table 77: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)
LMVN240HV
LMVN360HV
24,000
36,000
27,000
40,000
57-77
57-77
59-81
59-81
Sircocco
Sircocco
96 x 1
182 x 1
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
Brushless Digitally Controlled / Direct
710 / 640 / 480
990 / 880 / 800
1.00
1.00
R410A
R410A
EEV
EEV
208-230, 1, 60
208-230, 1, 60
1
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Operating Range
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
Fan
Type
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
Motor/Drive
Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) at 0.5"WG ESP
Maximum External Static Pressure (in. WG)
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
Refrigerant Control
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz
3
Rated Amps (A)
0.59
1.12
43 / 42 / 41
45 / 44 / 43
18 x 48-21/32 x 21-1/4
18 x 48-21/32 x 21-1/4
117
121
130
135
4 x 18
4 x 18
(2 x 24 x 18) x 2
(3 x 24 x 18) x 2
Liquid (in.)
1/4
3/8
Vapor (in.)
1/2
5/8
3/4 FPT
3/4 FPT
3/4 FPT
3/4 FPT
Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L)4 at 0.3"WG ESP
Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
Net Weight (lbs.)
Shipping Weight (lbs.)
Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)
5
Heat Exchanger
(Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number
Piping
Primary Drain I.D. (in.)
Secondary Drain I.D. (in.)
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in
accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and
indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
138
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
4
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs must be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Dimensions
Figure 192: LMVN240HV and LMVN360HV Dimensions.
18
17
D
12-1/8
21-1/4
W
1-9/16
H
1-15/16
1-5/8
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
1-15/16
2-1/16
2-1/8
1-9/16
48-21/32
49-5/16
2-9/16
1-1/2
14-5/16
4-11/16
1-9/16
9-15/16
13
LMVN240HV
LMVN360HV
Model
18
W
H
Unit: Inch
D
48-21/32 21-1/4
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
139
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 78: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LMVN240HV
24,000
LMVN360HV
36,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
23.53
23.51
23.49
23.47
23.46
23.44
23.42
23.40
23.38
23.37
23.35
23.33
22.77
22.21
21.65
21.09
20.49
19.99
19.49
18.99
18.49
18.19
18.10
35.29
35.26
35.24
35.21
35.18
35.16
35.13
35.10
35.08
35.05
35.02
34.99
34.15
33.31
32.48
31.64
30.74
29.99
29.24
28.49
27.74
27.29
27.14
17.89
18.03
18.17
18.31
18.45
18.59
18.73
18.87
19.00
19.14
19.28
19.42
19.10
18.77
18.43
18.08
17.89
17.41
16.93
16.35
15.86
15.75
15.71
26.84
27.05
27.26
27.47
27.67
27.88
28.09
28.30
28.51
28.71
28.92
29.13
28.65
28.16
27.64
27.12
26.84
26.12
25.40
24.53
23.80
23.62
23.56
73 / 61
TC
SHC
24.99
24.97
24.95
24.93
24.91
24.89
24.87
24.85
24.84
24.82
24.80
24.78
24.21
23.65
23.09
22.53
21.92
21.42
20.92
20.42
19.92
19.62
19.52
37.48
37.45
37.43
37.40
37.37
37.34
37.31
37.28
37.25
37.23
37.20
37.17
36.32
35.47
34.63
33.79
32.88
32.13
31.38
30.63
29.88
29.43
29.28
18.90
19.05
19.20
19.34
19.49
19.64
19.78
19.93
20.07
20.22
20.37
20.51
20.20
19.88
19.55
19.21
19.03
18.55
18.07
17.49
17.00
16.89
16.86
28.35
28.57
28.79
29.01
29.23
29.45
29.67
29.89
30.11
30.33
30.55
30.77
30.30
29.82
29.32
28.81
28.55
27.83
27.11
26.23
25.49
25.34
25.29
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
26.45
26.43
26.41
26.39
26.37
26.35
26.33
26.31
26.29
26.27
26.25
26.23
25.66
25.09
24.53
23.96
23.35
22.85
22.35
21.85
21.35
21.05
20.95
39.67
39.64
39.61
39.58
39.55
39.52
39.49
39.46
39.43
39.40
39.37
39.34
38.49
37.64
36.79
35.94
35.02
34.27
33.52
32.77
32.02
31.57
31.43
18.30
18.44
18.59
18.73
18.87
19.01
19.15
19.30
19.44
19.58
19.72
19.86
19.58
19.30
18.99
18.69
18.55
18.10
17.66
17.12
16.66
16.58
16.55
27.45
27.66
27.88
28.09
28.31
28.52
28.73
28.94
29.16
29.37
29.58
29.79
29.37
28.94
28.49
28.03
27.82
27.15
26.49
25.67
24.99
24.87
24.82
27.50
27.48
27.46
27.44
27.42
27.40
27.38
27.36
27.34
27.32
27.29
27.27
26.70
26.13
25.57
25.00
24.00
23.69
23.38
22.88
22.38
22.08
21.98
41.26
41.23
41.19
41.16
41.13
41.10
41.07
41.04
41.01
40.97
40.94
40.91
40.05
39.20
38.35
37.50
36.00
35.53
35.07
34.32
33.57
33.12
32.97
18.69
18.83
18.98
19.12
19.27
19.41
19.56
19.70
19.85
19.99
20.13
20.28
20.01
19.73
19.44
19.14
18.72
18.43
18.14
17.60
17.15
17.07
17.05
28.03
28.25
28.47
28.68
28.90
29.12
29.34
29.55
29.77
29.99
30.20
30.42
30.01
29.60
29.16
28.71
28.08
27.65
27.21
26.40
25.72
25.61
25.57
TC
86 / 72
SHC
29.37
29.35
29.33
29.30
29.28
29.26
29.24
29.21
29.19
29.17
29.15
29.13
28.55
27.97
27.40
26.83
26.20
25.70
25.20
24.70
24.20
23.90
23.81
44.06
44.02
43.99
43.96
43.92
43.89
43.86
43.82
43.79
43.76
43.72
43.69
42.82
41.96
41.10
40.25
39.30
38.55
37.80
37.05
36.31
35.86
35.71
18.84
18.99
19.14
19.28
19.43
19.58
19.72
19.87
20.01
20.16
20.30
20.45
20.20
19.95
19.68
19.40
19.30
18.88
18.47
17.94
17.51
17.46
17.44
28.26
28.49
28.71
28.93
29.15
29.37
29.58
29.80
30.02
30.24
30.46
30.67
30.30
29.92
29.52
29.10
28.95
28.32
27.70
26.92
26.27
26.18
26.15
TC
90 / 75
SHC
30.83
30.81
30.79
30.76
30.74
30.72
30.69
30.67
30.64
30.62
30.60
30.57
29.99
29.42
28.84
28.27
27.63
27.13
26.63
26.13
25.63
25.33
25.23
46.25
46.21
46.18
46.14
46.11
46.07
46.04
46.00
45.97
45.93
45.90
45.86
44.99
44.12
43.26
42.40
41.44
40.69
39.94
39.20
38.45
38.00
37.85
19.20
19.35
19.50
19.65
19.80
19.95
20.10
20.24
20.39
20.54
20.69
20.84
20.60
20.36
20.10
19.84
19.75
19.35
18.94
18.42
18.00
17.96
17.94
28.80
29.02
29.25
29.47
29.70
29.92
30.14
30.37
30.59
30.81
31.03
31.26
30.90
30.54
30.15
29.76
29.63
29.02
28.41
27.64
27.01
26.93
26.91
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
140
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 79: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity
of Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
LMVN240HV
24,000
61
64
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
72
75
°F DB
°F WB
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
0
-0.4
13.89
13.70
13.57
13.50
13.30
12.72
5
4.5
15.65
15.46
15.33
15.26
15.07
14.48
10
9
17.41
17.22
17.09
17.02
16.83
16.24
17
15
19.76
19.57
19.43
19.37
19.17
18.55
20
19
20.64
20.45
20.32
20.25
20.05
19.37
25
23
22.11
21.91
21.78
21.72
21.52
20.74
30
28
23.38
23.18
23.05
22.99
22.79
22.11
35
32
24.65
24.46
24.33
24.26
24.07
23.48
40
36
25.79
25.60
25.47
25.40
25.21
24.62
45
41
26.93
26.74
26.61
26.54
26.35
25.76
47
43
27.39
27.20
27.07
27.00
26.80
26.22
50
46
27.83
27.64
27.51
27.44
27.24
26.58
55
51
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.20
60
56
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.32
63
59
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.39
68
64
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.51
0
-0.4
20.58
20.29
20.10
20.00
19.71
18.84
5
4.5
23.19
22.90
22.71
22.61
22.32
21.45
10
9
25.80
25.51
25.31
25.22
24.93
24.06
17
15
29.28
28.99
28.79
28.70
28.41
27.48
20
19
30.58
30.29
30.10
30.00
29.71
28.70
25
23
32.75
32.46
32.27
32.17
31.88
30.72
30
28
34.64
34.35
34.15
34.06
33.77
32.75
35
32
36.52
36.23
36.04
35.94
35.65
34.78
40
36
38.21
37.92
37.73
37.63
37.34
36.47
45
41
39.90
39.61
39.42
39.32
39.03
38.16
47
43
40.58
40.29
40.10
40.00
39.71
38.84
50
46
41.23
40.94
40.75
40.65
40.36
39.38
55
51
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.29
60
56
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.47
63
59
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.58
68
64
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.76
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
LMVN360HV
36,000
Outdoor Air Temp.
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
141
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
External Static Pressure
Table 80: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit External Static Pressure Setting Values Table.
Static Pressure (in. wg)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Model No. / Nominal Capacity Airflow Rate / CFM
of Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
LMVN240HV
24,000
LMVN360HV
36,000
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
98
96
92
1032
103
101
982
962
922
1032
1032
1012
982
962
922
1032
1032
1012
982
962
922
1032
1032
1012
Setting Value at (in. wg)1
710
640
480
990
880
800
56
53
53
80
65
65
67
65
55
85
72
69
74
70
64
90
80
77
78
75
70
95
85
82
87
85
79
100
92
90
94
91
84
103
98
96
Unless otherwise noted, vertical-horizontal air handing units are UL listed up to 0.5 in. wg total static pressure, including coil, case, duct work pressure drop, air filter, and largest kW size heater. Internal static
pressure includes coil and case only.
2
Airflow rate (CFM) decreases by 3% per 0.1 in. wg.
3
Maximum airflow rate is 400 CFM per ton. (For the 24,000 Btu/h unit, the maximum airflow rate is 2 x 400 = 800 CFM). If airflow is set at the maximum rate, the external static pressure value must be increased
from high speed setting value to: From 24kBtu/h of capacity: 4; From 36kBtu/h of capacity: 5
4
High static pressure is 0.5 in. wg (factory setting); low static pressure is 0.3 in. wg.
1
Note:
If external static pressure is not set correctly, the air conditioning system may not operate properly or may malfunction.
Table 81: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit Minimum Airflow by Heater Capacity.
Heater Capacity (kW)
Model No. / Nominal Capacity of
Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
5
10
15
480 CFM
480 CFM
Not Available
LMVN240HV (24,000)
780 CFM
780 CFM
Not Available
LMVN360HV (36,000)
20
Not Available
Not Available
Do not operate the air conditioning system using less than the minimum airflow. There is risk of fire and severe injury or death.
Note:
Do not operate the air conditioning system using less than the minimum airflow. There is risk of product damage.
Table 82: Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop.
Heater Capacity (kW)
0
5
10
Static Pressure Drop (in. wg)
0
-0.01
-0.02
Note:
• The external static pressure value must be reset if an electric heater is installed. For each 0.01 in. wg. increase in static pressure, the
external static pressure must increase by 1.
• If the external static pressure is not set properly, the provided safety device will turn off the heater (according to airflow).
Table 83: Field-Supplied Air Filter Static Pressure Drop Factors.
Model No. / Nominal Capacity of Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
LMVN240HV (24,000)
LMVN360HV (36,000)
Airflow Rate / CFM
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
Static Pressure Drop (in. wg)
710
640
480
990
880
800
Note:
-0.04
-0.03
-0.03
-0.07
-0.05
-0.05
• The external static pressure value must be reset if an air filter is installed. For each 0.01 in. wg. increase in static pressure, the
external static pressure must increase by 1.
• Factory tested with MERV 4 filter media. Fan speed set value when the unit is used with field-supplied filter media.
142
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
Measurement taken 3.3′ away from the unit.
Measurements taken with no attenuation and units operating at full load normal
operating condition.
Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as construction
(acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in which the equipment is
installed.
• Sound power levels are measured in dB(A)±3.
• Tested in anechoic chamber per ISO Standard 3745.
3.3 ft.
Figure 193: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location. •
•
Microphone
With Case
•
Table 84: Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
3.3 ft.
Model No.
43
45
42
44
41
43
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
LMVN240HV
LMVN360HV
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
High Fan Speed
Medium Fan Speed
Low Fan Speed
Figure 194: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
LMVN360HV
80
80
70
70
NC-65
60
NC-60
NC-55
50
NC-50
NC-45
40
NC-40
NC-35
30
NC-30
NC-25
20
10
Approximate
Hearing
Threshold
63
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (dB = 20μPa)
Octave Band Sound Pressure Level (dB = 20μPa)
LMVN240HV
60
50
40
30
20
NC-20
NC-15
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
8000
10
63
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
143
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Refrigerant Flow Diagram
Figure 195: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Gas pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Cooling
Heating
Thermistor for
Indoor Air Temperature
Thermistor for Evaporator
Outlet Temperature
Cross Flow Fan
M
Thermistor for
Evaporator Inlet Temperature
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Heat Exchanger
Liquid pipe connection port
(flare connection)
Table 85: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Connection Port Diameters.
Model No.
Vapor (inch)
Liquid (inch)
LMVN240HV
1/2
1/4
LMVN360HV
5/8
3/8
Table 86: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
144
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
PCB Connector
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
CN-ROOM
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/IN
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/OUT
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 196: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram.
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
: Factory Wiring
: Field Wiring
: OPTION
Table 87: Wiring Diagram Connections.
Connection Name
Location
Function
CN-POWER
AC power supply
AC Power line input for indoor controller
CN-MOTOR1
Fan motor output
Motor output of BLDC
CN-MOTOR2
Fan motor output
Motor output of BLDC
CN-FLOAT
Float switch input
Float switch sensing (water level sensor)
CN-PIPE/IN
Suction pipe sensor
Pipe in thermistor
CN-PIPE/OUT
Discharge pipe sensor
Pipe out thermistor
CN-ROOM
Room sensor
Room thermistor
CN-REMO
Remote controller
Remote control line
CN-OPTION
Option PCB
Communication between main and option
CN-ZONE
Zone controller
Zone control line
CN-DISPLAY
RF Remote controller
RF Remote control line
CN-CC
Dry contact
Dry contact line
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
145
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Table 88: DIP Switch Settings.
Dip Switch Settings
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
SW3
GROUP
OFF
ON
Description
Master
Slave
Group control setting using wired remote controller.
Dry contact mode setting.
1. Variable: Auto/manual mode can be chosen using the wide wired
remote controller or wireless remote controller (factory setting is
the manual mode).
2. Auto: For dry contact, it is always auto mode.
SW4
DRY
CONTACT
Variable
Auto
SW5
EXTRA1
Off
On
• ON: Fan operates continuously.
• OFF: Default (Fan does not operate continuously).
SW6
HEATER
Off
On
• ON: Automatic heater operation.
• OFF: Default (manual heater operation).
1. Indoor unit without electric heater.
• DIP switch 1, 2, 6, 8 must be set to OFF.
2. Indoor unit with electric heater, DIP switches 5 and 6 must be set to ON.
• SW 5 ON: Fan operates continuously. (Can have uninterrupted heating during defrost or oil return modes using continuous heater and
fan operation.)
• SW5 OFF: Fan discontinuous operation. (There would be reduction in heating capacity while defrosting or oil return operation.)
• SW6 ON: Automatic heater operation. (Heater operates automatically using the heater algorithm.)
• SW6 OFF: Manual heater operation. (On / off operation is set manually. Heater operation follows the heater algorithm.)
146
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials
Factory Supplied Materials
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
• Simple Controller with Mode Selection (AKB72955816)1
Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air handling indoor
units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW.
1
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
Flaring tool set
•
•
•
•
Torque wrenches
Hexagonal wrench
Gas-leak detector
Thermometer
WARNING
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes.
Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Note:
Selecting the Best Location
Do’s
• Place the unit where air circulation through the ducts will not be
blocked.
• Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily.
• Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration.
• Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor
unit.
• Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space.
• Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can
be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit.
Don’ts
•
Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where
considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used.
•
Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored.
•
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators.
•
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not
operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions
listed.
Note:
If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken
for the unit and all components.
Volatile Organic Compounds
Indoor Units (IDUs) should not be placed in an environment where the IDUs may be exposed to harmful volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
or in environments where there is improper air make up or supply or inadequate ventilation. If there are concerns about VOCs in the environment where the IDUs are installed, proper air make up or supply and/ or adequate ventilation should be provided. Additionally, in buildings
where IDUs will be exposed to VOCs consider a factory-applied epoxy coating to the fan coils for each IDU.
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an
unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure:
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees).
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels
If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum:
• Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick).
• Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick).
• Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the
conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
147
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect
installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Figure 198:General and Duct Connection Dimensions.
Figure 197:Clearance Requirements.
Access Holes
for Conduit
>13-25/32 inches
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Access Holes
for Conduit
Refrigerant Piping
Connections
>23-5/8
Clearance from
Access Panels
for Service
0 (zero)
inches
0 (zero)
inches
Drain Connections
for Horizontal Install
>13-25/32 inches
Filter Access
Drain Connections
for Vertical Install
Figure 199:Location of Access Holes and Piping Connections.
Top
Right Side
Refrigerant Piping
Connections
Drain
Connections
for Vertical Install
Drain Connections
for Horizontal Install
Air Filter Cover
Bottom
Front
Table 89:General and Duct Connection Dimensions.
Capacity
(Btu/h)
24,000
36,000
148
Dimensions (inches)
A
Height
B
Width
C
Depth
48-21/32
18
21-1/4
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
D
E
1-9/16 17-1/2
F
G
H
20
17
12-1/8
Access Hole for Wiring /
Cable (inches)
I
J
Power
Comm.
1-11/16
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
7/8
Refrigerant Connection
Sizes (inches)
Liquid
Vapor
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Units can be installed in a choice of vertical (upflow) or horizontal (left side) configurations.
Vertical (Upflow) Installation
Figure 200:Vertical Installation /
Attaching the Bottom Duct.
• Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation.
Field Supplied
Supply Air Duct
• To maintain proper air flow, minimum height clearance is 14 inches.
• Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work.
• Air handler platform should be sturdy enough to support the frame, plus any accessories (e.g., filter
box).
Field Supplied
Return Air Duct /
Plenum
• Vibration isolators (field supplied) must be installed between the unit frame and the platform. If necessary, provide the installing contractor with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be added
and how it should be positioned.
>1 inch
Use > 6 Screws (M4*25L)
Do not install the screws on the front and back of the unit, doing so may block filter installation.
Horizontal Installation
• Units must be installed so that the access panels face to the side,
not facing up or down.
Figure 201:Horizontal Installation.
Field-Supplied
Supply Air Duct
>3/8 inch Threaded Rod
Field Supplied
Return Air Duct / Plenum
• Installation must be in accordance with all relevant building codes,
which may necessitate the installation of an external condensate
pan (position the unit in or above the external condensate pan).
• If the units are going to be suspended, use angled steel support
brackets with threaded rods to provide support from the bottom.
The brackets / threaded rods should be comparatively bigger /
longer than the unit, and each must be centered on the part of the
frame it supports.
• If the unit will not be suspended, still use angled steel support
brackets, but also add vibration isolators (field supplied) to avoid
sound transmission. If necessary, provide the installing contractor
with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be added
and how it should be positioned.
>1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch Angle
B
Recommended length >26 inches
with a 2-inch clearance on both
sides of the unit
C
Suspension Bolt Locations
Table 90:Bracket / Bolt Position Dimensions.
Dimensions (inches)
Capacity
(Btu/h)
A
B
24,000
36,000
A
4
23
C
41-11/32
• Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation.
• Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work.
To ensure proper drainage for horizontal installations, unit must be installed within ±1/8 inches level of the unit’s length and width.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
149
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
• To prevent air leaks, seal all duct work according to local codes, but make sure that filter access is still
unobstructed.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Installing the Ducts
Figure 202:Securing the Ducts to the Unit.
• Use more than ten (10) screws to securely attach the supply ducts to the
unit. To prevent air leaks, seal around the duct opening before the duct is
secure.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
• To prevent vibration transmission, install flexible connectors between ducts
and the unit. The flexible connectors must be made of a heat-resistant
material at the discharge connection if an electric heater is installed.
• Duct work must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier when routed
through unconditioned spaces. Include enough insulation to prevent
condensate from forming on the ducts.
>10 Screws
(M4*25L)
• It may be necessary to add internal acoustical insulation lining for a metal
duct system if it does not include a 90° elbow and ten (10) feet between the
main duct and the first branch.
• Fibrous glass ducts could be used as a substitute if built and installed in accordance with the most recent edition of the Sheet Metal and
Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National Associate (SMACNA) standard.
• Also, fibrous duct work and acoustical insulation lining must also follow National Fire Protection Standard 90A or B as tested by UL
Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts.
Installing the Drain System
General Specifications
• To prevent property damage, optimize drain system performance by installing both a primary and secondary drain line, and properly size
the condensate traps.
• The primary and secondary drain line must be trapped to allow proper drainage of condensate water. If the secondary drain line is not used,
it must be capped.
•
Do not block the filter access panel when installing the condensate drain piping. Prime the primary and secondary condensate traps
after running both to the drain pan.
• If the unit is installed above an inhabited space, add a field-supplied external condensate pan that runs underneath the entire frame (to
prevent damage from overflow). The additional external condensate line should run from the unit to the external condensate pan.
• Drain all generated condensate from the external condensate pan to an appropriate area. Install a trap in the condensate lines as near to
the indoor unit coil as possible.
• All condensate must be drained from the external condensate pan to some noticeable area.
• To prevent overflow, the outlet of each trap should be positioned below its connection to the condensate pan.
• All traps should be primed, insulated, and leak Figure 203:Vertical Installation Drain System. Figure 204:Horizontal Installation Drain
System.
tested if located above an inhabited space.
• Use a 3/4-inch PVC male pipe thread fitting at
the condensate pan connection. Tighten gently.
• Point the drain hose down for easier flow.
•
Do not just use the pipe joint or PVC /
CPVC piping on the indoor unit drain line connections. Use only Teflon tape.
• Design the drain system to plan for winter operation (condensate line may freeze up if condensate does not properly drain away).
Field-Supplied
Drain Pan
150
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Drain Piping
Field-Supplied
Drain Pan
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Drain Piping
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Drain Piping Specifications
• Drain piping must have downward gradient of at
least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope
should not be straight up and down.
•
Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit
when connecting the field-supplied drain piping.
Figure 205:Close up of Drain Piping Connection.
Drain Piping Insulation
(Field Supplied)
Drain Piping
(Field Supplied)
Unit
To prevent leaks cause by a block in the intake air filter, install a U-Trap.
A ≥ 2-9/16 inches
B ≥ 2C
C ≥ 2 x SP
SP = External Pressure in. WG
Figure 206:Installing the U-Trap.
Example:
3/4-inch Connector
External Pressure= 0.4 in WG
A ≥ 2-9/16 inches
B ≥ 1-7/12 inches
C ≥ 19/24 inches
Insulating the Refrigerant and
Drain Piping
B
C
U-Trap
A
Figure 207:Vertical Primary and
Secondary Drain Layout.
Figure 208:Horizontal Primary and
Secondary Drain Layout.
Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause
burns if touched.
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
Drain Access Hole
Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be
properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor
unit piping connections) and must comply with federal, state,
and local requirements. Any exposed piping may generate
condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this
field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat
resistance of 248°F.
If the indoor unit is installed and is operated at an extended
period in a highly humid environment (dew point temperature >73°F), however, condensate will form. To prevent this
phenomenon, install adiabatic glass wool insulation with a
thickness of 7/16 to 13/16 inches thick. Also, install glass wool
insulation on all indoor units that are located in the ceiling
plenum.
Air Filter Cover
Supplementary Drain with a
Proper Trap (Field Supplied Kit
Can Be Used)
Main Drain with Suitable Trap. (Field-Supplied
Trap with Sufficient Depth Can Be Used.
Standard Size P-Traps Cannot Be Used.
Figure 210:Insulating the Refrigerant Piping and Refrigerant Piping
Connections.
Drain Piping Insulation
Drain piping insulation must be 7/32 inches thick, minimum.
Figure 209:Close Up of Refrigerant Piping Connection Insulation.
Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied)
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
(Field Supplied)
Overlap Piping Insulation
Insulation Clip (Field Supplied)
Gaps Should Not be Present
Connection for Liquid Piping
Refrigerant Piping
Insulation (Field Supplied)
Insulation Zip Tie (Field Supplied)
Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field
Supplied)
Connection for Vapor Piping
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
151
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
Drain Hole
Gaps Should Not Be Present
Field-Installed U-Trap Specifications
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
Note:
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable
Figure 211:Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable.
1. To access the terminal block, first unscrew the top front panel,
and then unscrew the cover from the control box.
2. Knockout the access holes for the wiring. Insert the power wiring/
communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution
unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the conduits, pass the
conduits through the designated access holes, and then insert
the conduits into the control box. To prevent electromagnetic
interference and product malfunction, leave a space between the
power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor
unit.
Top Front
Panel
Control
Box Cover
Access Holes
for Wiring
3. Connect the power wiring and communications cables to the
appropriate terminals on the indoor unit control board. Verify that
the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch
distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the
color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit.
Nut
Conduit
Mounting Plate
4. Fill in any gaps around the conduit access holes with sealant to
prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit.
1/2-inch Conduit
Connection Cable
Communications Cable
Figure 212:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX
systems only) Power Wiring / Communications Cable Connections.
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
GND
GND
GRN /
YLW
RD
152
3 or S
3
BL
1(L1 ) 2 (L2)
BR
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Controller Options
AKB729558161 Wired Controller.
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller (AKB72955816)1,
but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. The wireless handheld controller
(Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional accessory with use of the wired controller.
•
•
•
•
•
Operation Display
Panel
Temperature Control
Button
Fan Speed Button
Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions.
Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature.
Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed.
On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off.
Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto, Dry
(Dehumidification), or Fan.
On/Off Button
FA N
SPEED
TEMP
OPER
MODE
Mode Selection
Check Button
Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air
handling indoor units are also referenced by Model No.
PQRCVCL0QW.
1
Wired Controller Connections
Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different ways.
1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1; sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the indoor
unit PCB.
2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG, two-core,
one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and building codes require plenum cable usage).
Figure 213:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable.
Verify the connectors are properly inserted.
C/BOX Cable (Plug type)
FAN
SPEED
TEMP
OPER
MODE
Extension cable
To Indoor Unit
CN-REMO
Terminal
Figure 214:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block.
CN-REMO
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
1(L1 ) 2 (L2)
3
GND
controller to the indoor unit terminal blocks.
3 or S
GND
GRN /
YLW
RD
BK
12V
Power Ground
BL
RD
BR
YL
Comm.
Outdoor Unit
Terminal
Block or controller cable, make sure to connect
When
using field-supplied
Branch Distribution
UnittoTerminal
Block
the yellow
yellow (communications
wire), red to red (12V power
(Multi F MAX
wire),Systems
and black Only)
to black (ground wire) terminals from the remote
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
153
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first cycled on.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
TWO-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Wired Controller Placement
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain
comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in
a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly
exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the
floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature.
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
Hot or cold air from ducts
Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
Concealed pipes and chimneys
An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top,
back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove
cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side.
Figure 215:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
NO
ot e
Cont
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
NO
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
TEMP
Rem
roller
NO
Figure 216:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Top
Top
Back
2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into
place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate
and the wall itself.
3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry.
Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the
bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps
exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides.
YES
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
Figure 217:Attaching the
Wall Plate.
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the
two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller.
Do not
damage the controller components when removing.
Right
Side
Right
Side
Figure 218:Installing /
Removing the Controller.
Installing the Controller
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Wall
Wall
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
154
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
155
FOUR-WAY
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
AIR HANDLING
INDOOR UNIT DATA
“Mechanical Specifications” on page 157
“General Data / Specifications” on page 157
“Dimensions” on page 158
“Cooling Capacity Table” on page 160
“Heating Capacity Table” on page 162
“External Static Pressure” on page 164
“Acoustic Data” on page 167
“Refrigerant Flow Diagram” on page 170
“Wiring Diagram” on page 171
“Factory Supplied Parts and Materials” on page 173
“Installation and Best Layout Practices” on page 174
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Mechanical Specifications and Features
Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air
Handing Indoor Unit
General
All LG indoor units are factory assembled, wired, piped, and provided with a control circuit board, fan, and motor. Vertical-Horizontal
Air Handling units are designed for high-speed air volume against an
external static pressure up to 1.00″WG. Supply air opening is flanged
to accept field-installed ductwork that cannot exceed the external
static pressure limit of the unit.
Coil
Refrigerant System
System is designed for use with R410A refrigerant. The refrigeration
circuit is pressure-tested at the factory and shipped with a holding
charge of helium gas. Refrigerant pipe connections are 45° flare,
and all refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the indoor units must
be field insulated.
Each indoor unit is designed to operate using 208–230/60/1 power
with voltage variances of ±10%.
Casing
The casing is designed to mount fully concealed behind a wall
or above a finished ceiling. Casing is manufactured of 22-gauge
precoated metal and finished with a high-gloss baked enamel finish.
Cold surfaces of the unit are covered internally with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation; inside surface of the pan assembly door access
panel is treated with 1/2-inch polystyrene fiber insulation, encapsulated on both sides. The access panel is sealed along the edges with
reinforced foil-faced covering, all access panels also have gasket
seals to minimize air leaks.
The vertical-horizontal air handling unit can operate in one of four
airflow configurations: vertical upflow, vertical downflow, horizontal left discharge, or horizontal right discharge. Vertical downflow
operation requires an optional conversion kit. In the vertical position,
the unit has an opening for supply air from top (or bottom) with a
dedicated bottom (or top) vertical return. In the horizontal position,
supply air is from the left (or right) end with the return air from the
right (or left) end. Unit can also accept an internal, optional LG
electrical strip heater.
•
•
•
•
Inverter (Variable speed fan)
Control lock function
Auto operation
Dehumidifying function
The units have an integral fan
assembly consisting of galvanized steel housing and a forward
curve fan wheel. The fan motor
is a brushless digitally controlled
(BLDC) motor with permanently
lubricated and sealed ball bearings. The fan / motor assembly is
mounted on vibration-attenuating
rubber grommets. Fan speed is
controlled using a microprocessor-based direct digital control
algorithm. The indoor fan has Low,
Med, High, and Auto settings for
Cooling mode; and has Low, Med,
High, and Auto settings for Heating mode. Each of the settings can
be field-adjusted from the factory
setting (RPM / ESP). The Auto
setting adjusts the fan speed to
most effectively achieve setpoint.
Filter Assembly
Electrical
Features
Figure 219: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal
Air Handling Indoor Unit.
The unit comes with a filter rack sized to hold a field-provided 16” x
20” x 1” (NJ frame) or 24” x 20” x 1” (NK frame) filter cartridge. The
filter rack has a guide to assist in centering the filters, and can be
accessed from the front.
Microprocessor Control
The indoor unit is provided with an integrated control panel to communicate with the outdoor unit. All unit operation parameters are
stored in non-volatile memory resident on the unit microprocessor.
The microprocessor controls space temperature through using the
value provided by temperature sensors within the indoor unit. A
field-supplied communication cable must be installed to connect the
indoor unit(s) to the outdoor unit.
Controls
The indoor unit is supplied with an LG wired controller. Communication
between the indoor units and the outdoor unit is accomplished through
18 AWG, four-core, stranded and shielded power / communication
cable. The indoor unit has a built-in dry contact for a field supplied 3rd
party thermostat. An optional Wi-Fi module is available as an additional accessory for use with LG’s Smart­ThinQ app on a smart device.
Condensate
The unit is designed for gravity draining of condensate.
•
•
•
•
Two thermistor control
Group control
External static pressure control
Self-diagnostics function
• Wired thermostat included
• Built-in dry contact for 3rd party
thermostat
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
157
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
Indoor unit coils are factory built and are comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to copper tubing. Each unit has a minimum of
two rows of coils, which are pressure tested at the factory. Each unit is
provided with a factory installed condensate drain pan below the coil.
Fan Assembly and
Control
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
General Data / Specifications
Table 91: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit General Data.
Model Name
LVN180HV4
LVN240HV4
LVN360HV4
18,000
24,000
36,000
20,000
27,000
40,000
57-77
57-77
57-77
59-81
59-81
59-81
Type
Sircocco
Sircocco
Sircocco
Motor Output (W) x Qty.
198 x 1
198 x 1
400 x 1
Brushless Digitally
Controlled / Direct
Brushless Digitally
Controlled / Direct
Brushless Digitally
Controlled / Direct
640 / 580 / 480
710 / 640 / 480
1,100 / 1,000 / 900
0.7
0.7
1.00
R410A
R410A
R410A
EEV
EEV
EEV
208-230, 1, 60
208-230, 1, 60
208-230, 1, 60
1.1
1.1
2.2
42 / 42 / 41
43 / 42 / 41
45 / 44 / 43
18 x 48-11/16 x 21-1/4
18 x 48-11/16 x 21-1/4
25 x 55-3/16 x 21-1/4
129
129
165
140
140
188
4 x 18
4 x 18
4 x 18
(3x 24 x 18) x 2
(3x 24 x 18) x 2
(3x 30 x 18) x 2
Liquid (in.)
1/4
1/4
3/8
Vapor (in.)
1/2
1/2
5/8
Liquid (in.)
3/8
3/8
3/8
Vapor (in.)
5/8
5/8
5/8
Primary Drain I.D. (in.)
3/4 FPT
3/4 FPT
3/4 FPT
Secondary Drain I.D. (in.)
3/4 FPT
3/4 FPT
3/4 FPT
Nominal Cooling Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Nominal Heating Capacity (Btu/h)
1
Operating Range
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Cooling (°F WB)
Heating (°F DB)
Fan
Motor/Drive
Airflow Rate CFM (H/M/L) at 0.5" WG ESP
Maximum External Static Pressure (in. WG)
Unit Data
Refrigerant Type2
Refrigerant Control
Power Supply V, Ø, Hz
3
Rated Amps (A)
Sound Pressure Level ±3 dB(A) (H/M/L) at 0.3"WG ESP
4
Dimensions (W x H x D, in.)
Net Weight (lbs.)
Shipping Weight (lbs.)
Power Wiring / Communications Cable (No. x AWG)
Heat Exchanger
(Row x Column x Fin / inch) x Number
5
Pipe Size
Connection Size
Nominal capacity is rated 0 ft. above sea level with corresponding refrigerant piping length in
accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and
indoor units. All capacities are net with a combination ratio between 95 – 105%.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF
wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
2
This unit comes with a dry helium charge.
1
158
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Acceptable operating voltage: 187V-253V.
Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO Standard 3745 and are the
same in both cooling and heating mode. These values can increase due to ambient conditions during
operation.
5
All power wiring / communications cable to the IDUs must be minimum 18 AWG, 4-conductor, stranded,
shielded or unshielded (if shielded, must be grounded to chassis at ODU only) and must comply with
applicable local and national codes.
3
4
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Dimensions
Figure 220: Four-way Vertical Air Handling Unit Dimensions.
H
G
J
I
Top
A
Refrigerant
connections
Drain connections
for horizontal right
application
Drain connections
for horizontal left
application
D
Drain
connections
for upflow
application
B
Front
C
Side-right
F
Air filter cover
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
J
E
Bottom
Wiring
Knock out
Dimensions
ODU
Capacity
(kBtu/h)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Height Width Depth
Multi
Zone
H
I
J
Unit: inch
Refrigerant
Pipe size
CommPower unication
Liquid
Refrigerant
Pipe
Connections
Gas
Liquid
Gas
18
24
48-5/8
18
21-3/8 1-9/16 17-1/2
20
17
12-1/8 1-11/16
7/8
1/4
1/2
3/8
5/8
36
55-1/8
25
21-3/8 1-9/16 24-1/2
20
24
12-1/8 1-11/16
7/8
3/8
5/8
3/8
5/8
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
159
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 92: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
LVN180HV4
18,000
LVN240HV4
24,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
17.65
17.63
17.62
17.60
17.59
17.58
17.56
17.55
17.54
17.52
17.51
17.50
17.08
16.66
16.24
15.82
15.37
14.99
14.62
14.24
13.87
13.65
13.57
23.53
23.51
23.49
23.47
23.46
23.44
23.42
23.40
23.38
23.37
23.35
23.33
22.77
22.21
21.65
21.09
20.49
19.99
19.49
18.99
18.49
18.19
18.10
13.25
13.35
13.45
13.56
13.66
13.76
13.87
13.97
14.07
14.17
14.27
14.38
14.14
13.90
13.64
13.39
13.25
12.89
12.54
12.11
11.75
11.66
11.63
17.89
18.03
18.17
18.31
18.45
18.59
18.73
18.87
19.00
19.14
19.28
19.42
19.10
18.77
18.43
18.08
17.89
17.41
16.93
16.35
15.86
15.75
15.71
73 / 61
TC
SHC
18.74
18.73
18.71
18.70
18.68
18.67
18.66
18.64
18.63
18.61
18.60
18.58
18.16
17.74
17.32
16.90
16.44
16.06
15.69
15.32
14.94
14.72
14.64
24.99
24.97
24.95
24.93
24.91
24.89
24.87
24.85
24.84
24.82
24.80
24.78
24.21
23.65
23.09
22.53
21.92
21.42
20.92
20.42
19.92
19.62
19.52
13.99
14.10
14.21
14.32
14.43
14.54
14.65
14.75
14.86
14.97
15.08
15.19
14.96
14.72
14.47
14.22
14.09
13.74
13.38
12.95
12.58
12.51
12.48
18.90
19.05
19.20
19.34
19.49
19.64
19.78
19.93
20.07
20.22
20.37
20.51
20.20
19.88
19.55
19.21
19.03
18.55
18.07
17.49
17.00
16.89
16.86
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
19.84
19.82
19.81
19.79
19.78
19.76
19.75
19.73
19.72
19.70
19.69
19.67
19.24
18.82
18.40
17.97
17.51
17.13
16.76
16.39
16.01
15.79
15.71
26.45
26.43
26.41
26.39
26.37
26.35
26.33
26.31
26.29
26.27
26.25
26.23
25.66
25.09
24.53
23.96
23.35
22.85
22.35
21.85
21.35
21.05
20.95
13.55
13.65
13.76
13.87
13.97
14.08
14.18
14.29
14.39
14.50
14.60
14.70
14.50
14.29
14.06
13.84
13.73
13.40
13.08
12.67
12.34
12.27
12.25
18.30
18.44
18.59
18.73
18.87
19.01
19.15
19.30
19.44
19.58
19.72
19.86
19.58
19.30
18.99
18.69
18.55
18.10
17.66
17.12
16.66
16.58
16.55
20.63
20.61
20.60
20.58
20.57
20.55
20.53
20.52
20.50
20.49
20.47
20.46
20.03
19.60
19.17
18.75
18.00
17.77
17.53
17.16
16.79
16.56
16.49
27.50
27.48
27.46
27.44
27.42
27.40
27.38
27.36
27.34
27.32
27.29
27.27
26.70
26.13
25.57
25.00
24.00
23.69
23.38
22.88
22.38
22.08
21.98
13.83
13.94
14.05
14.16
14.27
14.37
14.48
14.59
14.69
14.80
14.91
15.01
14.81
14.61
14.39
14.17
13.86
13.65
13.43
13.03
12.70
12.64
12.62
18.69
18.83
18.98
19.12
19.27
19.41
19.56
19.70
19.85
19.99
20.13
20.28
20.01
19.73
19.44
19.14
18.72
18.43
18.14
17.60
17.15
17.07
17.05
TC
86 / 72
SHC
22.03
22.01
22.00
21.98
21.96
21.94
21.93
21.91
21.89
21.88
21.86
21.84
21.41
20.98
20.55
20.12
19.65
19.28
18.90
18.53
18.15
17.93
17.85
29.37
29.35
29.33
29.30
29.28
29.26
29.24
29.21
29.19
29.17
29.15
29.13
28.55
27.97
27.40
26.83
26.20
25.70
25.20
24.70
24.20
23.90
23.81
13.95
14.06
14.17
14.28
14.39
14.49
14.60
14.71
14.82
14.93
15.03
15.14
14.96
14.77
14.57
14.36
14.29
13.98
13.67
13.29
12.97
12.92
12.91
18.84
18.99
19.14
19.28
19.43
19.58
19.72
19.87
20.01
20.16
20.30
20.45
20.20
19.95
19.68
19.40
19.30
18.88
18.47
17.94
17.51
17.46
17.44
TC
90 / 75
SHC
23.12
23.11
23.09
23.07
23.05
23.04
23.02
23.00
22.98
22.97
22.95
22.93
22.50
22.06
21.63
21.20
20.72
20.35
19.97
19.60
19.22
19.00
18.92
30.83
30.81
30.79
30.76
30.74
30.72
30.69
30.67
30.64
30.62
30.60
30.57
29.99
29.42
28.84
28.27
27.63
27.13
26.63
26.13
25.63
25.33
25.23
14.22
14.33
14.44
14.55
14.66
14.77
14.88
14.99
15.10
15.21
15.32
15.43
15.25
15.07
14.88
14.69
14.62
14.32
14.02
13.64
13.33
13.29
13.28
19.20
19.35
19.50
19.65
19.80
19.95
20.10
20.24
20.39
20.54
20.69
20.84
20.60
20.36
20.10
19.84
19.75
19.35
18.94
18.42
18.00
17.96
17.94
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
160
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Cooling Capacity Table
Table 91: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Cooling Capacity Table - continued
Model No. /
Air
Nominal Capacity Outdoor
Temp.
of Indoor Unit
(°F DB)
(Btu/h)
35.29
35.26
35.24
35.21
35.18
35.16
35.13
35.10
35.08
35.05
35.02
34.99
34.15
33.31
32.48
31.64
30.74
29.99
29.24
28.49
27.74
27.29
27.14
27.18
27.39
27.61
27.82
28.03
28.24
28.45
28.66
28.87
29.08
29.29
29.50
29.01
28.52
28.00
27.47
27.18
26.45
25.72
24.84
24.10
23.93
23.87
73 / 61
TC
SHC
37.48
37.45
37.43
37.40
37.37
37.34
37.31
37.28
37.25
37.23
37.20
37.17
36.32
35.47
34.63
33.79
32.88
32.13
31.38
30.63
29.88
29.43
29.28
28.71
28.94
29.16
29.39
29.61
29.83
30.05
30.28
30.50
30.72
30.94
31.16
30.69
30.20
29.70
29.18
28.92
28.19
27.46
26.57
25.82
25.66
25.61
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB / °F WB
77 / 64
80 / 67
TC
SHC
TC
SHC
39.67
39.64
39.61
39.58
39.55
39.52
39.49
39.46
39.43
39.40
39.37
39.34
38.49
37.64
36.79
35.94
35.02
34.27
33.52
32.77
32.02
31.57
31.43
27.80
28.02
28.24
28.45
28.67
28.88
29.10
29.32
29.53
29.74
29.96
30.17
29.75
29.31
28.86
28.39
28.17
27.50
26.83
26.00
25.31
25.19
25.14
41.26
41.23
41.19
41.16
41.13
41.10
41.07
41.04
41.01
40.97
40.94
40.91
40.05
39.20
38.35
37.50
36.00
35.53
35.07
34.32
33.57
33.12
32.97
28.39
28.61
28.83
29.05
29.27
29.49
29.71
29.93
30.15
30.37
30.59
30.81
30.40
29.98
29.53
29.08
28.44
28.00
27.56
26.74
26.05
25.94
25.90
TC
86 / 72
SHC
44.06
44.02
43.99
43.96
43.92
43.89
43.86
43.82
43.79
43.76
43.72
43.69
42.82
41.96
41.10
40.25
39.30
38.55
37.80
37.05
36.31
35.86
35.71
28.63
28.85
29.07
29.30
29.52
29.74
29.96
30.19
30.41
30.63
30.85
31.07
30.69
30.30
29.89
29.48
29.32
28.69
28.06
27.26
26.61
26.52
26.49
TC
90 / 75
SHC
46.25
46.21
46.18
46.14
46.11
46.07
46.04
46.00
45.97
45.93
45.90
45.86
44.99
44.12
43.26
42.40
41.44
40.69
39.94
39.20
38.45
38.00
37.85
29.17
29.40
29.62
29.85
30.08
30.30
30.53
30.76
30.98
31.21
31.43
31.66
31.30
30.93
30.54
30.14
30.01
29.39
28.78
27.99
27.35
27.28
27.25
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
SHC: Sensible Heat Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal cooling capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB).
The shaded table columns and rows indicate reference data. When operating at this temperature, these values can be different if the system is not running consistently.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
161
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
LVN360HV4
18,000
14
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
118
122
68 / 57
TC
SHC
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 93: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity
of Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
LVN180HV4
18,000
LVN240HV4
24,000
Outdoor Air Temp.
°F DB
°F WB
0
-0.4
61
64
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
72
75
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
TC
10.29
10.14
10.05
10.00
9.86
9.42
5
4.5
11.59
11.45
11.35
11.30
11.16
10.72
10
9
12.90
12.75
12.66
12.61
12.46
12.03
17
15
14.64
14.49
14.40
14.35
14.20
13.74
20
19
15.29
15.14
15.05
15.00
14.86
14.35
25
23
16.38
16.23
16.14
16.09
15.94
15.36
30
28
17.32
17.17
17.08
17.03
16.88
16.38
35
32
18.26
18.12
18.02
17.97
17.83
17.39
40
36
19.11
18.96
18.86
18.82
18.67
18.24
45
41
19.95
19.81
19.71
19.66
19.52
19.08
47
43
20.29
20.14
20.05
20.00
19.86
19.42
50
46
20.62
20.47
20.37
20.33
20.18
19.69
55
51
21.16
21.01
20.92
20.87
20.72
20.14
60
56
21.16
21.01
20.92
20.87
20.72
20.24
63
59
21.16
21.01
20.92
20.87
20.72
20.29
68
64
21.16
21.01
20.92
20.87
20.72
20.38
0
-0.4
13.89
13.70
13.57
13.50
13.30
12.72
5
4.5
15.65
15.46
15.33
15.26
15.07
14.48
10
9
17.41
17.22
17.09
17.02
16.83
16.24
17
15
19.76
19.57
19.43
19.37
19.17
18.55
20
19
20.64
20.45
20.32
20.25
20.05
19.37
25
23
22.11
21.91
21.78
21.72
21.52
20.74
30
28
23.38
23.18
23.05
22.99
22.79
22.11
35
32
24.65
24.46
24.33
24.26
24.07
23.48
40
36
25.79
25.60
25.47
25.40
25.21
24.62
45
41
26.93
26.74
26.61
26.54
26.35
25.76
47
43
27.39
27.20
27.07
27.00
26.80
26.22
50
46
27.83
27.64
27.51
27.44
27.24
26.58
55
51
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.20
60
56
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.32
63
59
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.39
68
64
28.57
28.37
28.24
28.17
27.98
27.51
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
162
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Heating Capacity Table
Table 92: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Units Heating Capacity Table - continued
Model No. /
Nominal Capacity
of Indoor Unit
(Btu/h)
64
TC
Indoor Air Temp. °F DB
68
70
TC
TC
°F DB
°F WB
61
TC
72
TC
75
TC
0
-0.4
20.58
20.29
20.10
5
4.5
23.19
22.90
22.71
20.00
19.71
18.84
22.61
22.32
10
9
25.80
25.51
21.45
25.31
25.22
24.93
17
15
29.28
24.06
28.99
28.79
28.70
28.41
20
19
27.48
30.58
30.29
30.10
30.00
29.71
25
28.70
23
32.75
32.46
32.27
32.17
31.88
30.72
30
28
34.64
34.35
34.15
34.06
33.77
32.75
35
32
36.52
36.23
36.04
35.94
35.65
34.78
40
36
38.21
37.92
37.73
37.63
37.34
36.47
45
41
39.90
39.61
39.42
39.32
39.03
38.16
47
43
40.58
40.29
40.10
40.00
39.71
38.84
50
46
41.23
40.94
40.75
40.65
40.36
39.38
55
51
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.29
60
56
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.47
63
59
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.58
68
64
42.32
42.03
41.84
41.74
41.45
40.76
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
LVN360HV4
36,000
Outdoor Air Temp.
TC = Total Capacity (kBtu/h).
Nominal capacity as rated 0 ft. above sea level and a 0 ft. level difference between outdoor and indoor units. Corresponding refrigerant piping length is accordance with standard length of each outdoor unit.
Nominal heating capacity rating obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
163
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
External Static Pressure and Airflow Ranges
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 221: ESP Setting Values – NJ Chassis, LVN180HV4, LVN240HV4
Figure 222: ESP Setting Values – NK Chassis, LVN360HV4.
164
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
External Static Pressure
Table 94: Multi F Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit External Static Pressure Setting Values Table.
Static Pressure (in. wg)
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Model No. / Nominal Capacity Airflow Rate / CFM
of Indoor Unit (Btu/h)
LVN240HV4
24,000
LVN360HV4
36,000
640
580
480
710
640
480
1,100
1,000
900
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
95
93
91
97
95
91
102
100
98
—
—
—
—
—
—
106
104
102
—
—
—
—
—
—
112
110
108
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
116
114
Setting Value at (in. wg)1
63
57
51
67
63
51
65
61
57
67
63
59
71
67
59
71
67
63
75
69
65
79
75
65
79
75
71
81
77
73
85
81
73
86
82
78
88
84
80
92
88
80
92
88
84
91
89
87
94
91
87
96
94
92
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
High
Mid
Low
LVN180HV4
18,000
0.5
Unless otherwise noted, vertical-horizontal air handing units are UL listed up to 0.5 in. wg total static pressure, including coil, case, duct work pressure drop, air filter, and largest kW size heater. Internal static
pressure includes coil and case only.
2
Airflow rate (CFM) decreases by 3% per 0.1 in. wg.
3
Factory default setting is 0.3 in wg
4
Factory default setting is high static pressure
1
Note:
• If the ESP is set incorrectly, the air conditioning may malfunction.
• To get the desired air flow and external static pressure combination, use the setting value from the table.
Using a setting value other than the values listed in the table will not provide the desired combination.
Table 95: Air Filter Static Pressure Drop Factors.
Capacity (kBtu/h [tons])
18 (1.5)
24 (2.0)
36 (3.0)
Flow Rate (CFM)
Static Pressure Drop (in wg)
High (640)
Middle(580)
Low (480)
High (710)
Middle(640)
Low (480)
High (1100)
Middle(1000)
Low (900)
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.08
-0.08
-0.08
Table 96: Minimum Airflow (CFM) by Heater Capacity
Capacity (kBtu/h [tons])
Heater Capacity kW
3, 5
8, 10
15
20
18 (1.5)
480
480
Not Available
Not Available
24 (2.0)
480
480
Not Available
Not Available
36 (3.0)
900
900
900
900
Do not operate with less than the minimum airflow. If an airflow
is used below the minimum, there is a risk of fire, which may
lead to physical injury or death
Note:
Do not operate with less than the minimum airflow. If an airflow is
used below the minimum, there is a risk of damage to the product.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
165
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
External Static Pressure
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Table 97: Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop Factors.
Heater Capacity
Static Pressure Drop (in. wg)
0
0
3, 5
-0.01
8, 10
-0.02
15
-0.03
20
-0.04
If the electric heater optional accessory is installed, adjust ESP value according to heater size
For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1
If the ESP setting value is inappropriate, the provided safety device will turn the heater off according to the airflow
Table 98: Down Flow (optional) Static Pressure Drop Factors.
Capacity (kBtu/h [tons])
18 (1.5)
24 (2.0)
36 (3.0)
Flow Rate (CFM)
Static Pressure Drop (in wg)
High (640)
Middle(580)
Low (480)
High (710)
Middle(640)
Low (480)
High (1100)
Middle(1000)
Low (900)
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.09
-0.09
-0.09
Flow Rate (CFM)
Static Pressure Drop (in wg)
High (640)
Middle(580)
Low (480)
High (710)
Middle(640)
Low (480)
High (1100)
Middle(1000)
Low (900)
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.04
-0.06
-0.06
-0.06
If the optional down flow kit is installed, adjust ESP value as necessary
For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1
Table 99: Down Flow Air Filter Static Pressure Drop Factors
Capacity (kBtu/h [tons])
18 (1.5)
24 (2.0)
36 (3.0)
If the air filter is installed, adjust ESP value as necessary
For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1
Table 100: Down Flow Internal Electric Heater Static Pressure Drop.
Heater Capacity (kW)
0
3, 5
8, 10
15
20
Static Pressure Drop (in. wg)
0
-0.01
-0.01
-0.01
-0.01
If the electric heater optional accessory is installed, adjust ESP value according to heater size
For every increase in static pressure by 0.01 in wg, the ESP value must be increased by 1
If the ESP setting value is inappropriate, the provided safety device will turn the heater off according to the airflow
166
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
Table 101: Optional Electric Heater Capacites.
Heater Capacity (kW)
3
5
8
10
15
20
Static Pressure Drop (in. wg)
ANEH033B1
ANEH053B1
ANEH083B2
ANEH103B2
ANEH153B2
ANEH203B2
Figure 223: Typical Vertical Air Handling Unit Optional Electric Heater Accessory.
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
Example: 5kW Capacity Heater
Bracket
Bi metal
Heater Coil
Terminal Block
Relay
Heater Cable
Appearance may vary
depending on model capacity.
Table 102: Electric Heater Compatibility
VAHU Model Number and
Capacity (MBh)
Model Number / Heater Capacity kW
ANEH033B1
(3kW)
ANEH053B1
(5kW)
ANEH083B2
(8kW)
ANEH103B2
(10kW)
ANEH153B2
(15kW)
ANEH203B2
(20kW)
LVN180HV4 (18)
√
√
√
√
X
X
LVN240HV4 (24)
√
√
√
√
X
X
LVN360HV4 (36)
√
√
√
√
√
√
√ = Compatible
X = Not Compatible
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
167
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Figure 224: Sound Pressure Level Measurement Location.
Microphone
• Measurement taken 3.3′ away from the unit.
• Sound pressure levels are measured in dB(A) with a tolerance of ±3.
• Sound pressure levels are tested in an anechoic chamber under ISO
Standard 3745.
• Operating Conditions:
Power source: 220V/60 Hz.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors including the construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of a particular room in which
the unit was installed.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
3.3 ft.
With Case
3.3 ft.
Table 103: Vertical Air Handling Unit Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]).
Model No.
LVN180HV4
LVN240HV4
LVN360HV4
Sound Pressure Levels (dB[A]) (Cooling and Heating)
High Fan Speed
Medium Fan Speed
Low Fan Speed
42
43
45
42
42
44
41
41
43
Figure 225: Sound Pressure Level Diagrams.
LVN180HV4
168
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
LVN240HV4
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
LVN360HV4
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Acoustic Data
Table 104: Vertical Air Handling Unit Sound Power Levels (dB[A]).
Model No.
LVN180HV4
LVN240HV4
LVN360HV4
Sound Power Levels (dB[A])
High Fan Speed
59
60
61
Figure 226: Sound Power Level Diagrams.
LVN240HV4
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
LVN360HV4
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
LVN180HV4
• Data is valid under diffuse field conditions.
• Data is valid under nominal operating conditions.
• Sound power level is measured using rated conditions, and tested
in a reverberation room per ISO 3741 standards.
• Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as
construction (acoustic absorption coefficient) of particular area in
which the equipment is installed.
• Reference acoustic intensity: 0dB = 10E-6μW/m2
|
169
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Refrigerant Flow Diagram
Figure 227: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Flow Diagram.
Scirocco Fan
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
M
Vapor Pipe Connection Port
Heat Exchanger
(Flare Connection)
Heating
Evaporator Outlet
Temperature
Thermistor
Cooling
Ev. Temperature Thermistor
Indoor Air Temperature
Thermistor
Liquid Pipe Connection Port
(Flare Connection)
Table 105: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Indoor Unit Refrigerant Pipe Sizes and Connection Sizes.
Model No.
Piping Size
Connection Port Size
Liquid (inch)
Vapor (inch)
Liquid (inch)
Vapor (inch)
LVN180HV4
1/4
1/2
3/8
5/8
LVN240HV4
1/4
1/2
3/8
5/8
LVN360HV4
3/8
5/8
3/8
5/8
Table 106: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Thermistor Details.
170
Description (Based on Cooling Mode)
PCB Connector
Indoor Air Temperature Thermistor
CN-ROOM
Evaporator Inlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/IN
Evaporator Outlet Temperature Thermistor
CN-PIPE/OUT
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Figure 228: Four-way Vertical-Horizontal Air-Handling Indoor Unit Wiring Diagram.
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
171
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Wiring Diagram
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Table 107: Wiring Diagram Connections.
Connection Name
Location
Function
CN-POWER
AC power supply
AC Power line
CN-MOTOR1
Fan motor output
Motor output of BLDC
CN_OUT
Heater
Connection for heater
CN-D/PUMP
Drain pump output
AC output for drain pump
CN-FLOAT
Float switch input
Float switch sensing
CN-ZONE
Zone controller
Zone controller connection
CN-OPTION
Optional PCB EPROM
Option PCB connection
CN-EXT
External ON / OFF controller
External ON / OFF controller connection
CN-DISPLAY
Display
Display of indoor status
CN-CC
Dry contact
Dry Contact connection
CN-PIPE/OUT (RD)
Discharge pipe sensor
Pipe out thermistor
CN-LEAK (VI)
Refrigerant leak detector
Refrigerant leak detector connection
CN-PIPE/IN (WH)
Suction pipe sensor
Pipe in thermistor
CN-REMO (GN)
Wired remote controller
Wired remote control connection
CN-ROOM (YL)
Room sensor
Room air thermistor
CN-DAMPER
Damper Controller
Damper connection
CN-AIRC
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner connection
CN-WF
Wifi
Wifi Module connection
Table 108: DIP Switch Settings.
Dip Switch Settings
OFF
ON
Description
Communication
Off (default)
—
—
SW2
CYCLE
Off (default)
—
SW3
GROUP
Master
Slave
Group control setting using wired remote controller.
Dry contact mode setting.
1. Variable: Auto/manual mode can be chosen using the wide wired
remote controller or wireless remote controller (factory setting is
the manual mode).
2. Auto: For dry contact, it is always auto mode.
SW1
—
SW4
DRY
CONTACT
Variable
Auto
SW5
EXTRA1
Off
On
• ON: Fan operates continuously.
• OFF: Default (Fan does not operate continuously).
SW6
HEATER
Off
On
• ON: Automatic heater operation.
• OFF: Default (manual heater operation).
SW7
Off
SW8
Off
To operate the indoor unit without Internal Electric Heater , Dip switch 1, 2, 6, 8 must be set OFF .
To operate the indoor unit with Internal Electric heater , Dip switch 6 must be set ON.
• SW6 ON: Automatic Heater operation: Heater operates automatically.
• SW6 OFF: Manual Heater operation: Owner ’s involvement is required for on/off operation.
If you operate the indoor unit with Internal Electric heater with Dip switch 5, note the following:
• SW5 ON: Fan operates continuously. During defrosting or oil return operation, uninterrupted heating can be attained, as a result of
continuous heater and fan operation.
• SW5 OFF: Fan discontinuous operation. There would be a reduction in heating capacity while defrosting or oil return operation.
172
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Factory Supplied Parts and Materials
Factory Supplied Materials
• Owner’s Manual
• Installation Manual
• Simple Controller with Mode Selection (AKB72955816)1
Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air handling indoor
units are also referenced by Model No. PQRCVCL0QW.
1
Required Tools
•
•
•
•
•
Level
Screwdriver
Electric drill
Hole core drill
Flaring tool set
•
•
•
•
Torque wrenches
Hexagonal wrench
Gas-leak detector
Thermometer
WARNING
Installation work must be performed by trained personnel and in accordance with national wiring standards and all local or other applicable codes.
Improper installation can result in fire, electric shock, physical injury, or death.
Read all instructions before installing this product. Become familiar with the unit’s components and connections, and the order of installation. Incorrect
installation can degrade or prevent proper operation.
Selecting the Best Location
Do’s
• Place the unit where air circulation through the ducts will not be
blocked.
• Place the unit where drainage can be obtained easily.
• Place the unit where noise prevention is taken into consideration.
• Ensure there is sufficient strength to bear the load of the indoor
unit.
• Ensure there is sufficient maintenance space.
• Locate the indoor unit in a location that is level, and where it can
be easily connected to the outdoor unit / branch distribution unit.
Don’ts
•
Do not install the unit near a heat or steam source, or where
considerable amounts of oil, iron powder, or flour are used.
•
Do not install the unit where sulfuric acid and flammable or corrosive gases are generated, vented into, or stored.
•
Do not install the unit near high-frequency generators.
•
Do not install the unit near a doorway.
The unit may be damaged, may malfunction, and/or will not
operate as designed if installed in any of the conditions
listed.
Note:
If the unit is installed near a body of water, certain components are at risk of being corroded. Appropriate anti-corrosion methods should be taken
for the unit and all components.
Volatile Organic Compounds
Indoor Units (IDUs) should not be placed in an environment where the IDUs may be exposed to harmful volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
or in environments where there is improper air make up or supply or inadequate ventilation. If there are concerns about VOCs in the environment where the IDUs are installed, proper air make up or supply and/or adequate ventilation should be provided. Additionally, in buildings
where IDUs will be exposed to VOCs consider a factory-applied epoxy coating to the fan coils for each IDU.
Installing in an Area Exposed to Unconditioned Air
In some installation applications, areas (floors, walls) in some rooms may be exposed to unconditioned air (room may be above or next to an
unheated garage or storeroom). To countermeasure:
• Verify that carpet is or will be installed (carpet may increase the temperature by three degrees).
• Add insulation between the floor joists.
• Install radiant heat or another type of heating system to the floor.
Installing in an Area with High Humidity Levels
If the environment is prone to humidity levels of 80% or more (near the ocean, lakes, etc.) or where steam could collect in the plenum:
• Install additional insulation to the indoor unit (glass wool insulation >13/32 inches thick).
• Install additional insulation to the refrigerant piping (insulation >13/16 inches thick).
• Seal all gaps between the indoor unit and the ceiling tiles (make the area air tight) so that humidity does not transfer from the plenum to the
conditioned space. Also, add a ceiling grille for ventilation.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
173
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
Note:
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Figure 230:General and Duct Connection Dimensions.
Figure 229:Clearance Requirements.
Access Holes
for Conduit
More than
13-25/32
Refrigerant Piping
Connections
More than 23-5/8
clearance from
access panels
for Service
Unit : inch
0 (zero)
0 (zero)
Drain Connections
for Horizontal Install
More than
13-25/32
Filter Access
Figure 231:Location of Access Holes and Piping Connections.
Drain Connections
for Vertical Install
H
G
J
I
Top
Refrigerant
connections
A
J
Drain connections
for horizontal right
application
Drain connections
for horizontal left
application
Drain
connections
for upflow
application
D
B
Front
Air filter cover
C
Side-right
F
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Access Holes
for Conduit
Unit: inch
E
Bottom
Wiring
Knock out
Dimensions
ODU VAHU
Capacity
(kBtu/h)
Multi
Zone
174
A
B
C
Height Width Depth
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Refrigerant
Pipe size
CommPower unication
Liquid
Refrigerant
Pipe
Connections
Gas
Liquid
Gas
18
24
48-5/8
18
21-3/8 1-9/16 17-1/2
20
17
12-1/8 1-11/16
7/8
1/4
1/2
3/8
5/8
36
55-1/8
25
21-3/8 1-9/16 24-1/2
20
24
12-1/8 1-11/16
7/8
3/8
5/8
3/8
5/8
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Do not install the screws on the front and back of the unit; doing so may block filter installation.
>1 inch
Vertical (Downflow) Installation
The Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit can be field-converted to vertical downflow operation. The
Use > 6 Screws (M4*25L)
optional vertical downflow kit is required. Downflow kit PNDFJ0 is required for 18-24MBH NJ chassis
units and downflow kit PNDFK0 is required for 36MBH NK chassis units. The coil must be removed and
repositioned in the chassis with the brackets of the downflow kit. For installation details, refer to the
instructions included with the kit.
Figure 233: Chassis after Downflow
Field Conversion.
Air filter cover
Refrigerant
connections
Drain
connections
for downflow
application
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
175
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Units can be installed in a choice of vertical upflow, vertical downflow (with optional downflow kit), or horizontal (left
or right side) configurations.
Figure 232:Vertical Installation /
Vertical (Upflow) Installation
Attaching the Bottom Duct.
• Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation.
Field Supplied
• To maintain proper air flow, minimum height clearance is 14 inches.
Supply Air Duct
• Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work.
• Air handler platform should be sturdy enough to support the frame, plus any accessories (e.g., filter
box).
• To prevent air leaks, seal all duct work according to local codes, but make sure that filter access is still
Field Supplied
Return Air Duct /
Plenum
unobstructed.
• Vibration isolators (field supplied) must be installed between the unit frame and the platform. If necessary, provide the installing contractor with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be added
and how it should be positioned.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Horizontal Installation
• Units may be installed in horizontal left or horizontal right configuration. Horizontal left is the factory default configuration. For
horizontal right, the unit must be field converted. The horizontal
right conversion requires removing the internal drain pan from the
left side of the unit and reinstalling on the right side. No conversion kit is required. Refer to the installation manual for details.
• Units must be installed so that the access panels face to the side,
not facing up or down.
• Installation must be in accordance with all relevant building
codes, which may necessitate the installation of an external
condensate pan (position the unit in or above the external condensate pan).
• If the units are going to be suspended, use angled steel support
brackets with threaded rods to provide support from the bottom.
The brackets / threaded rods should be comparatively bigger /
longer than the unit, and each must be centered on the part of
the frame it supports.
• If the unit will not be suspended, use angled steel support
brackets, but also add vibration isolators (field supplied) to avoid
sound transmission. If necessary, provide the installing contractor with an illustration of where the vibration isolator should be
added and how it should be positioned.
• Unit must be positioned properly for plenum / duct installation.
• Plenum must be strong and secure enough to support the installation of adapter collars to accommodate duct work.
Figure 234: Typical Horizontal Left Installation.
Field-Supplied
Supply Air Duct
Field Supplied
Return Air Duct / Plenum
>3/8 inch Threaded Rod
>1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch Angle
A
B
Recommended length >26 inches
with a 2-inch clearance on both
sides of the unit
C
Suspension Bolt Locations
Figure 235: Typical Horizontal Right Installation.
Field Supplied
Return Air Duct / Plenum
To ensure proper drainage for horizontal installations, unit must be
installed within ±1/8 inches level of the unit’s length and width.
Field-Supplied
Supply Air Duct
>3/8 inch Threaded Rod
>1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch Angle
A
Recommended length >26 inches
with a 2-inch clearance on both
sides of the unit
B
C
Suspension Bolt Locations
Table 109: Bracket / Bolt Position Dimensions for Horizontal Left and
Horizontal Right Installation.
Capacity
(Btu/h)
18,000
24,000
36,000
176
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
A
4
4
4
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Dimensions (inches)
B
23
23
29
C
41-11/32
41-11/32
48
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Installing the Ducts
Figure 236:Securing the Ducts to the Unit.
• Use more than ten (10) screws to securely attach the supply ducts to the
unit. To prevent air leaks, seal around the duct opening before the duct is
secure.
• To prevent vibration transmission, install flexible connectors between ducts
and the unit. The flexible connectors must be made of a heat-resistant
material at the discharge connection if an electric heater is installed.
• Duct work must be insulated and covered with vapor barrier when routed
through unconditioned spaces. Include enough insulation to prevent
condensate from forming on the ducts.
• Fibrous glass ducts could be used as a substitute if built and installed in accordance with the most recent edition of the Sheet Metal and
Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National Associate (SMACNA) standard.
• Also, fibrous duct work and acoustical insulation lining must also follow National Fire Protection Standard 90A or B as tested by UL
Standard 181 for Class 1 air ducts.
Installing the Drain System
General Specifications
• To prevent property damage, optimize drain system performance by installing both a primary and secondary drain line, and properly size
the condensate traps.
• The primary and secondary drain line must be trapped to allow proper drainage of condensate water. If the secondary drain line is not used,
it must be capped.
•
Do not block the filter access panel when installing the condensate drain piping. Prime the primary and secondary condensate traps
after running both to the drain pan.
• If the unit is installed above an inhabited space, add a field-supplied external condensate pan that runs underneath the entire frame (to
prevent damage from overflow). The additional external condensate line should run from the unit to the external condensate pan.
• Drain all generated condensate from the external condensate pan to an appropriate area. Install a trap in the condensate lines as near to
the indoor unit coil as possible.
• For horizontal right operation, the drain pan must be removed from the interior left side of the unit and reinstalled on the right side.
• All condensate must be drained from the external condensate pan to some noticeable area.
Figure 237: Typical Vertical Up/Down
Installation Drain System.
Figure 238: Typical Horizontal Left/Right
Installation Drain System.
• To prevent overflow, the outlet of each trap
should be positioned below its connection to the
condensate pan.
• All traps should be primed, insulated, and leak
tested if located above an inhabited space.
• Use a 3/4-inch PVC male pipe thread fitting at
the condensate pan connection. Tighten gently.
• Point the drain hose down for easier flow.
•
Do not just use the pipe joint or PVC /
CPVC piping on the indoor unit drain line connections. Use only Teflon tape.
• Design the drain system to plan for winter
operation (condensate line may freeze up if
condensate does not properly drain away).
Field-Supplied
Drain Pan
Drain Piping
Field-Supplied
Drain Pan
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Drain Piping
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
177
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
>10 Screws
(M4*25L)
• It may be necessary to add internal acoustical insulation lining for a metal
duct system if it does not include a 90° elbow and ten (10) feet between the
main duct and the first branch.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Drain Piping Specifications
• Drain piping must have downward gradient of at
least 1/50 to 1/100; to prevent reverse flow, slope
should not be straight up and down.
•
Do not damage the drain port on the indoor unit
when connecting the field-supplied drain piping.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Figure 239:Close up of Drain Piping Connection.
Drain Piping Insulation
(Field Supplied)
Drain Piping
(Field Supplied)
Unit
Drain Hole
Gaps Should Not Be Present
Field-Installed U-Trap Specifications
To prevent leaks cause by a block in the intake air filter, install a U-Trap.
A ≥ 2-9/16 inches
B ≥ 2C
C ≥ 2 x SP
SP = External Pressure in. WG
Figure 240:Installing the U-Trap.
Example:
3/4-inch Connector
External Pressure= 0.4 in WG
A ≥ 2-9/16 inches
B ≥ 1-7/12 inches
C ≥ 19/24 inches
Insulating the Refrigerant and
Drain Piping
B
C
U-Trap
A
Figure 241: Vertical Primary and
Secondary Drain Layout.
Figure 242: Horizontal Primary and
Secondary Drain Layout.
Ensure all piping is insulated. Exposed piping can cause
burns if touched.
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
Drain Access Hole
Field-installed vapor and liquid refrigerant piping lines must be
properly and completely covered in insulation (up to the indoor
unit piping connections) and must comply with federal, state,
and local requirements. Any exposed piping may generate
condensate or will cause burns if touched. Insulation for this
field-installed refrigerant piping must have a minimum heat
resistance of 248°F.
If the indoor unit is installed and is operated at an extended
period in a highly humid environment (dew point temperature >73°F), however, condensate will form. To prevent this
phenomenon, install adiabatic glass wool insulation with a
thickness of 7/16 to 13/16 inches thick. Also, install glass wool
insulation on all indoor units that are located in the ceiling
plenum.
Air Filter Cover
Supplementary Drain with a
Proper Trap (Field Supplied Kit
Can Be Used)
Main Drain with Suitable Trap. (Field-Supplied
Trap with Sufficient Depth Can Be Used.
Standard Size P-Traps Cannot Be Used.
Figure 244: Insulating the Refrigerant Piping and Refrigerant Piping
Connections.
Drain Piping Insulation
Drain piping insulation must be 7/32 inches thick, minimum.
Figure 243:Close Up of Refrigerant Piping Connection Insulation.
Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field Supplied)
Refrigerant Piping Insulation
(Field Supplied)
Overlap Piping Insulation
Insulation Clip (Field Supplied)
Gaps Should Not be Present
178
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Connection for Liquid Piping
Refrigerant Piping
Insulation (Field Supplied)
Insulation Zip Tie (Field Supplied)
Refrigerant Piping Insulation (Field
Supplied)
Connection for Vapor Piping
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Power Wiring / Communications Cable Guidelines
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Follow manufacturer’s circuit diagrams in the technical manuals.
Confirm power source specifications.
Confirm that the electrical capacity is sufficient.
Starting current must be maintained ±10 percent of the rated current marked on the outdoor unit name plate.
Confirm cable thickness specifications.
It is recommended that a circuit breaker is installed, especially if conditions could become wet or moist.
Include a disconnect in the power wiring system, add an air gap contact separation of at least 1/8 inch in each active (phase) conductor.
• Loose wiring may cause unit to malfunction, overheat, and catch fire, resulting in severe injury or death.
• Terminal screws may become loose during transport. Properly tighten the terminal connections during installation.
A voltage drop may cause the following problems:
• Magnetic switch vibration, fuse breaks, or disturbance to the normal function of an overload protection device.
• Compressor will not receive the proper starting current.
Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable
Figure 245:Connecting the Power Wiring and Communications Cable.
1. To access the terminal block, first unscrew the top front panel,
and then unscrew the cover from the control box.
2. Knockout the access holes for the wiring. Insert the power wiring/
communications cable from the outdoor unit or branch distribution
unit (Multi F MAX systems only) through the conduits, pass the
conduits through the designated access holes, and then insert
the conduits into the control box. To prevent electromagnetic
interference and product malfunction, leave a space between the
power wiring and communications cable outside of the indoor
unit.
Top Front
Panel
Control
Box Cover
Access Holes
for Wiring
3. Connect the power wiring and communications cables to the
appropriate terminals on the indoor unit control board. Verify that
the color and terminal numbers from the outdoor unit or branch
distribution unit (Multi F MAX systems only) wiring match the
color and terminal numbers on the indoor unit.
Nut
Conduit
Mounting Plate
4. Fill in any gaps around the conduit access holes with sealant to
prevent foreign particles from entering the indoor unit.
1/2-inch Conduit
Connection Cable
Communications Cable
Figure 246:Indoor Unit to Outdoor Unit / Branch Distribution Unit (Multi F MAX
systems only) Power Wiring / Communications Cable Connections.
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block or
Branch Distribution Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
(Multi F MAX Systems Only)
GND
3 or S
3
GND
GRN /
YLW
RD
BL
BR
1(L1 ) 2 (L2)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
179
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
Note:
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Controller Options
AKB729558161 Wired Controller.
•
•
•
•
•
Operation Display
Panel
Temperature Control
Button
Fan Speed Button
Operation Display Panel: Displays operation conditions.
Temperature Control Button: Sets desired temperature.
Fan Speed Button: Sets desired fan speed.
On / Off Button: Turns system operation on and off.
Mode Selection Check Button: Selects the operation mode: Cooling, Heating, Auto, Dry
(Dehumidification), or Fan.
On/Off Button
FA N
SPEED
TEMP
OPER
MODE
Mode Selection
Check Button
Simple Mode Controllers for the vertical-horizontal air
handling indoor units are also referenced by Model No.
PQRCVCL0QW.
1
Each function will display on the LED for about three (3) seconds when the power is first cycled on.
Wired Controller Connections
Controllers can connect to the indoor unit in one of two different ways.
1. LG Wired Remote Extension Cable with Molex plug (PZCWRC1; sold separately) that connects to the CN-REMO terminal on the indoor
unit PCB.
2. Field-supplied controller cable that connects to the indoor unit terminal block (must be at least UL2547 or UL1007, 22 AWG, two-core,
one-shield core, at least FT-6 rated if local electric and building codes require plenum cable usage).
Figure 247:PZCWRC1 LG Wired Remote Extension Cable.
Verify the connectors are properly inserted.
C/BOX Cable (Plug type)
FAN
SPEED
TEMP
OPER
MODE
Extension cable
To Indoor Unit
CN-REMO
Terminal
Figure 248:Wired Controller Connection on the Indoor Unit Terminal Block.
CN-REMO
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
BK
12V
Power Ground
1(L1 ) 2 (L2)
3
RD
180
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
GND
Outdoor Unit
Terminal
Block or controller cable, make sure to connect
When
using field-supplied
Branch Distribution
UnittoTerminal
Block
the yellow
yellow (communications
wire), red to red (12V power
(Multi F MAX
wire),Systems
and black Only)
to black (ground wire) terminals from the remote
controller to the indoor unit terminal blocks.
3 or S
GND
GRN /
YLW
RD
BL
YL
Comm.
BR
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling indoor units include an LG-supplied wired controller (AKB72955816)1,
but other optional LG-supplied wired controllers are available. The wireless handheld controller
(Model No. PQWRHQ0FDB) is also an optional accessory with use of the wired controller.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
FOUR-WAY VAHU INDOOR UNITS
Installation and Best Layout Practices
Wired Controller Placement
Wired controllers include a sensor to detect room temperature. To maintain
comfort levels in the conditioned space, the wired controller must be installed in
a location away from direct sunlight, high humidity, and where it could be directly
exposed to cold air. Controller must be installed four (4) to five (5) feet above the
floor where its LED display can be read easily, in an area with good air circulation, and where it can detect an average room temperature.
Hanging the Wired Controller
1. The controller wiring / cable can be installed in one of three directions: top,
back, or on the right side. If top or right side installation is desired, remove
cable guide grooves on the controller, and then position wiring / cable on applicable side.
NO
ot e
Cont
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
NO
4 to 5 feet
above the floor
TEMP
Rem
roller
NO
Figure 250:Removing the Cable Guide Grooves.
Top
Top
Back
2. Choose and mark the area of installation, and then screw the wall plate into
place (using the provided parts). Install the controller wall plate to fit the electrical box if one is present. Ensure that no gaps exist between the wall plate
and the wall itself.
3. Arrange wiring / cables so as not to interfere with the controller circuitry.
Position the wired controller on the wall plate. Snap into place by pressing the
bottom part of the wired controller onto the wall plate. Make sure that no gaps
exist between the wired controller and the wall plate on all sides.
YES
TEMP
Remote Controlle r
Figure 251:Attaching the
Wall Plate.
4. To remove wired controller from the wall plate, insert a screwdriver into the
two holes at the bottom. Twist screwdriver to release controller.
Do not
damage the controller components when removing.
Right
Side
Right
Side
Figure 252:Installing /
Removing the Controller.
Installing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Removing the Controller
Wall
Wall
Assigning the Thermistor for Temperature Detection
Each indoor unit includes a return air thermistor assigned to sense the temperature. If a wired controller is installed, there is a choice of
sensing temperature with either the indoor unit return air thermistor or the thermistor in the wired controller. It is also an option to set both
thermistors to sense temperature so that indoor unit bases its operation on the first thermistor to reach the designated temperature differential. For applicable indoor units, an optional Remote Temperature Sensor can be used in lieu of the return air thermistor—either alone or in
conjunction with a wired controller thermistor as previously described.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
|
181
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
•
•
•
•
•
Do not install the wired controller near or in:
Drafts or dead spots behind doors and in corners
Hot or cold air from ducts
Radiant heat from the sun or appliances
Concealed pipes and chimneys
An area where temperatures are uncontrolled, such as an outside wall
Figure 249:Proper Location for the Wired Controller.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
182
| VERTICAL-HORIZONTAL
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
APPLICATION
GUIDELINES
“Equipment Selection Procedure” on page 184
“Placement Considerations” on page 191
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
To choose the multi-zone system that is the most appropriate for the space, as with traditional air-conditioning systems, follow similar
protocols outlined in Manual J from the Air Conditioning Contractors of America (ACCA; see www.acca.org).
1. Obtain the design conditions, and calculate the maximum cool and heat loads for the structure.
2. Select the equipment (choosing the appropriate indoor units and outdoor unit):
• Determine number of zones.
• Determine total number of indoor units (refer to zone load calculations when choosing indoor units).
• Determine number of indoor units allocated to each outdoor unit, considering allowable indoor unit connections, both indoor unit and
outdoor unit capacities, and system piping capabilities.
3. Determine the corrected capacity for the indoor units and outdoor unit using LATS Multi F software (preferred method) or:
• System Combination Tables.
• Capacity Tables (it may be necessary to interpolate).
• Capacity Coefficient Factors (such as refrigerant line length derates, design condition derates, defrost operation derate [heating mode],
altitude derate [if applicable]).
4. Compare corrected capacities to load calculations.
5. Reselect equipment if necessary.
Obtain Design Conditions, Calculate Maximum Cool / Heat Loads
Obtain the winter outdoor / indoor temperature and summer and winter outdoor / indoor temperature design parameters for the location in
which the system is installed. Determine if summer or winter design gains, relative humidity, and building features like skylights, orientation,
number of occupants, etc., would change the total heat loss / gain and sensible / latent heat gain, and then calculate the maximum cool and
heat loads for the space (using Manual J or energy modeling programs).
Select the Equipment
Determine the Number of Zones
Multi F and Multi F with LG RED heat pump systems can cool or heat, but not simultaneously. When designing larger-capacity Multi F heat
pump systems or a Multi F MAX system, the designer may be able to combine spaces with similar load profiles located near or adjacent to
each other into “thermal zones.” After combining like spaces into zones that will be served by a single (or grouped) indoor unit(s), calculate
the peak cooling and heating loads for each zone.
Choosing the Appropriate Indoor Units
Determine the appropriate indoor unit capacity that satisfies the given zone load calculations, and choose how many (and which styles of)
indoor units will be required. See Table 90 for allowable indoor unit to outdoor unit connections, and the maximum number of connectable
indoor units on each Multi F and Multi F MAX outdoor unit. When choosing indoor units, also consider the cooling and heating CFM, featured
airflow specifications, and static pressure (if applicable) for each indoor unit.
Avoid oversizing indoor units in an attempt to increase the air exchange rate in the space. Multi F and Multi F MAX systems are designed for
minimum airflow over the coil to maximize latent capacity while cooling, maintain a comfortable, consistent discharge air temperature while
heating, and minimize fan motor power consumption. In extreme cases, oversizing the indoor units may affect outdoor unit size selection and
compromise the outdoor unit’s ability to effectively match the space load(s).
For proper system operation:
1. At least two indoor units must be connected to the outdoor unit.
2. Total connected indoor unit nominal capacity should be a minimum 40% and a maximum of 133% of outdoor unit nominal capacity.
3. To calculate the connected total indoor unit nominal capacity, simply sum up the nominal capacities of all indoor units.
• For high static duct and vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units, a 1.3 multiplier must first be applied before adding to the sum of
other indoor units.
• When high static duct and / or vertical-horizontal air handling indoor units are the only connected indoor units, the multiplier is 1.2.
For allocated capacity information, see the combination tables in the "Multi F / Multi F MAX Combination Data Manual" on www.lg-dfs.com. For
performance data, see "Multi F / Multi F MAX Performance Data Manual" on on www.lg-dfs.com. Also refer to the appropriate manuals on www.
lg-dfs.com for combination and capacity data for Multi F with LG RED / Multi F MAX with LG RED units.
184
|
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE
Multiplier Examples
Example 1
Outdoor Unit: LMU540HV First Indoor Unit: + Second Indoor Unit: + Third Indoor Unit:
LMCN125HV
LSN090HSV4
LVN360HV4
Total Capacity Index =
12
+
9
Branch Distribution Unit (PMBD3620)
Example 2
Branch Distribution Unit (PMBD3641)
+
36 x 1.3
= 67.8 < 73
Acceptable
Combination
Outdoor Unit: LMU540HV
Total Capacity Index =
First Indoor Unit: + Second Indoor Unit:
LVN240HV4
LVN240HV4
24 x 1.2
+
24 x 1.2
= 57.6 < 73
Acceptable
Combination
Table 110: Allowable Indoor Unit to Multi F/ Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit Connections.
Indoor units
ART COOL Mirror
ART COOL Gallery
Standard Wall Mounted
Ceiling Concealed DuctLow Static
Ceiling Concealed DuctHigh Static
Four-Way Ceiling Cassette
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handler
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
|
185
Application Guidelines
Model Type
Outdoor units
LMU18CHV LMU24CHV LMU30CHV LMU36CHV LMU480HV LMU540HV LMU600HV
Indoor Unit Nominal
Maximum No. of Connectable Indoor Units
Capacity (Btu/h)
2
3
4
4
8
8
8
9,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
12,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
18,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
9,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
12,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
7,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
9,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
12,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
15,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
18,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
24,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
9,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
12,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
18,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
24,000
O
O
O
O
O
36,000
O
O
O
7,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
9,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
12,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
18,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
18,000
O
O
O
O
O
O
24,000
O
O
O
O
O
36,000
O
O
O
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE
Table 112: Allowable Indoor Unit to Multi F/ Multi F MAX with LGRED Outdoor Unit Connections.
Indoor units
Model Type
Indoor Unit Nominal
Capacity (Btu/h)
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
ART COOL Mirror
ART COOL Gallery
Standard Wall Mounted
Ceiling Concealed DuctLow Static
Ceiling Concealed DuctHigh Static
Four-Way Ceiling Cassette
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handler
LMU180HHV
2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
9,000
12,000
18,000
9,000
12,000
7,000
9,000
12,000
15,000
18,000
24,000
9,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
36,000
7,000
9,000
12,000
18,000
18,000
24,000
36,000
Outdoor units
LMU240HHV
LMU300HHV
LMU360HHV
Maximum No. of Connectable Indoor Units
3
4
5
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
LMU420HHV
6
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Choosing the Appropriate Outdoor Unit
After all indoor units are properly sized to offset the applicable loads in each zone, select the outdoor unit by choosing a size that meets
both the load-cooling requirement, and offsets the sum of the heating load. Then, the system’s combination ratio should be evaluated and
confirmed it is within the allowable range (the combination ratio compares the nominal capacity of all connected indoor units to the nominal
capacity of the outdoor unit serving them). The total nominal capacity of all indoor units should be smaller than the total nominal capacity of
the outdoor unit. If the combination ratio is more than 100%, the designer is undersizing the outdoor unit relative to the combined nominal capacity of the connected indoor units. In some designs, oversized indoor units may be unavoidable in the case where the smallest size indoor
unit available from LG is larger than what is necessary to satisfy the zone load. This scenario may also occur when an indoor unit selection
one size down from the selected unit is slightly short of fulfilling the design load requirements, and the designer must choose the next largest size unit. Sometimes it is recommended to choose a larger capacity outdoor unit if the installation space is big enough. Also, it may be
prudent to oversize the outdoor unit to address those times when the weather conditions may exceed the design conditions, to minimize the
possibility of ventilation systems that causes the space temperature to drift outside design parameters, or when the indoor unit’s entering air
temperature falls outside the approved design temperature range.
Table 111: Multi F/ Multi F Max Rated Outdoor Unit Capacity.
Rated Capacity
(Btu/h)*
Connectable
Indoor
Units
186
|
Cooling
Heating
Minimum No. of Connectable IDUs
Maximum No. of Connectable IDUs
Maximum Capacity Index
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Outdoor Units
LMU18CHV LMU24CHV LMU30CHV LMU36CHV LMU480HV LMU540HV LMU600HV
17,000
22,000
2
2
24,000
20,000
24,000
2
3
33,000
30,000
32,000
2
4
40,000
32,000
36,000
2
4
48,000
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
48,000
54,000
2
8
65,000
52,500
58,000
2
8
73,000
60,000
64,000
2
8
81,000
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE
Table 113: Multi F/ Multi F Max with LGRED Rated Outdoor Unit Capacity.
Rated Capacity
(Btu/h)*
Connectable
Indoor
Units
Cooling
Heating
Minimum No. of Connectable IDUs
Maximum No. of Connectable IDUs
Maximum Capacity Index
LMU180HHV
18,000
22,000
2
2
24,000
LMU240HHV
24,000
26,000
2
3
33,000
Outdoor Units
LMU300HHV
28,400
28,600
2
4
40,000
LMU360HHV
36,000
41,000
2
5
48,000
LMU420HHV
42,000
45,000
2
6
56,000
Determine the Corrected Capacity
The corrected cooling / heating capacity is different from the rated cooling / heating capacity. The corrected capacity includes changes in
unit performance after considering design temperatures, available capacity that can be allocated from the outdoor unit, pressure drop due
to refrigerant line length, defrost operation in heating mode, and (if applicable) altitude. Depending on the location of the building, additional
capacity correction factors may need to be applied.
Rated cooling capacity ratings are obtained with air entering the indoor unit at 80ºF dry bulb (DB) and 67ºF wet bulb (WB), and outdoor ambient conditions of 95ºF dry bulb (DB) and 75ºF wet bulb (WB). Rated heating capacity ratings are obtained with air entering the indoor unit at
70ºF dry bulb (DB) and 60ºF wet bulb (WB) and outdoor ambient conditions of 47ºF dry bulb (DB) and 43ºF wet bulb (WB).
To evaluate the total outdoor unit capacity at design conditions perform a selection using LATS Multi F software (preferred method) or reference the Performance Data Capacity Tables found in the Multi F outdoor unit section in this manual. All design temperatures are not explicitly
shown in the charts, therefore, interpolation may be necessary to calculate the capacity for specific design conditions. Based on the premise
that capacity follows a linear curve, the following formula can be applied:
(y - y1) / (y2 - y1) = (x - x1) / (x2 - x1)
Where
y = Missing Capacity (Capacity at the Design Temperature).1
y1 = Capacity at Lower Temperature (Smaller value of the two nearest published TC datapoints).
y2 = Capacity at Higher Temperature (Higher value of the two nearest published TC datapoints).
x = Design Temperature (Temperature not shown in published capacity tables).2
x1 = (Smaller value of the two nearest published temperature datapoints).
x2 = (Larger value of the two nearest published temperature datapoints).
1
Median between two published Total Capacity [TC] Btu/h datapoints in the capacity table.
2
Median between two nearest published temperature datapoints.
Using the Indoor Unit Cooling and Heating Capacity Tables
The datapoints shown in the indoor unit cooling and heating capacity charts are based on (and convey) an indoor unit operating with maximum possible refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit and before any derates are applied. In other words, the capacities displayed reflect what
the indoor unit would produce if it was the only indoor unit that required capacity, and the outdoor unit did not have to allocate any capacity to
another indoor unit.
System operation with a combination of indoor units is not conveyed in these charts, however, the information can be used to calculate
indoor unit allocated capacity (without using the system combination tables). Simply calculate by using the formula:
Qidu(combi) = Qodu(rated) x Qidu(rated)
ΣQidu(rated)
Where
Qidu(combi)
Qodu(rated)
Qidu(rated)
ΣQidu(rated)
=
=
=
=
Individual Indoor Unit Combination Capacity.
Outdoor Unit Rated Capacity.
Individual Indoor Unit Rated Capacity.
Total Connected Indoor Unit Rated Capacity.
• The formula can be used to find individual indoor unit capacity for Multi F MAX systems.
• A more accurate method to determine expected capacity would be to apply the outdoor unit’s corrected capacity instead of rated capacity.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
|
187
Application Guidelines
Using the Outdoor Unit Cooling and Heating Capacity Tables
EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Using the System Combination Tables
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Multi F system combination tables illustrate how each indoor unit receives a percentage of total outdoor unit rated capacity. Allocation is
based on:
• Combinations of Non-Ducted Indoor Units
• Combinations of Ducted Indoor Units
• Combinations of Mixed Non-Ducted and Ducted Indoor Units
Multi F MAX system combination tables only show the total connected indoor unit capacity, but individual indoor unit capacity can be
calculated using the formula:
Qidu(combi) = Qodu(rated) x Qidu(rated)
ΣQidu(rated)
A more accurate method to determine expected capacity would be to apply the outdoor unit’s corrected capacity instead of rated capacity.
Capacity Coefficient Factors
Refrigerant Line Length Derates
For air-cooled systems, a capacity correction factor may have to be applied to account for the length of the system’s refrigerant pipe. Rate of
change in capacity due to increased piping lengths is shown in Table 114, Table 11593, and Table 11694.
Table 114: Multi F Outdoor Unit (Multiple Piping) to Indoor Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derates.
Piping Length (feet)
Cooling Capacity (%)
7,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
25.0
32.8
49.2
65.6
82.0
100.0
98.4
95.8
93.2
90.6
100.0
99.2
97.8
96.4
95.0
25.0
32.8
49.2
65.6
82.0
100.0
98.0
94.8
91.6
88.4
100.0
99.0
97.4
95.8
94.2
25.0
32.8
49.2
65.6
82.0
100.0
97.6
93.8
89.9
86.1
100.0
98.6
96.4
94.1
91.9
25.0
32.8
49.2
65.6
82.0
100.0
97.2
93.0
88.8
84.6
100.0
98.2
95.4
92.6
89.8
25.0
32.8
49.2
65.6
82.0
100.0
98.6
96.4
94.1
91.9
100.0
99.6
99.0
98.3
97.7
25.0
32.8
49.2
65.6
82.0
100.0
98.2
95.4
92.4
89.6
100.0
99.2
98.0
96.6
95.4
9,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
12,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
15,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
18,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
24,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
188
|
Heating Capacity (%)
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE
Table 115: Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit to Branch Distribution Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derates.
Main Piping Length (feet)
16.4
32.8
49.2
65.6
82.0
98.4
114.8
131.2
147.6
164.0
180.4
Cooling Capacity (%)
100.0
98.8
97.3
95.8
94.3
92.8
91.3
89.8
88.3
86.8
85.3
Heating Capacity (%)
100.0
99.6
99.2
98.7
98.3
97.8
97.4
96.9
96.5
96.0
95.6
Figure 253: Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit to Branch Distribution Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derate Chart.
100.0
Capacity (%)
95.0
Heating
capacity
90.0
Cooling
capacity
85.0
Application Guidelines
80.0
75.0
70.0
0
32.8
65.6
98.4
Main piping length (ft.)
131.2
164.0
Table 116: Multi F MAX Branch Distribution Unit to Indoor Unit Refrigerant Line Length Derates.
Piping Length (feet)
Cooling Capacity (%)
7,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
180.4
Heating Capacity (%)
16.4
32.8
49.2
100.0
98.0
96.0
100.0
99.5
98.9
16.4
32.8
49.2
100.0
97.5
95.0
100.0
98.8
97.5
16.4
32.8
49.2
100.0
97.0
94.0
100.0
98.3
96.5
16.4
32.8
49.2
100.0
97.2
93.0
100.0
98.2
95.4
16.4
32.8
49.2
100.0
98.3
96.5
100.0
99.5
99.0
16.4
32.8
49.2
100.0
97.8
95.5
100.0
99.2
98.4
16.4
32.8
49.2
100.0
97.9
95.7
100.0
98.8
97.6
9,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
12,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
15,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
18,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
24,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
36,000 Btu/h Indoor Unit Models
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
|
189
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
EQUIPMENT SELECTION PROCEDURE
Altitude Correction Factor
The impact of air density must be considered on systems installed at a significant altitude above sea level, therefore, locally accepted
altitude correction factors must be applied.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Defrost Correction Factor for Heating Operation
The outdoor unit heating capacity may need to be adjusted for frost accumulation on air-cooled systems. If design day conditions are below
the dewpoint of the surrounding air, frost may not be a problem and no correction factor is needed. In certain weather conditions, however,
frost may form and accumulate on the air-cooled outdoor unit coil and impact the coils ability to transfer heat. If significant frost accumulates
on the outdoor unit coil, a defrost algorithm will start automatically. The timing between defrost periods is determined by the system’s ability
to achieve a target head pressure value.
Capacity and AHRI ratings tables do not factor in capacity reduction when frost has accumulated on the condenser coil, nor during defrost
operation.
Integrated heating capacity values can be obtained using the formula: Table 117: Outdoor Unit Frost Accumulation Factor (Heating)1.
Entering DB (ºF)
Derate factor
A=BxC
Where:
A = Integrated Heating Capacity.
B = Value found in the Capacity Table.
C = Correction Factor for Frost Accumulation Factor (from Table 101).
19.4 23.0 26.6 32.0 37.4 41.0 44.6
0.98 0.95 0.93 0.86 0.93 0.96 1.0
At 85% outdoor air relative humidity.
The frost accumulation factor does not account for effects of snow accumulation restricting airflow
through the outdoor unit coil.
1
There will be temporary reduction in capacity when frost / ice accumulates on the outside surface of the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The level
of capacity reduction depends on a number of factors, for example, outdoor temperature (°F DB), relative humidity (RH), and the amount of frost
present.
Check the Indoor and Outdoor Unit Selection(s)
Compare the corrected cooling and heating capacities to the load calculations. Is each capacity sufficient for the zone it serves?
For each indoor unit, the corrected capacity must be at least equal to the total of the cooling design load (plus ventilation load, if applicable)
for the space(s) served by the indoor unit. For each indoor unit, the corrected capacity also must be at least equal to the total of the heating
design load (plus ventilation load, if applicable) for the space(s) and / or thermal zones served by the indoor unit.
The outdoor unit selected should be large enough to offset the total cooling load for all spaces it serves (account for ventilation air cooling
load if the ventilation air has not been pretreated to room neutral conditions). The outdoor unit should also be large enough to offset the total
heating load for all spaces it serves.
If the corrected heating capacity ratio exceeds 100%, reselect the equipment, or change the system design by moving some of the load to
another system.
System Sizing Check Formulas
1. Outdoor Unit Rated Capacity.
Qodu(rated) (From capacity tables).
2. Outdoor Unit Capacity at Ti, To Temperature.
Qodu(Ti, To) (From capacity tables).
3 Outdoor Unit Capacity Coefficient Factor.
F(Ti, To) = Qodu(Ti, To) / Qodu(rated)
4. Piping Correction Factor (From Capacity Coefficient
Factor Tables).
F(length) for each piping length
5. Individual Indoor Unit Combination Capacity.
Qidu (combi) = Qodu(rated) x Qidu(rated) / Qidu(rated-total)
6. Individual Indoor Unit Actual Capacity.
Qidu (actual) = Qodu(combi) x F(Ti, To) x F(length, altitude)
Conclusions and Recommendations
• Understand the design safety factors.
• Reference load calculations for actual cooling and heating capacities (applies in 99% of applications – consider total load when latent load
is greater than 30%).
• Verify that the sensible load of the zone is satisfied.
• Use caution when sizing to meet listed capacity specifications for the scheduled manufacturer’s equipment.
If further system design assistance is needed, or you have a unique application you would like to discuss, contact your LG sales rep.
190
|
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Selecting the Best Location for the Indoor Units
Note:
Selecting the Best Location for the Branch Distribution (BD) Unit
Note:
Branch Distribution (BD) units are used only with Multi F MAX systems to distribute the refrigerant from the outdoor unit to up to eight indoor
units. Select location indoors that will meet the following conditions:
• Within allowable parameters for proper connection to the Multi F MAX outdoor unit and indoor unit(s); refrigerant piping and wire lengths
must not exceed amounts specified by LG Electronics, U.S.A., Inc.
• Condensate drain piping is not required.
• Ensure there is enough space in the installation area for service purposes; install the refrigerant piping and electrical wiring system in an
easily accessible location.
• Level where there is enough strength to bear the weight of the BD unit.
•
Do not install the BD unit in a location where it would be subjected to strong radiation heat from heat sources.
• Avoid an installation environment where the BD unit would be exposed to heat, water, steam, oil splattering or spray.
• Install the unit in a location where any sound it generates will not disturb occupants in the surrounding rooms.
• No obstacles to air circulation around the unit; keep proper distances from ceilings, doorways, floor, walls, etc.
• Where high-frequency electrical noise / electromagnetic waves will not affect operation. Maintain proper distances between the BD unit(s)
and electric wires, audio and visual appliances, breaker / circuit panels, etc.
Selecting the Best Location for the Outdoor Unit
DANGER
To avoid the possibility of fire, do not install the unit in an area where combustible gas may generate, flow, stagnate, or leak. Failure to do
so will cause serious bodily injury or death.
WARNING
Do not install the unit in a location where acidic solution and spray (sulfur) are often used as this may cause serious bodily injury or death.
Do not use the unit in environments where oil, steam, or sulfuric gas are present as this may cause serious bodily injury or death.
CAUTION
When deciding on a location to place the outdoor unit, be sure to choose an area where run-off from defrost will not accumulate and freeze
on sidewalks or driveways which may create unsafe conditions.
Select a location for installing the outdoor unit that will meet the following general conditions:
• A location strong enough to bear the weight of the outdoor unit.
• A location that allows for optimum air flow and is easily accessible for inspection, maintenance, and service.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
|
191
Application Guidelines
Select a location for installing the indoor units that will meet the following conditions:
• Indoor Units (IDUs) should not be placed in an environment where the IDUs may be exposed to harmful volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
or in environments where there is improper air make up or supply or inadequate ventilation. If there are concerns about VOCs in the
environment where the IDUs are installed, proper air make up or supply and/ or adequate ventilation should be provided. Additionally, in
buildings where IDUs will be exposed to VOCs consider a factory-applied epoxy coating to the fan coils for each IDU.
• Within allowable parameters for proper connection to the outdoor unit (or Branch Distribution unit, if a Multi F MAX system).
• So that condensation drainage can be conveniently routed away.
• Include enough space around the indoor unit so that it is accessible for maintenance and service purposes.
• Where electrical noise / electromagnetic waves will not affect indoor unit operation. Maintain proper distances between the indoor units and
electric wires, audio and visual appliances, breaker / circuit panels, etc. If the frequency signal of the appliance is unstable, then install the
indoor unit a minimum of ten (10) feet away, and run the power and transmission cables through a conduit.
• An area that is level and with enough strength to bear the weight of the indoor unit(s).
• No obstacles to air circulation around the unit; keep proper distances from ceilings, doorways, floor, walls, etc.
• An area where operation sound won’t disturb occupants.
• An area that does not expose the indoor unit(s) to heat, water, steam, oil splattering or spray.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Selecting the Best Location for the Outdoor Unit, continued.
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
• Where piping between the outdoor unit, indoor unit(s), and BD units (Multi F MAX systems only) are within allowable limits.
• Include space for drainage to ensure condensate flows properly out of the unit when it is in heating mode. Avoid placing the outdoor unit in
a low-lying area where water could accumulate.
• Where it will not be subjected to direct thermal radiation from other heat sources, nor an area that would not expose the outdoor unit to
heat or steam like discharge from boiler stacks, chimneys, steam relief ports, other air conditioning units, kitchen vents, plumbing vents,
and other sources of extreme temperatures.
• Where high-frequency electrical noise / electromagnetic waves will not affect operation.
• Where operating sound from the unit will not disturb inhabitants of surrounding buildings.
• Where the unit will not be exposed to direct, strong winds.
Rooftop Installations
If the outdoor unit is installed on a roof structure, be sure to level the unit. Ensure the roof structure and anchoring method are adequate for
the unit location. Consult local codes regarding rooftop mounting.
Oceanside Installation Precautions
• Install the outdoor unit on the side of the
building opposite from direct ocean winds.
• Select a location with good drainage.
• Periodically clean dust or salt particles off of
the heat exchanger with water.
Ocean winds may cause corrosion, particularly on the condenser and evaporator fins, which,
in turn could cause product malfunction or inefficient performance.
Ocean winds
Ocean winds
• Avoid installing the outdoor unit where it
would be directly exposed to ocean winds.
Additional anti-corrosion treatment may need
to be applied to the outdoor unit at oceanside
locations.
If the outdoor unit must be placed in a
location where it would be subjected to
direct ocean winds, install a concrete
windbreaker strong enough to block
any winds. Windbreaker height and
width should be more than 150% of the
outdoor unit, and be installed at least
27-1/2 inches away from the outdoor unit
to allow for airflow.
Planning for Snow and Ice
Windbreaker
Ocean winds
In climates that experience snow buildup, place the unit on a raised platform to ensure proper condenser airflow. The raised support platform
must be high enough to allow the unit to remain above possible snow drifts. Mount the unit on a field-provided stand that is higher than the
maximum anticipated snowfall for the location. Design the mounting base to prevent snow accumulation on the platform in front or back of
the unit case. If necessary, provide a field fabricated hood to keep snow and ice and/or drifting snow from accumulating on the coil surfaces.
Use inlet and discharge duct or hoods to prevent snow or rain from accumulating on the fan inlet and outlet guards. Best practice prevents
snow from accumulating on top of the unit. Consider tie-down requirements in case of high winds or where required by local codes.
192
|
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Outdoor Unit Platform Requirements
Figure 254: Outdoor Unit Foundation Requirements.
Unit: Inch
Unit: Inch
Minimum
3-15/16)
Minimum
3-15/16
21-1/2
Minimum 14-9/16
21-1/2
LMU18CHV and LMU24CHV Outdoor Units
Minimum 14-9/16
LMU30CHV and LMU36CHV Outdoor Units
Table 118: Outdoor Unit Foundation Specifications.
Outdoor Unit Type
Bolt Type
Concrete Height
Bolt Depth
LMU18CHV, LMU24CHV,
LMU30CHV, LMU36CHV
M10-J
Minimum 3-15/16 inches
Minimum 2-3/4 inches
LMU480HV, LMU540HV,
LMU600HV
M10-J
Minimum 7-7/8 inches
Minimum 2-3/4 inches
Minimum
7-7/8
Minimum 24-13/32
15-3/4
7-7/8
Figure 255: Bolting the Outdoor Unit to the Platform.
Bolting the Outdoor Unit to the Platform
1. Ensure that the concrete platform will not degrade easily, and has enough
strength to bear the weight of the unit.
2. Include an H-beam support. Firmly attach the corners, otherwise the support will
bend.
3. Use a hexagon nut.
4. Use anti-vibration material.
5. Include enough space around the concrete foundation for condensate
drainage.
6. Seal all wiring and piping access holes to prevent bugs from entering the unit.
Concrete Platform Specifications
Bolt
Bolt
Refrigerant Pipe
Connection Location
Top of Outdoor Unit
(Looking Down)
Bolt
Bolt
Figure 256: Close up of Bolt Attachment.
Anchor Bolt
M10
13/16
2-3/4~4 23/32
• Concrete foundations should be made of one part cement, two
parts sand, and four parts gravel.
• The surface of the foundation should be finished with mortar with
rounded edges, and weatherproofed.
LMU480HV, LMU540HV, LMU600HV Outdoor Units
Unit: Inch
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
|
193
Application Guidelines
Unit: Inch
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Tie-Downs and Lightening Protection
Figure 257: Lightening Protection Diagram.
Tie-Downs
• The strength of the roof must be checked before installing the
outdoor units.
• If the installation site is prone to high winds or earthquakes, when
installing on the wall or roof, securely anchor the mounting base
using a field-provided tie-down configuration approved by a local
professional engineer.
• The overall tie-down configuration must be approved by a local
professional engineer. Always refer to local code when using a
wind restraint system.
Lightning rod
Lightning rod
Protection Angle (25˚~55˚)
51.5m
feet
Lightening Protection
• To protect the outdoor unit from lightning, it should be placed within
the specified lightning safety zone.
Table 119: Safety Zone Specifications.
Building Height (feet)
66
98
148
197
Protection Angle (˚)
55
45
35
25
Safe zone
• Power cable and communication cable should be installed five (5)
feet away from lightning rod.
• A high-resistance ground system should be included to protect
against induced lightning or indirect strike.
Ground
If the building does not include lightning protection, the outdoor unit
may be damaged from a lightening strike. Inform the customer of
this possibility in advance.
Outdoor Unit Service Access and Allowable Clearances
Appropriate airflow through the outdoor unit coil is critical for proper unit operation.
• Include enough space for airflow and for service access. If installing multiple outdoor units, avoid placing the units where the discharge of
one unit will blow into the inlet side of an adjacent unit.
• If an awning is built over the unit to prevent direct sunlight or rain exposure, make sure that the discharge air of the outdoor unit isn’t restricted.
• No obstacles to air circulation around the unit; keep proper distances from ceilings, fences, floor, walls, etc. (Install a fence to prevent pests
from damaging the unit or unauthorized individuals from accessing it.)
When installing the outdoor unit, consider service, inlet, and outlet, and minimum allowable space requirements as illustrated in the following
diagrams.
Minimum 11-13/16
Sun
Strong
roo
f
wind
Minimum 11-13/16
Minimum 11-13/16
Strong
wind
Fe
obsnce or
tacl
es
Blown
air
Minimum 19-1/16
Minimum 11-13/16
Air inlet grille
Minimum 23-5/8
Ensure that the space at the back of the outdoor unit is a minimum of 11-13/16 inches, and
include a minimum of 23-5/8 inches at the right side of the unit for service.
194
|
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Unit: Inch
If the outdoor unit discharge side faces a wall, include a minimum of 19-11/16 inches
between the outdoor unit and the wall. Install the outdoor unit so that the discharge port is
set at a right angle to the wind direction.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Clearance Requirements when Different Obstacles are Present (Unit: Inch).
Obstacle on the suction side only.
m
u
inim
M
"
11
/16
-13
Obstacles on the suction side and
on both left and right sides.
Min
imu
m1
1-1
3/16
"
imu
m2
imu
3-1
Min
9/32
6"
13/1
1m1
Application Guidelines
Min
"
Obstacles above and on the air intake side. Obstacles above, on the air intake side,
and on both left and right sides
Min
imu
um
inim
M
/16"
3
1
11-
m1
1-1
3/16
"
Min
imu
Obstacle just on the
air discharge side.
Minimum 39-3/8"
Max
Minimum 39-3/8"
m1
imu
Min
6"
1/1
9-1
6"
11/1
19-
m
imu
m2
3-1
M
9/32
3/16
1-1
m1
u
inim
"
"
Obstacles above and on the
air discharge side. "
m
imu
Minimum 39-3/8"
Min
6
11/1
19-
imu
Min
6"
11/1
9m1
i
Min
"
1/16
9-1
1
mum
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
|
195
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
PLACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
Clearance Requirements when Different Obstacles are Present, continued. (Unit: Inch)
Where
there
obstacles
both
suction
Where
there
are are
obstacles
on on
both
suction
discharge
sides
(discharge
side
obstacle
and and
discharge
sides
(discharge
side
obstacle
is higher
outdoor
unit).
is higher
thanthan
the the
outdoor
unit).
Wherethere
there are
are obstacles
obstacles above,
Where
above,and
andononboth
both
suctionand
and discharge
discharge sides
suction
sides(discharge
(dischargeside
sideobstacle
obstacle
higher than
than the
the outdoor
isishigher
outdoor unit).
unit).
6"
11/1 16"
19- -11/
umm 19
m
i
ax mu
Table 120: Ratio among H, A, and L.
L
A
M axi
Minimum 39-3/8"
Minimum 39-3/8"
H<L
If a stand is necessary, it should be contained (not open
frame) to prevent the discharge air from short cycling.
6"
/16"
11
19-
M 19
L
H
H
m
imu
Min
"
um /16
inim -11
3/1
1-1 "
m 1 /16
imu -13
Minm 11
imu
Min
0 < L ≤ 1/2 H 29-1/32 inches
1/2 H < L
39-3/8 inches
Set Stand as: L ≤ H
L≤H
um
inim
M
A
L13/16"
11-
m
imu
Min
6"
13/1
11-
A
Where there are obstacles on both suction
and discharge sides (discharge side obstacle
is lower than the outdoor unit).
Where there are obstacles above, and on both
suction and discharge sides (discharge side obstacle
is lower than the outdoor unit).
m
imu
Max
6"
11/1
19-
Minimum 39-3/8"
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
M
H
imu
Min
6"
11/1
9m1
um
im
Min
/16"
13
11-
i
Min
L
M
Series installation
/8"
9-3
m3
u
inim
Side-by-side series installation.
M
Minimum 23-19/32"
/4"
8-3
m7
u
inim
6"
13/1
1m1
imu
Min
Minimum 24"
Minimum 24"
Minimum 39-3/8"
196
|
"
3/16
1-1
1
mum
“L” should be lower
than “H”. If a stand is
necessary, it should
be contained (not
open frame) to prevent the discharge air
from short cycling.
APPLICATION GUIDELINES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
M
um
inim
12"
REFRIGERANT PIPING
DESIGN & LAYOUT
BEST PRACTICES
“Design Guideline Summary” on page 198
“Creating a Balanced System” on page 200
“Condensate Drain Piping” on page 201
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
REFRIGERANT PIPING DESIGN
Design Guideline Summary
The following are examples of manual pipe size calculations. Designers are highly encouraged to use LATS for Multi F systems.
Device Connection Limitations
• The minimum number of connected and operating indoor units to Multi F / Multi F MAX systems is two, taking into consideration of the
minimum combination ratio.
• The maximum number of indoor units for each Multi F / Multi F MAX heat pump systems is:
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
LMU18CHV = 2
LMU24CHV = 3
LMU30CHV = 4
LMU36CHV = 4
LMU480HV = 8
LMU540HV = 8
LMU600HV = 8
One of the most critical elements of multi-zone systems is the refrigerant piping. The following pages list pipe length limits that must be
followed in the design of Multi F and Multi F MAX refrigerant pipe systems:
Using Refrigerant Components
Field-supplied elbows are allowed as long as they are designed for
use with R410A refrigerant. The designer, however, should be cautious with the quantity and size of fittings used, and must account for
the additional pressure losses in equivalent pipe length calculation
for each branch. The equivalent pipe length of each elbow must be
added to each pipe segment.
Table 121:Equivalent Piping Length for Elbows, Y-branches, and Branch
Distribution Units.
Component
1/4
0.5
Elbow (ft.)
Y-Branch Kit (ft., Multi F MAX systems
only)1
Branch Distribution Unit (ft., Multi F
MAX systems only)
1
Size (Inches)
3/8 1/2 5/8
0.6
0.7
0.8
3/4
1.2
1.6
8.2
Kit contains two Y-branches: one for liquid and one for vapor.
Multi F System
Example: LMU36CHV outdoor unit with four (4)
indoor units connected.
ODU: Outdoor Unit.
IDU: Indoor Unit.
A, B, C, D: Pipes from Outdoor Unit to Indoor Unit.
A
B
Max. 49.2 feet
Max. 24.6 feet
C
D
Table 122:Multi F Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Piping System Limitations.
Outdoor Unit
Minimum Length for Each
Pipe (ft.)
LMU18CHV
Maximum Piping Length to Each Indoor Unit (ft.)
A
B
C
D
Maximum Total Piping Length for Each
System (ft.)
10
82
82
-
-
164
LMU24CHV
10
82
82
82
-
246.1
LMU30CHV
10
82
82
82
82
246.1
LMU36CHV
10
82
82
82
82
246.1
198
|
DESIGN & PRACTICES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
REFRIGERANT PIPING DESIGN
Design Guideline Summary
The following are examples of manual pipe size calculations. Designers are highly encouraged to use LATS for Multi F systems.
Multi F MAX System with One Branch Distribution Unit
Example: LMU540HV outdoor unit with
four (4) indoor units, and one (1) branch
distribution unit connected.
IDU
BDU
A
B
h1 ≤ 98.4 feet
h2 ≤ 49.2 feet
IDU
B
IDU
B
h3 ≤ 32.8 feet
Refrigerant Piping Design and Best Practices
ODU: Outdoor Unit.
IDU: Indoor Unit.
BDU: Branch Distribution Unit.
A: Main Pipe.
B: Branch Pipe (Branch Distribution Unit to
Indoor Unit[s]).
ODU
B
IDU
Multi F MAX System with Two Branch Distribution Units
A
Y-Branch
IDU
BDU
B
A
IDU
B
IDU
h4 ≤ 49.2 feet
B
A
IDU
BDU
h2 ≤ 49.2 feet
ODU: Outdoor Unit.
IDU: Indoor Unit.
BD: Branch Distribution Unit(s).
ΣA: Main Pipe.
ΣB: Branch Pipe (Branch Distribution Unit[s] to
Indoor Unit[s]).
ODU
h3 ≤ 32.8 feet
Example: LMU540HV outdoor unit with
seven (7) indoor units, and two (2)
branch distribution units connected.
B
IDU
B
h1 ≤ 98.4 feet
IDU
B
B
IDU
Table 123: Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit Refrigerant Piping System Limitations.
Total piping length (ΣA + ΣB)
Minimum
Main pipe (Outdoor Unit to
Pipe Length
Branch Distribution Units: ΣA)
Maximum
(ELF = Equivalent
Total branch piping length (ΣB)
Length of pipe in Feet)
Minimum
Branch pipe (Branch Distribution Units to Indoor Units: B)
Maximum
If outdoor unit is above or below indoor unit (h1)
Elevation Differential
Between the farthest two indoor units (h2)
(All Elevation
Limitations are
Between branch distribution unit and farthest
Measured in Actual
connected indoor unit(s) (h3)
Feet)
Between branch distribution units (h4)
≤475.7 feet
10 feet
≤180.4 feet
≤295.3 feet
10 feet
≤49.2 feet
≤98.4 feet
≤49.2 feet
Table 124: Multi F MAX Piping Sizes.
Pipe A
Piping Main
Branch Pipe B
(inch)
Liquid
Ø3/8
Gas
Ø3/4
Depends on the size
of the indoor unit piping
≤32.8 feet
≤49.2 feet
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DESIGN & PRACTICES
|
199
REFRIGERANT PIPING DESIGN
Creating a Balanced System / Manual Layout Procedure
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Creating a Balanced / Quality Piping System
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Unlike designing duct-work or chilled and hot water pipe systems where balancing dampers, ball valves, orifices, circuit setters, or other
flow control devices can be installed to modify or balance the flow of cooling medium, these cannot be used in a Multi F system. Therefore,
variable refrigerant flow systems have to be designed to be “self balanced.” Balanced liquid refrigerant distribution is solely dependent on
the designer using the correct pipe size for each segment. Pipe sizing considerations include pipe length, pipe segment pressure drop
relative to other pipe segments in the system, type and quantity of elbows, bends present, fitting installation orientation, and end use device
elevation differences.
The designer should avoid creating excessive pressure drop. When liquid refrigerant is subjected to excessive pressure drop, liquid refrigerant will change state and “flash” to vapor. Vapor present in a stream of liquid refrigerant before reaching the indoor unit coil (or branch
distribution unit for Multi F MAX systems) results in a loss of system control and causes damage to the components. The pipe system must
be designed in a manner that avoids the creation of unwanted vapor.
Refrigerant Piping System Verification
To ensure that the refrigerant piping design is suitable for the system, a LATS refrigerant piping design software report must be provided with
every Multi F order. Following the installation, if any changes or variations to the design were necessary, an “as-built” LATS piping design
software report must be provided to LG prior to system commissioning. User should always check the LATS report actual pipe layout versus
pipe limits.
Any field changes, such as re-routing, shortening or lengthening a pipe segment, adding or eliminating elbows and/or fittings, re-sizing, adding,
or eliminating indoor units, changing the mounting height or moving the location of a device or fitting during installation should be done with caution and ALWAYS VERIFIED in LATS MULTI F SOFTWARE before supplies are purchased or installed. Doing so ensures profitable installation,
eliminates rework, and ensures easier system commissioning.
Manual Layout Procedure
1. Choose the location of the indoor units on the building drawing.
2. Choose the location of all Y-branch and branch distribution units (if a Multi F MAX system) and note them on the building drawing. Verify
that all fittings are positioned per the guideline limitations in “LG Engineered Multi F MAX Y-Branch Kit” on page 217.
3. Plan the route for interconnecting piping. Draw a one-line depiction of the pipe route chosen on the building drawing.
4. Calculate the actual length of each pipe segment and note it on the building drawing.
5. Using the data obtained while selecting the system components, list the corrected cooling capacity next to each indoor unit on the drawing.
6. Starting at the indoor unit located farthest from the outdoor unit, sum the corrected cooling capacity of all indoor units served by the pipe
segment for each branch and runout pipe (indoor units and branch distribution units [Multi F MAX systems only]). Record these values
next to each segment.
7. Verify the size of the liquid and vapor lines.
8. If a Multi F MAX system, refer to the branch distribution unit information on page 227 and the Y-branch kit information on page 233 to
verify the part number of each Y-branch and branch distribution unit based on the connected downstream nominal capacity served.
9. Calculate the equivalent pipe length in feet of each pipe segment. If a Multi F MAX system, Y-branch equivalent lengths should be totaled
with the upstream segment only. Use equivalent pipe length data when it is provided with field-purchased fittings. If not available, use the
data provided in Table 121 on page 198 to estimate the equivalent length of field-provided pipe and fittings for each segment. Equivalent
lengths should be totaled with the upstream segment only.
10. For Multi F systems, verify the equivalent pipe length complies with the limitations in Table 122 on page 198. For Multi F MAX systems,
verify the equivalent pipe length complies with the limitations in Table 123 on page 199. If the limitations are exceeded, either reroute
the pipe or change the location of the indoor unit, Y-branch fittings and branch distribution units (if Multi F MAX systems), so the design
conforms with all limitations.
11. If pipe length is adjusted as described in Step 10 above, verify again if the length of the design complies with the limitations in Table 1220
(Multi F) or Table 1231 (Multi F MAX).
12. Use LATS Multi F software to verify the manually sized pipe design is acceptable. When entering the length of pipe segments in LATS
Multi F software, enter the equivalent pipe length. Account for the additional pressure drop created by elbows, valves, and other fittings
present in each segment by adding their respective equivalent pipe length to the actual pipe length.
200
|
DESIGN & PRACTICES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
INSTALLATION & LAYOUT BEST PRACTICES
Condensate Drain Piping
Condensate Drain Piping
Indoor Units
All indoor units generate water during cooling operation, therefore, how to properly handle this condensation must be considered. Some
indoor units include factory-installed drain pumps; others apply the gravity drain method.
Table 125:Indoor Unit Drain Piping Specifications.
Drain Type
Drain Pipe Diameter (OD / ID, in.)
Art Cool Wall-Mounted
Art Cool Gallery
Standard Wall-Mounted
Ceiling-Concealed Ducted
(Low Static and High Static)
Gravity
Gravity
Gravity
27-1/2 in. Lift Drain Pump,
Factory Installed
27-1/2 in. Lift Drain Pump,
Factory Installed
Gravity
13/16 / 5/8
13/16 / 5/8
13/16 / 5/8
Four-Way Ceiling Cassette
Vertical-Horizontal Air Handling Unit
Figure 258:Diagram of an Indoor Unit with a Gravity Drain.
—
—
—
Ø1-1/4 / Ø1
0.105
Ø1-1/4 / Ø1
0.105
Ø3/4 / —
—
Figure 259:Diagram of an Indoor Unit with a Drain Pump.
≤11-13/16 in.
Insulation
≤Max. 27-1/2 in.
Metal clamp
Flexible drain hose
Drain pan
Drain Amount
(gal. / min. at 0.033 ft. height)
Refrigerant Piping Design and Best Practices
Indoor Unit
Insulation
PVC elbow
PVC
1/50~1/100 slope
PVC
Flexible hose
Drain pump
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
DESIGN & PRACTICES
|
201
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
202
|
DESIGN & PRACTICES
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
“General Information” on page 204
“Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable
Details” on page 207
“Remote Controller Connections” on page 212
“Indoor Unit Group Control” on page 213
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
General Information
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
• All power (line voltage) wiring and communication cable installation must be performed by trained service providers working in accordance
with all local, state, and National Electrical Code (NEC) / UL / ETL federal regulations related to electrical equipment and wiring, and following
the manufacturer product diagrams, requirements, and instructions in this manual. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death.
• Be sure that main power to the unit is completely off before proceeding. Follow all safety and warning information outlined at the beginning of
this manual. Failure to do so may cause electric shock and bodily injury.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously (circuit breaker should be resistant to electromagnetic currents). Be sure that the circuit breaker or some other emergency power cutoff device is in place before any power wiring is done
to the system. Failure to do so may cause bodily injury or death.
•
Never touch any power lines or live cables before all power is cutoff to the system. To do so may cause bodily injury or death.
• Power wiring and communication cable sizes must comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes. Undersized wiring may lead to
unacceptable voltage at the unit and may cause a fire, which may cause bodily injury or death.
• Properly ground the outdoor unit, indoor units, and branch distribution units. Ground wiring must always be installed by a trained technician.
Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, which may cause bodily injury or death.
• Verify that the branch switch and circuit breaker are set to OFF before installing the wiring system. Electric shock can cause physical injury
or death.
• Install appropriately sized breakers / fuses / overcurrent protection switches and wiring in accordance with local, state, and NEC regulations
related to electrical equipment and wiring, and following the instructions in this manual. Generated overcurrent may include some amount of
direct current. Using an oversized breaker or fuse may result in electric shock, physical injury or death.
•
Do not connect ground wire to refrigerant, gas, sewage, or water piping; to lightning rods; to telephone ground wiring; or to the building
plumbing system. Failure to properly provide a NEC-approved earth ground can result in electric shock, fire, physical injury or death.
• Consider ambient conditions (temperature, direct sunlight, inclement weather, etc.) when selecting, installing, and connecting the power
wiring.
• Properly ground the outdoor unit, indoor units, and branch distribution units. Ground wiring must always be installed by a trained technician.
Improperly grounded wire can cause communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage.
• Install appropriately sized breakers / fuses / overcurrent protection switches and wiring in accordance with local, state, and NEC regulations
related to electrical equipment and wiring, and following the instructions in this manual. Generated overcurrent may include some amount of
direct current. Using an oversized breaker or fuse may result in equipment malfunction and property damage.
•
Do not connect ground wire to refrigerant, gas, or water piping; to lightning rods; to telephone ground wiring; or to the building plumbing
system. Failure to properly provide a NEC-approved earth ground can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
•
Do not operate the air conditioning system until the refrigerant piping installation is complete. Operating the system before refrigerant
piping is finalized may damage the compressor.
204
|
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
General Information
Power Supply / Power Wiring Specifications
Figure 260: Multi F / Multi F MAX Outdoor Unit
• Multi F systems operate at 1Ø, 208-230V, 60Hz, and power is wired to the outdoor unit
Power Wiring.
only. The outdoor unit will supply power to the indoor units and the branch distribution
units (Multi F MAX systems only) through the communication / connection (power) cable.
"
1/8
6" ±
• Power supply to the outdoor unit should be selected based on NEC and local codes.
1
/
7
Maximum allowable voltage fluctuation ±10% or nameplate rated value.
• Power wiring to the outdoor unit(s) should be solid or stranded, and must comply with all
Power Wiring, Ground
local and national electrical codes.
to Outdoor Unit
GN
• Properly ground the outdoor unit and indoor unit per NEC and local codes.
/YL
• Ground wire should be longer than the common power / communication wires.
13/
16"
• Connect the wiring firmly so the wires cannot be easily pulled out.
• Refer to the inside of the chassis cover or control cover for circuit and terminal block
diagrams.
"
1/8
• Always match color codes of each wire and follow wiring diagram.
6" ±
1
/
7
•
Do not install power wiring to the outdoor unit and the communication / connection (power) cable
to theGround,
indoor unit in the same conduit.
Power Wiring,
Use separate conduits.
Communication Cable
GN
/YL
13/
16”
GN/YL =grounded,
(Ground, Yellow)
Always have a trained service provider properly ground the outdoor unit. If the outdoor unit is not properly
there is a risk of electric shock,
Power Wiring, Ground
physical injury, or death.
to Outdoor Unit
GN
/YL
Communication / Connection (Power) Cable Specifications
13/
1
"
• Multi F Systems:
Figure 261:Multi F /6Multi
F MAX Outdoor and
Indoor
/
Branch
Distribution
Unit Wiring and Com• All communication / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the indoor
munications Cable Diagram.
unit to be minimum 18 AWG, four (4) conductor, stranded, shielded or unshielded (if
"
1/8
6" ±
shielded, it must be grounded to the chassis of the outdoor unit only), and must com7/1
ply with applicable local and national codes.
Power Wiring, Ground,
Communication Cable
• Multi F MAX Systems:
From Outdoor Unit
• All communication / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the branch
To Indoor Unit or from the
GN
distribution unit(s) to be minimum 16 AWG, four (4) conductor, stranded, shielded or
Outdoor Unit to the Branch
/YL
Distribution Unit
unshielded (if shielded, it must be grounded to the chassis of the outdoor unit only),
13/
and must comply with applicable local and national codes.
16”
GN/YL = (Ground, Yellow)
• All communication / connection (power) cable from the branch distribution unit(s) to
the indoor units to be minimum 18 AWG, four (4) conductor, stranded, shielded or
unshielded (if shielded, it must be grounded to the chassis of the outdoor unit only),
and must comply with applicable local and national codes.
• Insulation material as required by local code.
• Rated for continuous exposure of temperatures up to 140°F.
• Firmly attach the cable; provide slack but secure in a way to prevent external forces from being imparted on the terminal block.
• Wiring should be completed without splices.
• Use a conduit for the communications / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the indoor units and branch distribution unit(s).
Electrical interference my cause product malfunction.
• The communications / connection (power) cable from the outdoor unit to the indoor units / branch distribution unit(s) should be separated and
isolated from power wiring to the outdoor unit, computers, radio and television broadcasting facilities, as well as medical imaging equipment.
Electrical interference my cause product malfunction.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
|
205
Wiring Connections
From Outdoor Unit
To Indoor Unit or from the
/8"
1Branch
Outdoor Unit to the
6" ±
Distribution Unit
7/1
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
General Information
Figure 262:Multi F System General Power / Communications System
Schematic.
Indoor Units
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Power Supply
Circuit Breaker
Ground Wiring
Outdoor Unit
Figure 263:Multi F MAX System General Power / Communications System Schematic.
Indoor Units
BD Unit
Power Supply
Circuit Breaker
BD Unit
Ground Wiring
Outdoor Unit
• Secure the separate wires in the control box panel using zip ties.
• Secure wiring with accessory clamps so that it does not touch piping.
• Use a conduit for the cable.
• Outside the unit, make sure the communications cable / power wiring are separately shielded, otherwise, the outdoor unit operation
may be affected by electrical noise and will malfunction or fail.
• For details on the Multi F with LG RED and Multi F MAX with LG RED units, refer to the engineering manuals on www.lg-dfs.com.
206
|
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details
Figure 264: Multi F LMU18CHV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable.
L1 L2
Power Supply
Main Switch
Outdoor Unit
G
Circuit Breaker
L1
L2
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block
G
L1
Fuse
L2
1(L1) 2(L2) 3(A) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(B)
Three-wire Power Wiring
(Including Ground)
COMMUNICATION CABLE
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
1(L1) 2(L2)
Wiring Connections
POWER WIRING
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Unit A
Unit B
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical
injury or death.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• For Multi F with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring
can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical
components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in
property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
|
207
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
Figure 265:Multi F LMU24CHV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable.
L1 L2
Power Supply
Main Switch
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
G
Circuit Breaker
L1
Outdoor Unit
L2
G
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block
L1
Fuse
L2
1(L1) 2(L2) 3(A) 3(B) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(C)
Three-wire Power Wiring
(Including Ground)
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Unit A
Unit B
Unit C
POWER WIRING
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical
injury or death.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• For Multi F with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring
can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical
components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in
property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
208
|
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details
Figure 266:Multi F LMU30CHV and LMU36CHV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable.
L1 L2
Power Supply
Main Switch
G
Circuit Breaker
L1
Outdoor Unit
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block
L2
G
L1 L2
Fuse
1(L1) 2(L2) 3(A)
1(L1) 2(L2) 3(B) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(C) 1(L1) 2(L2) 3(D)
Three-wire Power Wiring
(Including Ground)
2(L2)
3
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
1(L1)
2(L2)
Wiring Connections
1(L1)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
Unit A
Unit B
Unit C
Unit D
POWER WIRING
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical
injury or death.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• For Multi F with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring
can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical
components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in
property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
|
209
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details
Figure 267:Multi F MAX LMU480HV and LMU540HV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable.
L
N
Power Supply
Main Switch
Outdoor unit
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Circuit Breaker
Three-wire Power Wiring
(Including Ground)
L
N
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block
G
L1
Fuse
L2
1( L1 ) 2 (L2 ) 3 (A ) 1( L1 ) 2 (L2 ) 3 (B)
Branch Distribution Unit (B)
Branch Distribution Unit (A)
1(L1) 2(L2) S
1(L1) 2(L2)
S
* Same Wiring as Branch Distribution Unit (A)
1(L1) 2(L2)
1(L1)
S
2(L2)
1(L1) 2(L2) S
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
1(L1) 2(L2) S
1(L1)
2(L2)
1(L1) 2(L2)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
S
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
POWER WIRING
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical
injury or death.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• For Multi F MAX with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring
can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical
components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in
property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
210
|
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Power Wiring (208-230V) and Communications Cable Details
Figure 268:Multi F MAX LMU600HV System Power Wiring and Communications Cable.
L N
Power Supply
Main Switch
Outdoor unit
Outdoor Unit Terminal Block
Circuit Breaker
Three-wire Power Wiring
(Including Ground)
L
N
G
L1
Fuse
L2
1( L1 ) 2 (L2 ) 3 (A ) 3 (B)
Wiring Connections
Branch Distribution Unit (B)
Branch Distribution Unit (A)
1(L1) 2(L2)
1(L1) 2(L2) S
S
* Same Wiring as Branch Distribution Unit (A)
1(L1) 2(L2) S
1(L1)
2(L2)
1(L1) 2(L2) S
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
1(L1) 2(L2) S
1(L1)
2(L2)
1(L1) 2(L2)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
S
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
1(L1)
2(L2)
3
Indoor Unit Terminal Block
POWER WIRING
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Electric shock can cause physical
injury or death.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent accidental electrical shock during current leakage, communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Do not connect the ground line to the pipes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Electric shock can cause physical injury or death.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring may result in fire, electric shock, physical injury or death.
• For Multi F MAX with LGRED, refer to Multi F & Multi F MAX with LGRED ODU engineering manual.
• Ground wiring is required to prevent communication problems from electrical noise, and motor current leakage. Failure to provide proper ground wiring
can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• All field-supplied wiring, components, and materials should follow national, state, and local codes and requirements. Failure to install proper electrical
components can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Use only stranded, shielded or unshielded copper communications / power wiring from the outdoor unit to the indoor units. If shielded, wiring must be
grounded to the chassis at the outdoor unit only. Failure to install proper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Install a main shutoff switch or circuit breaker that interrupts all power sources simultaneously. Failure to install proper electric components can result in
property damage and equipment malfunction.
• Wiring cable size must comply with applicable national, state, and local codes. Improper wiring can result in property damage and equipment malfunction.
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
|
211
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Remote Controller Connections
• Communication cable from indoor unit to remote controller(s) is to be 22 AWG, 3-conductor, twisted, stranded, unshielded. Wiring must
comply with all applicable local and national codes.
• If using the LG Controller / Extension cable and the length needs to be further extended, the LG Extension Kit (sold separately) must be
used. A maximum of four (4) kits (up to 165 feet) can be used.
• Remote controllers have hardwired connections: SIG - 12V - GND (Comm.) terminals.
• Indoor unit controller connections depend on type of indoor unit being installed. Some indoor units use terminal block connections; other
indoor units use Molex connections. See diagrams below for the two options. Refer to the wiring diagram schematic found in the indoor unit
itself, or to the indoor unit wiring diagrams in the Engineering Manuals for more information.
•
NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length with field provided cable. Always include enough cable to cover distance between the indoor
unit and the remote controller.
• Set the indoor unit operating parameters using DIP switches, or by setting up the remote controller. Refer to the indoor unit installation
manuals for more details.
Common
Signal
12VDC
Figure 269:One Example of Indoor Unit to Zone Controller Connection.
YL
RD
Figure 270:Another Example of Indoor Unit to Zone Controller
Connection.
BK
4 5 6
Indoor Unit
CN-REMO
BK
Not used
Not used
Not used
BACnet Common
BACnet-
13 14 15
BACnet+
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
From Indoor Units to Remote Controllers
RD YL
Typical Indoor Unit
YL RDBK
Front
Cable connected to Zone Controller is the factory default connection.
212
|
WIRING CONNECTIONS
CN-REMO
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
Back
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Indoor Unit Group Control
Between Multiple Indoor Units Operating as a
Group (Group Control)
Figure 271:Example of Indoor Unit Group to Zone
Controller Connections (Sig-12V-GND [Comm.]
Terminal).
If any indoor units were specified to operate in unison:
• Before running cable, decide which indoor unit will be the “Master.” The other indoor
units in that group will be designated as “Slave(s).” The zone controller will be connected to the “Master.”
• Set the pertinent DIP switch at each indoor unit to identify the Master and Slave(s).
On wall mounted indoor unit models, set the assignment using the handheld remote
controller.
• Use a daisy chain configuration and connect all of the group’s indoor units together
starting at the “Master” unit.
•
NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length with field provided cable. Always
include enough cable to cover distance between all components.
For indoor units with hardwired connections SIG - 12V - GND (Comm.)
terminals:
Indoor Unit
Signal 12VDC Comm.
Signal 12VDC Comm.
4
5
Indoor Unit
Signal 12VDC Comm.
6
Signal 12VDC Comm.
Figure 272:Example of Indoor Unit Group to Zone
Controller Connections (CN-REMO).
On All Indoor Unit Styles On All Indoor Unit Styles
CN-REMO
CN-REMO
On All Indoor Unit Styles
CN-REMO
LG
Supplied
LG Supplied Group Control Kit (PZCWRCG3)
For indoor units with CN-REMO connections:
Use one (or multiple) Group Control Kit(s) (sold separately) containing extension and
Y-splitter cables. Use one (1) group control cable kit for each indoor unit in the group
except for the last indoor unit.
NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length with field
provided cable.
Table 126:Accessories for Some Group Control Applications.
Model
Accessory
Image
• Cable connected to zone controller is the factory default connection.
Number
• Indoor unit connections depend on indoor unit type.
General Specifications
Wired Remote Group Control
Cable Assembly - Required
PZCWRCG3
for connecting multiple indoor
units to a control group
• Wired remote controllers can be connected to all indoor unit types.
• Wireless controllers can be used in conjunction with wired remote controllers.
Wired Remote/Wired Remote
• A dry contact unit can be connected with a central controller simultaneously.
Extension Cable - Required
- The master indoor unit is recognized by the dry contact unit and the central
for extending the distance
controller.
PZCWRC1
between indoor units or
- Group Control only available for indoor units manufactured after February
remote controllers in a control
2009.
group
- The central controller can control indoor units after setting the address of the
master indoor unit only.
- Slave indoor unit cannot be individually controlled by central controller.
- Slave indoor unit will operate like master indoor unit.
• If an error occurs with the indoor unit, the error will be displayed on the wired remote controller.
• The following functions are available with group control:
• Selection of operation options (operation/mode/set temperature)
• Control of air flow rate (High/Medium/Low)
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
WIRING CONNECTIONS
|
213
Wiring Connections
• From the controller to the master indoor unit, use 22 AWG, 3-conductor, twisted,
stranded, unshielded. All wiring must comply with all applicable local / national codes.
• From the master indoor unit to the slave indoor unit(s), daisy chain using 22 AWG,
3-conductor, twisted, stranded, unshielded. All wiring must comply with all applicable
local / national codes.
•(
Do not attach wire to 12VDC terminal to the slave indoor units). All wiring must
comply with all applicable local and national codes.
•
NEVER splice, cut, or extend cable length; always include enough cable to cover
distance between all components.
Master Indoor Unit
MULTI F
MULTI F MAX
ACRONYMS
Multi F and Multi F MAX Indoor Unit Engineering Manual
Table 127: Table of Acronyms.
ABS
Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
IAQ
Indoor Air Quality
AC
Air Conditioner
IDU
Indoor Unit
ACP
Advanced Control Platform
IUCF
Indoor Unit Correction Factor
ARI
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
KTL
Korea Testing Laboratories
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and
Air Conditioning
LATS
LG Air Conditioning Technical Solution
AWG
American Wire Gauge
LGAP
LG Air Conditioner Protocol
BDU
Branch Distribution (Unit)
MAT
Mixed Air Temperature
Btu/h
British Thermal Units per hour
MBh
Thousands BTUs per hour
CCR
Corrected Capacity Ratio
MCA
Maximum Circuit Ampacity
CDOA
Coupled Dedicated Outdoor Air
MFS
Maximum Fuse Size
CFM
Cubic Feet per Minute
NEC
National Electrical Code
CR
Combination Ratio
OAT
Outdoor Air Temperature
DB
Dry Bulb
ODU
Outdoor Unit
dB(A)
Decibels with “A” frequency weighting
OUCF
Outdoor Unit Correction Factor
DDOAS
Decoupled Dedicated Outdoor Air
PDI
Power Distribution Indicator
DFS
Duct-Free Split
PI
Power Input
DI
Digital Input
PTAC
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner
DO
Digital Output
PVE
Polyvinyl Ether
EEV
Electronic Expansion Valve
RAT
Return Air Temperature
ELF
Equivalent Length in Feet
RCL
Refrigerant Concentration Limit
EPDM
Ethylene Propylene Diene M-Class Rubber
SC
Sensible Capacity
ESP
External Static Pressure
TC
Total Capacity
ETL
Electronic Testing Laboratories
VAV
Variable Air Volume
HACR
Heating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration
VRF
Variable Refrigerant Flow
H/M/L
High / Medium / Low
VRP
Ventilation Rate Procedure
214
|
WIRING CONNECTIONS
Due to our policy of continuous product innovation, some specifications may change without notification.
©LG Electronics U.S.A., Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ. All rights reserved. “LG” is a registered trademark of LG Corp.
20001747
ISO 9001: 2008
LG ELECTRONICS INC.
LG Electronics, U.S.A., Inc.
Commercial Air Conditioning Division
4300 North Point Parkway
Alpharetta, Georgia 30022
www.lg-dfs.com
LG Electronics Products Support
1-888-865-3026 USA
Follow the prompts for HVAC products.
EM_MultiF_IDU_3_18
Supersedes EM_MultiF_IDU_10_17
EM_MultiF_IDU_11_16
EM_MultiF_IDU_7_16
EM_MultiF_IDU_7_15
EM-MultiFIDU-01-15
EM-MultiFIDU-06-14
DFS-EM-AJ-002-US 014A03
Download PDF

advertising